Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
Catalogue number.
008 911 63 03/2008
Table of Contents
General 7
1.1 Introduction 8
1.2 Safety regulations 9
1.3 General repair instructions 14
1.4 Tightening torques 24
Maintenance 29
2.1 General notes on maintenance 30
2.2 Table of fuels and lubricants 32
2.3 Running-in instructions 33
2.4 Maintenance chart 34
Technical data 37
3.1 Technical data 38
Connection overview 47
4.1 Connection overview 48
Tests and adjustments 51
5.1 Special tools, tests and adjustments 52
5.2 Checking the rotation speeds 56
5.3 Checking / adjusting the neutral positions of the travel pump 58
5.4 Pressure tests in the travel circuit 60
5.5 Checking / adjusting the vibrator shaft speeds 62
5.6 Pressure measurements in the vibration circuit 63
5.7 Check the leakage rate of the vibration motor 64
5.8 Pressure test in steering circuit 65
Flushing and bleeding 67
6.1 Special tools for flushing 68
6.2 Flushing - general 73
6.3 Flushing schematic travel circuit (distribution travel pump) 75
6.4 Flushing the travel circuit (travel pump distribution) 77
6.5 Flushing schematic travel circuit (distribution axle motor) 83
6.6 Flushing the travel circuit (axle motor distribution) 88
6.7 Flushing schematic for vibration drive 93
6.8 Flushing the vibration circuit 94
6.9 Bleeding the travel circuit 98
6.10 Bleeding the vibration circuit 100
Fundamental electrics 103
7.1 Understanding circuit diagrams 104
7.2 Terminal designations 109
7.3 Current and voltage 113
7.4 CAN-Bus 116
7.5 Resistance 118
7.6 Series / parallel connection 120
7.7 Ohm's law 122
7.8 Electrical energy 122
7.9 Formula diagram 123
7.10 Metrology 124
7.11 Diodes, relays, fuses 127
Documentation
For the BOMAG machines described in this training
manual the following documentation is additionally
available:
1 Operating and maintenance instructions
2 Spare parts catalogue
3 Wiring diagram*
4 Hydraulic diagram*
5 Service Information
Danger
!
Caution
! Danger
!
Paragraphs marked like this highlight possible Electric shock!
dangers for machines or parts of the machine.
Sparks, fire hazard, burning of skin!
Infrared or ultraviolet radiation (arc), flashing of
i Note
eyes!
Paragraphs marked like this contain technical infor-
mation for the optimal economical use of the machine. Health hazard caused by welding work on highly
alloyed work pieces, metal coatings, paint coat-
ings, plastic coatings, oil containing dirt deposits,
Environment grease or solvent residues, etc.!
Paragraphs marked like this point out practices ● Check welding equipment and cables for damage
for safe and environmental disposal of fuels and before use (also the validity of inspection stickers).
lubricants as well as replacement parts.
● Ensure good conductivity between earth cable and
Observe the regulations for the protection of the work piece.
environment.
● Start the extraction fan before starting work and
guide with the progressing work as required.
General
●
Always isolate the burner when laying it down (re-
●
Before starting repair work stand the machine on move possible electrode residues).
level and solid ground.
● Protect cables from being damaged, use cables
● Always secure the machine against unintended roll- with insulated couplings.
ing.
●
Ensure sufficient fire protection, keep a fire extin-
● Secure the engine reliably against unintentional guisher at hand.
starting.
● In case of welding work in fire or explosion endan- full face visor; a facility suitable for rinsing the eyes
gered environments, you should always ask for a should also be available.
welding permission. ● Avoid prolonged and repetitive contact with oil, es-
● Remove combustible parts from the vicinity or cover pecially with old oil. In case of open incisions and in-
such parts. juries seek medical advice immediately.
● Name a fire watch during and after welding work. ● Apply protective cream before starting work, so that
oil can be easier removed from the skin.
● Do not clamp the welding rod holder and the inert
gas welding gun under your arm and lay these parts ● Wash with soap and water to ensure that all oil has
only on an insulated top. been removed (a skin cleaning agent and a nail
● Place the inert gas bottles in a safe place and se- brush will help). Lanolin containing agents will re-
cure them against falling over. place natural skin oils that were lost.
● Do not use gasoline, kerosene, diesel, thinner or
● Use a protective screen or an arcing shield with
solvents to wash the skin.
welding glass, wear welding gloves and clothes,
this applies also for assisting persons. ● Do not put oil soaked cloths into your pockets.
● Switch the welding unit off before connecting weld- ● Avoid clothes, especially underpants, getting soiled
ing cables. by oil.
Synthetic rubber
Many O-rings, hoses and similar parts, which are ap-
parently made of natural rubber, are actually made of
Air conditioning system from April 1989). Paragraph 10 of the pressure ves-
sel directive demands that these pressure contain-
ers must be periodically inspected and tested by a
Caution
!
specialist, according to paragraph 32. In this case
Lines in the air conditioning system must only be periodically recurring inspections consist of external
loosened by trained and explicitly instructed ex- examinations, normally on containers in operation.
perts. The refrigerant container must be visually inspected
two times per year, within the frame work of major
● Wear safety goggles! Put on your safety goggles.
inspections. Special attention must thereby be paid
This will protect your eyes against coming into con-
to signs of corrosion and mechanical damage. If the
tact with refrigerant, which could cause severe
container is in no good condition, it should be re-
damage by freezing.
placed for safety reasons, in order to protect the op-
● Wear safety gloves and an apron! Refrigerant are erator or third parties against the dangers when
excellent solvents for greases and oils. In contact handling or operating pressure vessels.
with skin they will remove the protective grease film. ● Secure pressure vessels against tipping over or roll-
However, degreased skin is very sensitive against
ing away.
cold temperatures and germs.
● Do not throw pressure vessels. Pressure vessels
● Do not allow liquid refrigerants to come into contact
may thereby be deformed to such an extent, that
with skin! Refrigerant takes the heat required for
they will crack. The sudden evaporation and escape
evaporation from the environment. Very low tem-
of refrigerant releases excessive forces. This ap-
peratures may be reached. The results may be local
plies also when snapping off valves on bottles. Bot-
frost injuries (boiling point of R134a -26.5°C at am-
tles must therefore only be transported with the
bient pressure).
safety caps properly installed.
● Do not inhale higher concentrations of refrigerant ●
Refrigerant bottles must never be placed near heat-
vapours! Escaping refrigerant vapours will mix with
ing radiators. Higher temperatures will cause higher
the ambient air and displace the oxygen required for
pressures, whereby the permissible pressure of the
breathing.
vessel may be exceeded. The pressure vessel di-
● Smoking is strictly prohibited! Refrigerants may be rective therefore specifies that a pressure vessel
decomposed by a glowing cigarette. The resulting should not be warmed up to temperatures above 50
substances are highly toxic and must not be in- °C.
haled. ●
Do not heat up refrigerant bottles with an open
● Welding and soldering on refrigeration equipment! flame. Excessive temperatures can damage the
Before starting welding or soldering work on vehi- material and cause the decomposition of refriger-
cles, (in the vicinity ant.
of air conditioning components) all refrigerant must ●
Do not overfill refrigerant bottles, since any temper-
be drawn out and the rests removed by blowing out
ature increase will cause enormous pressures.
the system with nitrogen. The decomposition prod-
ucts created from the refrigerant under the influence
of heat not only are highly toxic, but also have a Environment
strong corrosive effect, so that pipes and system In operation, during maintenance and repair work
components may be attacked. The substance is and when taking refrigeration systems our of
mainly fluorohydrogen. service it is not permitted to let refrigerant escape
● Pungent smell! In case of a pungent smell the afore into the atmosphere, which would contradict the
mentioned decomposition products have already current status of technology.
been created. Extreme care must be exercised not
to inhale these substances, as otherwise the respi- Battery
ratory system, the lungs and other organs may be ● Wear goggles and face protection (acid).
harmed.
● Wear suitable clothes to protect face, hands and
● When blowing out components with compressed air
body (acid).
and nitrogen the gas mixture escaping from the
components must be extracted via suitable exhaust
●
Work and store accumulators only well ventilated
facilities (workshop exhaust systems). rooms. (Development of oxyhydrogen gas).
● Do not lean over the battery while it is under load,
Handling pressure vessels being charged or tested. (Danger of explosion).
● Since the fluid container is pressurized, the manu- ● Burning cigarettes, flames or sparks can cause ex-
facture and testing of these pressure vessels is gov- plosion of the accumulator
erned by the pressure vessel directive. (New edition ● Keep ignition sources away from the battery.
General Electrics
1.3 General repair instructions
●
Before removing or disassembling and parts, hoses General
or components mark these parts for easier assem-
The electric and electronic systems in construction
bly.
equipment are becoming more and more extensive.
● Before assembly oil or grease all parts, as far as this Electronic elements are increasingly gaining impor-
is necessary. tance in hydraulic and mechanical vehicle systems.
General:
●
Before changing any expensive components, such
as control units, you should run a systematic trouble
shooting session to eliminate any other possible
fault sources. Electric signals must be checked at
the locations to which they are applied, i.e. on con-
trol unit or sensor technology. So, if the system had
been diagnosed without unplugging the control unit
and checking the wiring, one should be alerted.
● Check for good cable and ground contacts, there-
fore keep all mechanical transition points between
electric conductors (terminals, plugs) free of oxide
and dirt, as far as this is possible.
●
Perform trouble shooting in a systematic way. Do
not become confused by the high number and vari-
ety of electric cables, current can only flow in a
closed circuit. You should first become acquainted
with the function of the corresponding electric circuit
by following the correct wiring diagram. Detected
faults should be rectified immediately. If the system
still does not work correctly after this measure, trou-
ble shooting must be continued. Several faults very
rarely occur at the same time, but it is not impossi-
ble.
●
Do not disconnect or connect battery or generator
while the engine is running.
● Do not operate the main battery switch under load.
!Caution
Switch off the main battery switch, doisconnect
the generator and pull the plug out on the control
unit before starting welding work.
Fig. 2
●
Lubricate sealing lips 1 (Fig. 2) with clean grease; in
case of double seals fill the space between the seal-
ing lips with a generous amount of grease.
●
Slide the seal over the shaft, with the lip facing to-
wards the fluid to be sealed.
i Note
If possible, use an assembly sleeve 1 (Fig. 2), to pro-
tect the lip from being damaged by sharp edges,
!Caution !Caution
Feather keys must only be reused if they show no Ball and roller bearings must only be reinstalled
differences to new feather keys, any notches must after it has been assured that they are in perfect
be considered as initial signs of wear. condition.
Fig. 4
● Clean and thoroughly examine the feather key.
● Debur and thoroughly clean the edges of the key-
way with a fine file before reassembling.
Fig. 5
● Remove any lubricant residues from the bearing to
be examined by washing it with gasoline or any oth-
er appropriate degreasing agent. Cleanliness is of
utmost importance for all related work.
●
Check balls or rollers, running surfaces, outer faces
of outer races and inner faces of inner races for vis-
ible damage. If necessary replace the bearing with
a new one, since these symptoms are first signs of
wear.
●
Hold the bearing with you thumb and the index fin-
ger by the inner race, rotate the outer race and
make sure that it runs without friction. Hold the
bearing by the outer race and repeat this test with
the inner race.
●
Move the outer race gently to and fro while holding
it by the inner race; check for resistance while rotat-
ing and replace the bearing if it does not work cor-
rectly.
● Lubricate the bearing with an appropriate lubricant
before reinstalling.
i Note
However, these values are by no means identical with
the tightening torques, which are to be set on a torque
wrench. The corresponding calculation requires a
higher effort and, in the end, depends on the materials
to be bolted together.
● black oiled
● with surface protection A4C
● with surface protection DACROMET
i Note
DACROMET is a surface protection that mainly consists of zinc and aluminium in a chromium oxide matrix. DAC-
ROMETIZATION provides excellent corrosion protection for metal surfaces by applying a mineral coating with
metallic-silver appearance.
Tightening torques Nm
Screw dimension
8.8 10.9 12.9
M4 3 5 5
M5 6 9 10
M6 10 15 18
M8 25 35 45
M10 50 75 83
M12 88 123 147
M14 137 196 235
M16 211 300 358
M18 290 412 490
M20 412 578 696
M22 560 785 942
M24 711 1000 1200
M27 1050 1480 1774
M30 1420 2010 2400
1 Coefficient of friction μ tot. = 0,14
Tightening torques Nm
Screw dimension
8.8 10.9 12.9
M8 x 1 26 37 48
M10 x 1.25 52 76 88
M12 x 1,25 98 137 126
M12 x 1.5 93 127 152
M14 x 1.5 152 216 255
M16 x 1.5 225 318 383
M18 x 1.5 324 466 554
M20 x 1.5 461 628 775
M22 x 1.5 618 863 1058
M24 x 2 780 1098 1294
M27 x2 1147 1578 1920
M30 x 2 1568 2254 2695
1 Coefficient of friction μ tot. = 0,14
Tightening torques Nm
Screw dimension
8.8 10.9 12.9
M16 169 240 287
M16 x 1.5 180 255 307
M18 232 330 392
M18 x 1.5 260 373 444
M20 330 463 557
M20 x 1.5 369 502 620
M22 448 628 754
M22 x 1.5 495 691 847
M24 569 800 960
M24 x 2 624 879 1036
M27 840 1184 1520
M27 X 2 918 1263 1536
M30 1136 1608 1920
M30 x 2 1255 1804 2156
3/4“ - 10 UNC 276 388 464
3/4“ - 16 UNC 308 432 520
1 Anti-seizure paste (copper paste) is used for the assembly of screw connections, which are exposed to high temperatures and corrosive
effects. Prevents seizure and corrosion.
Tightening torques Nm
Thread diameter
10.9
M12x1.5 100
M14x1.5 150
M18x1.5 300 - 350
M20x1.5 400 - 500
M22x1.5 500 - 600
1 Coefficient of friction μ tot. = 0,14
2 These values result in a 90% utilization of the yield point
i Note
The difference between Withworth and UNF/UNC threads is the fact that UNF and UNC threads have 60° flanks,
as the metric ISO-thread, whereas Withworth has a flank of only 55°.
DACROMET is a surface protection that mainly consists of zinc and aluminium in a chromium oxide matrix. DAC-
ROMETIZATION provides excellent corrosion protection for metal surfaces by applying a mineral coating with
metallic-silver appearance.
Tightening torques for screws with UNC thread, 1 UNC Unified Coarse Thread Series, American Unified
Coarse Thread
Tightening torques Nm
Screw dimension
8.8 10.9 12.9
1/4“ - 20 11 15 19
5/16“ - 18 23 32 39
3/8“ - 16 39 55 66
7/16“ - 14 62 87 105
1/2“ - 13 96 135 160
9/16“ - 12 140 200 235
5/8“ - 11 195 275 330
3/4“ - 10 345 485 580
7/8“ - 9 560 770 940
1“ - 8 850 1200 1450
1 1/8“ - 7 1200 1700 2000
1 1/4“ - 7 1700 2400 2900
1 3/8“ - 6 2200 3100 3700
1 1/2“ - 6 3000 4200 5100
1 Coefficient of friction μ tot. = 0,14
Tightening torques for screws with UNF thread, 1 UNF Unified National Fine Thread Series, American
Unified Fine Thread
Tightening torques Nm
Screw dimension
8.8 10.9 12.9
1/4“ - 28 13 18 22
5/16“ - 24 25 35 42
3/8“ - 24 45 63 76
7/16“ - 20 70 100 120
1/2“ - 20 110 155 185
9/16“ - 18 155 220 260
5/8“ - 18 220 310 370
3/4“ - 16 385 540 650
7/8“ -14 620 870 1050
Tightening torques Nm
Screw dimension
8.8 10.9 12.9
1“ - 12 930 1300 1600
1 1/8“ - 12 1350 1900 2300
1 1/4“ - 12 1900 2700 3200
1 3/8“ - 12 2600 3700 4400
1 1/2“ - 12 3300 4600 5600
1 Coefficient of friction μ tot. = 0,14
2.1 General notes on maintenance the engine's performance and temperature level as
well as the quality of the exhaust gas.
When servicing the machine pay careful attention to If your machine has to operate permanently in "thin
all applicable safety instructions. air" (at high altitudes) and with full power, you should
Thorough maintenance of the machine ensures max- consult the after sales service of BOMAG or the serv-
imum reliability and prolongs the lifetime of important ice department of the engine manufacturer.
components. The necessary effort can by no means
be compared with the problems and malfunctions that Notes on the hydraulic system
could occur if this is not observed.
During maintenance work in the hydraulic system
The terms left/right are always related to travel direc-
cleanliness is of utmost importance. Make sure that
tion forward.
no dirt or other impurities can enter into the system.
● Clean machine and engine thoroughly before start- Small particles can flute valves, cause pumps to seize
ing maintenance work. and block restrictors and pilot bores, thereby causing
● For maintenance work park the machine on level costly repairs.
ground. ● If during the daily oil level check the oil level is found
to have dropped, check all lines, hoses and compo-
● Maintenance work must generally be carried out
nents for leakages.
with the engine shut down.
● Seal external leaks immediately. If necessary in-
● Depressurize hydraulic lines before working on
form the responsible service department.
them.
●
Disconnect the battery and cover it with insulation
●
Do not store drums with hydraulic oil outside, or at
material before starting to work on electrical compo- least keep them under a cover. During weather
nents. changes water may penetrate through the bung-
hole.
●
Always attach the articulation lock (transport lock) ●
Always fill the hydraulic system using the filling and
before starting to work in the articulation area of the
filtering unit (BOMAG part-no.
machine.
007 610 01). This unit is equipped with a fine filter,
which filters the hydraulic oil and prolongs the life-
Environment time of the system filter.
Catch running out oils, coolant and fuel and do ●
Clean fittings, filler caps and their immediate sur-
not let them seep into the ground or into the sew- rounding area before removing them, so that no dirt
age system. Dispose of oils, coolant and fuels en- can fall in.
vironmentally.
●
Do not leave the tank opening unnecessarily open,
cover it so that no dirt can fall in.
Notes on the fuel system
The lifetime of the diesel engine is decisively depend- Notes on the cooling system
ing on the cleanliness of the fuel.
On water cooled engines the preparation and monitor-
● Keep the engine free of dirt and water as this could ing of the coolant is of utmost importance, as other-
damage the injection elements of the engine. wise engine failures caused by corrosion, caviation
●
Zinc lined drums are not suitable for storing fuel. and freezing may occur.
● The fuel drum should rest for a longer period of time The coolant is a mixture of water and a cooling system
before drawing off fuel. protection agent.
● Do not let the suction hose disturb the sludge on the The cooling system must be permanently monitored.
bottom of the drum. Apart from the coolant level inspection this includes
also the inspection of the concentration of cooling sys-
● Do not draw off fuel from near the bottom of the fuel tem protection agent.
drum.
The concentration of the cooling system protection
●
Fuel left in the fuel drum is not suitable for the en- agent can be checked with commercially available
gine and should only be used for cleaning purpos- test instruments (glycomat).
es.
Danger
!
Notes on the engine performance
Health hazard!
Combustion air and fuel injection rates of the diesel
engine have been carefully adjusted and determine
Environment
Cooling system protection agents must be dis-
posed of environmentally.
API: CG-4/CH-4
SAE 10W/40
SAE 15W/40
Fuel
Hydraulic system Hydraulic oil (ISO), HV46, kinem. viscosity approx. 60 litres
46 mm2/s at 40 °C
Drive axle Gear oil SAE 90, API GL5 approx. 9,5 litres
Wheel hubs Gear oil SAE 90, API GL5 approx. 1,9 per side
! Caution
Up to approx. 250 operating hours check the en-
gine oil level twice every day.
Depending on the load the engine is subjected to,
the oil consumption will drop to the normal level
after approx. 100 to 250 operating hours.
as required
5.6 Check the engine oil level Dipstick mark X
5.7 Check the water separator X
5.8 Check the fuel level X
5.9 Check the hydraulic oil level Inspection glass X
5.10 Check the coolant level Inspection glass X
5.11 Check the dust separator X
5.12 Check the tire pressure X
5.13 Clean the cooling fins on engine and hy- X
draulic oil cooler
5.14 Check the oil level in the drive axle X
5.15 Check the oil level in the wheel hubs X
5.16 Check the oil level in the vibration bear- X
ings
5.17 Change engine oil and oil filter car- min. 1x per year X X
tridge1
5.18 Drain the sludge from the fuel tank X
5.19 Service the battery Pole grease X
5.20 Check, replace the refrigerant compres- X
sor V-belt
5.21 Service the air conditioning X
5.22 Check, adjust the valve clearance Intake = 0,3 mm X
Exhaust = 0,5 mm
5.23 Check, replace the ribbed V-belt X
5.24 Change the fuel filter cartridge X
5.25 Change the fuel pre-filter cartridge X
5.26 Check the engine mounts X X
5.27 Oil change in drive axle min. 1x per year X X
5.28 Oil change in wheel hubs min. 1x per year X X
5.29 Oil change vibration bearings2 see foot note, min. X X
1 x per year
5.30 Retighten the fastening of the axle on X
the frame
as required
5.31 Tighten the wheel nuts X X
5.32 Check the ROPS X
5.33 Clean the oil bath air filter min. 1x per year X
5.34 Change hydraulic oil and breather filter at least every 2
3
X
years
5.35 Change the hydraulic oil filter*** at least every 2 X
years
5.36 Change the coolant at least every 2 X
years
5.37 Check the injection valves X
5.38 Service the combustion air filter min. 1x per year, X
safety cartridge at
least every 2 years
5.39 Adjusting the scrapers X
5.40 Adjust the parking brake X
5.41 Change the tires X
5.42 Change the fresh air filter in the cabin X
5.43 Tightening torques X
5.44 Engine conservation X
1 Oil change intervals depend on quality of oil and fuel (sulphur content)
2 Oil change intervals after 250 h, after 500 h, after 1000 h, and then every 1000 h.
3 Also in case of repair in the hydraulic system.
Fig. 10
Dimensions in A B D H H2 K L O1 O2 S W
mm
BW 211 D-40 2960 2250 1500 2268 2972 490 5840 60 60 25 2130
BW 211 PD-40 2960 2250 1480 2268 2972 490 5840 60 60 25 2130
Weights
Operating weight (CECE) kg 9500 10500
with ROPS and cabin
Axle load, drum (CECE) kg 5750 6750
Rear axle load (CECE) kg 3750 3750
Static linear load kg/cm 27 -
Travel characteristics
Travel speed (1) km/h 0 ... 6 0 ... 6
Travel speed (2) km/h 0 ... 10 0 ... 10
Max. gradability (depend- % 45 49
ing on soil)
Engine
Engine manufacturer Deutz Deutz
Type BF4M 2012C BF4M 2012C
Cooling Water Water
Number of cylinders 4 4
Rated power DIN ISO kW 98 98
3046
Rated speed 1 rpm 2300 2300
Fuel Diesel Diesel
Electrical equipment V 12 12
Drive system hydrostatic hydrostatic
Driven axles 2 2
Brakes
Service brake hydrostatic hydrostatic
Parking brake hydr.-mech. hydr.-mech.
Vibration
Vibrating drum 1 1
Drive system hydrostatic hydrostatic
Frequency Hz 30/36 30/36
Amplitude mm 1,8/0,9 1,64/0,82
Tires
Tire size 23.1-26/12 PR TL C7 23.1-26/12TL R1
Air pressure bar 1,4 1,4
Filling capacities
Engine Litres 10 10
Fuel Litres 250 250
Hydraulic oil Litres 60 60
Coolant Litres 16 16
1 The right for technical modifications remains reserved
Fig. 11
Dimensions in A B D H H2 K L O1 O2 S W
mm
BW 212 D-40 2960 2250 1500 2268 2972 490 5840 60 60 25 2130
BW 212 PD-40 2960 2250 1480 2268 2972 490 5840 60 60 25 2130
1
BW 212 D-40 BW 212 PD-40
Weights
Operating weight (CECE) kg 10900 11350
with ROPS and cabin
Axle load, drum (CECE) kg 7150 7600
Rear axle load (CECE) kg 3750 3750
Static linear load kg/cm 33,6 -
Travel characteristics
Travel speed (1) km/h 0 ... 6 0 ... 6
Travel speed (2) km/h 0 ... 10 0 ... 10
Max. gradability (depend- % 45 49
ing on soil)
Engine
Engine manufacturer Deutz Deutz
Type BF4M 2012C BF4M 2012C
Cooling Water Water
Number of cylinders 4 4
Rated power DIN ISO kW 98 98
3046
Rated speed 1 rpm 2300 2300
Fuel Diesel Diesel
Electrical equipment V 12 12
Drive system hydrostatic hydrostatic
Driven axles 2 2
Brakes
Service brake hydrostatic hydrostatic
Steering
Type of steering articulated articulated
Steering operation hydrostatic hydrostatic
Vibration
Vibrating drum 1 1
Drive system hydrostatic hydrostatic
Frequency Hz 30/36 30/36
Amplitude mm 1,8/0,9 1,64/0,82
Tires
Tire size 23.1-26/12 PR TL C7 23.1-26/12TL R1
Air pressure bar 1,4 1,4
Filling capacities
Engine Litres 10 10
Fuel Litres 250 250
Hydraulic oil Litres 60 60
Coolant Litres 16 16
1 The right for technical modifications remains reserved
Fig. 12
Dimensions in A B D H H2 K L O1 O2 S W
mm
BW 213 D-40 2960 2250 1500 2268 2972 490 5840 60 60 35 2130
BW 213 PD-40 2960 2250 1480 2268 2972 490 5840 60 60 25 2130
1
BW 213 D-40 BW 213 PD-40
Weights
Operating weight (CECE) kg 12420 12870
with ROPS and cabin
Axle load, drum (CECE) kg 7820 8270
Rear axle load (CECE) kg 4600 4600
Static linear load kg/cm 36,7 -
Travel characteristics
Travel speed (1) km/h 0 ... 6 0 ... 6
Travel speed (2) km/h 0 ... 10 0 ... 10
Max. gradability (depend- % 45 49
ing on soil)
Engine
Engine manufacturer Deutz Deutz
Type BF4M 2012C BF4M 2012C
Cooling Water Water
Number of cylinders 4 4
Rated power DIN ISO kW 98 98
3046
Rated speed 1 rpm 2300 2300
Fuel Diesel Diesel
Electrical equipment V 12 12
Drive system hydrostatic hydrostatic
Driven axles 2 2
Brakes
Service brake hydrostatic hydrostatic
Steering
Type of steering articulated articulated
Steering operation hydrostatic hydrostatic
Vibration
Vibrating drum 1 1
Drive system hydrostatic hydrostatic
Frequency Hz 30/36 30/36
Amplitude mm 1,8/0,9 1,64/0,82
Tires
Tire size 23.1-26/12 PR TL C7 23.1-26/12TL R1
Air pressure bar 1,4 1,4
Filling capacities
Engine Litres 10 10
Fuel Litres 250 250
Hydraulic oil Litres 60 60
Coolant Litres 16 16
1 The right for technical modifications remains reserved
Travel pump
Manufacturer Sauer
Type 90R 075
System Axial piston/swash plate
Max. displacement cm3/rev. 75
Max. flow capacity l/min 172,9
High pressure limitation bar 400 +26
Charge pressure, high idle bar 26
Vibration pump
Manufacturer Sauer
Type 42R 041
System Axial piston/swash plate
Max. displacement cm3/rev. 41
Start up pressure bar 345 +26
Operating pressure (soil dependent) bar approx. 100
Vibration motor
Type A10FM 45
System Axial piston/swash plate
Displacement cm3/rev. 45
Flushing rate l/min 6
Flushing pressure limitation bar 13
Check steering/
Type HY/ZFS11/16
System Gear
Displacement cm3/rev. 16
Max. steering pressure bar 175 +26
Steering valve
Manufacturer Danfoss
Type OSPC 500 ON
System Rotary spool valve
Rear axle
Manufacturer Dana
Type CHC 192/51HD
Differential No-Spin
Degree of locking % 100
Reduction ratio 43,72
Fig. 1
2. Sirometer (frequency meter)
800 - 50.000 rpm
14 - 750 Hz
BOMAG part-no.: 059 710 02
Fig. 2
3. Anti-freeze tester, quick and accurate measuring,
sturdy plastic housing, automatic temperature
correction, no after-dripping, instructions for use
on unit, reading down to -40 °C. Material: Plastic,
Temperature range: down to -40 °C
Fig. 3
4. Digital rpm-meter for petrol engines
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
6. Digital rpm-meter, optical/mechanical, universal
use
Fig. 6
7. Infrared manual thermometer, -18 to 275°C
Fig. 7
8. Hydraulic test case, large
i Note
4 X 600 bar pressure gauges
4 X 60 bar pressure gauges
8 pressure test hoses
Fig. 8
i Note
1X 25 bar pressure gauge
1X 150 bar pressure gauge
2X 400 bar pressure gauges
4 pressure test hoses
Fig. 9
10. Pressure test hoses
1000 mm BOMAG part-no.: 079 930 02
2500 mm BOMAG part-no.: 079 930 03
Fig. 10
11. Pressure gauge
60 bar BOMAG part-no.: 059 721 07
600 bar BOMAG part-no.: 059 721 04
Fig. 11
12. Adapter for pressure test hose
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
14. Vacuum pump for hydraulic oil tank
BOMAG part-no.: 007 610 04 (12 Volt)
BOMAG part-no.: 007 610 24 (24 Volt)
Fig. 14
! Caution
Perform measurements at operating tempera-
ture of the hydraulic oil (50 °C).
1. Drive the machine with both drums on an elastic
base (rubber buffers) (Fig. 1).
2. Block the wheels with suitable chocks.
Fig. 1
i Note
If necessary, the engine speed may also be
checked with the vibration Reed frequency meter.
1. Connect the RPM-meter to the injection line (Fig.
2).
2. Run the engine with maximum speed.
3. Apply the brake.
4. Measure the rotation speeds.
Evaluation of test
If the nominal value is not reached, perform trou-
ble shooting for the engine.
Nominal value:
See technical data.
Evaluation of test
If the nominal value is not reached, perform trou-
ble shooting in the vibration circuit.
Fig. 3
! Caution
Perform measurements at operating tempera-
ture of the hydraulic oil (50 °C).
1. Block drums and wheels with suitable chocks
(Fig. 1).
Fig. 1
2. Unhook the travel cable (Fig. 2) from the pump.
Fig. 2
3. Pull the plug (Fig. 3) off the brake solenoid valve
to close the brake.
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
5. Connect the control chamber ports X3 and X4
(Fig. 5) with a hose.
Fig. 5
6. Start the engine and run it with maximum speed.
Nominal value
Both pressure gauges (Fig. 6) must show equal
pressure (charge pressure).
i Note
If necessary repeat the pressure test with 60 bar
pressure gauges, for more accurate readings.
Fig. 6
Evaluation of test
Fig. 7
! Caution
Perform measurements at operating tempera-
ture of the hydraulic oil (50 °C).
1. Block drums and wheels with suitable chocks
(Fig. 1).
Fig. 1
2. Pull the plug (Fig. 3) off the brake solenoid valve
to close the brake.
Fig. 2
3. Connect 600 bar pressure gauges to the high
pressure test ports for "forward travel" and "re-
verse travel" and a 60 bar pressure gauge to the
charge pressure test port (Fig. 2).
4. Start the engine and run it with maximum speed.
5. Read charge and high pressure gauges.
Nominal value
see technical data of travel pump:
Charge pressure gauge = charge pressure at
high idle
High pressure gauge = charge pressure at high
Fig. 3 idle
Evaluation of test
If the nominal value is not reached, check the
steering/charge pump.
Nominal value
see technical data of travel pump:
Charge pressure gauge = charge pressure at
high idle
High pressure gauge = pressure override
Evaluation of test
Fig. 4
If the specified high pressure is not reached,
check the travel pump.
If the charge pressure drops considerably during
the high pressure test, check the components in-
dividually.
! Caution
Perform measurements at operating tempera-
ture of the hydraulic oil (50 °C).
1. Drive the machine on an elastic base (rubber
buffers) (Fig. 1).
2. Apply the parking brake and block the wheels ad-
ditionally with suitable chocks.
3. Start the engine and run it with maximum speed.
4. Switch on vibration high frequency / low ampli-
tude or low frequency / high amplitude.
Fig. 1
5. Measure the speed (Fig. 2), rest the tester on
your thumb.
Nominal value
high amplitude/
low frequency = see technical data
low amplitude/
high frequency = see technical data
Evaluation of test
In case of deviations exceeding 10% determine
the cause, perform trouble shooting for engine /
vibration circuit and check vibration motor.
Fig. 2
6. Adjust the speed on the corresponding adjust-
ment screw (Fig. 2).
i Note
Turning the adjustment screw in reduces the
speed, turning the screw out increases the
speed.
Fig. 3
! Caution
Perform measurements at operating tempera-
ture of the hydraulic oil (50 °C).
1. Drive the machine with both drums on an elastic
base (rubber buffers) (Fig. 1).
2. Block the wheels with suitable chocks.
3. Apply the brake.
Fig. 1
4. Connect a 60 bar pressure gauge (Fig. 2) to the
charge pressure test port.
5. Connect a 600 bar pressure gauge each to the
high pressure test ports for "high amplitude" and
"low amplitude".
6. Start the engine and run it with maximum speed.
7. Switch on vibration with high or low frequency.
Nominal value
Charge pressure = charge pressure at high idle
(see technical data of travel pump).
Start-up pressure = vibration pump start-up pres-
Fig. 2 sure (see technical data of vibration pump).
Operating pressure = vibration pump operating
pressure (see technical data of vibration pump).
Evaluation of test
If the charge pressure drops, check the compo-
nents individually.
If the starting pressure is not reached, check the
vibration pump.
If the starting pressure is only reached for one fre-
quency, check the high pressure relief valves.
! Caution
Perform measurements at operating tempera-
ture of the hydraulic oil (50 °C).
1. Drive the drum of the machine on an elastic base
(rubber buffers) (Fig. 1) and block the wheels ad-
ditionally with suitable chocks.
2. Apply the brake.
Fig. 1
3. Block the flushing valve (Fig. 2) with washers.
Fig. 2
4. Disconnect the leak oil hose (Fig. 3), connect a
measuring hose and hold it into a measuring
beaker.
5. Start the engine and run it with maximum speed.
6. Switch the vibration on and measure the running
out leak oil during one timed minute.
Nominal value
max. 1.5 litre/min
Evaluation of test
If the permissible leak oil rate is exceeded, re-
place the vibration motor.
Fig. 3
! Caution
Perform measurements at operating tempera-
ture of the hydraulic oil (approx. 50 °C).
Measurement 1
1. Connect a 600 bar pressure gauge to the steering
pressure test port (Fig. 1).
2. Start the engine and run it at idle speed.
! Danger
Danger of crushing, do not access the articu-
lation area of the machine!
3. Turn the steering against an end stop.
4. Read the pressure gauge.
Nominal value
Fig. 1
see technical data, max. steering pressure of
steering/charge pump.
Evaluation of test 1
If the nominal value is reached, check the steer-
ing cylinder.
Measurement 2
5. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from ports L and
R (Fig. 2) (machines with one steering cylinder)
on the steering cylinder and close them with
plugs.
Fig. 2
6. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from ports L and
R (Fig. 3) (machines with two steering cylinder)
on the steering cylinders and close them with
plugs.
7. Start the engine and run it at idle speed.
8. Turn the steering wheel.
9. Read the pressure gauge.
Nominal value
see technical data for steering/charge pump.
Fig. 3
Evaluation of test 2
If the nominal value is reached, replace the steer-
ing cylinder.
If the nominal value is not reached, check the
steering/charge pump.
10. Reconnect the hydraulic hoses to the steering
cylinders.
Measurement 3
11. Actuate the emergency stop switch.
Fig. 4
12. Close the pump outlet port (Fig. 5) with the gear
pump test equipment.
13. Crank the engine with the starter
Nominal value
see technical data for steering/charge pump.
Evaluation of test 3
If the nominal value is reached, replace the steer-
ing valve.
If the nominal value is not reached, replace the
steering/charge pump.
Fig. 5
Fig. 1
3. Flushing filter (S connection)
Fig. 2
7. Flushing filter (L connection)
Fig. 3
11. SAE-flange 1“ - 20S
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
15. Reducing fitting 18L - 15L
Fig. 6
16. Reducing fitting 25S - 20S
Fig. 7
17. Reducing fitting 20S - 16S
Fig. 8
Fig. 9
19. Connecting socket 18L
Fig. 10
20. Connecting socket 16S
Fig. 11
21. Connecting fitting 20S
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
23. Angular fitting 18L
Fig. 14
24. Elbow fitting 16L
Fig. 15
25. Elbow 20S
Fig. 16
Fig. 17
27. Pipe connection 16S - 16S
Fig. 18
28. Connecting hose 15L
Fig. 19
Caution
!
Environment
Environmental damage
Catch running out hydraulic oil and dispose
of environmentally.
Changing a component
Fig. 2
Caution
!
Fig. 3
Fig. 1
● Change the hydraulic oil filter element (1). ● Always bleed closed hydraulic circuits if
lines had been removed or connected.
Fig. 4
1 Elbow union (tool) 13 High pressure hose (A, drum drive motor for-
ward)
2 Connecting union (tool)
3 Drum drive motor 14 High pressure hose (B, axle motor reverse)
7 Flushing hose 25S - 20S (tool) 18 Flushing hose 25S - 20S (tool)
19 Flushing hose 25S - 20S (tool)
8 Flushing filter with filter element 1μ (tool)
9 Elbow union (tool)
10 Reducing fitting (tool)
11 Travel pump
12 High pressure hose (B, drum drive motor reverse)
i Note
Observe the chapter "Flushing - General"
Installing the flushing filter
! Caution
Before the installation of the filters check hos-
es and connections for cleanliness.
The flushing filter must be installed in the low
pressure side in the return flow to the pump,
so that only cleaned oil will enter the travel
pump in forward travel.
With the connection shown in the illustration
the travel pump must therefore be actuated to
forward direction.
Fig. 1
1. Disconnect the high pressure hose 12 (see chap-
ter "Flushing schematic - travel circuit") from the
travel pump (high pressure port 17) and connect
it with the flushing hose (7) (flushing filter inlet
"IN").
2. Connect the flushing hose (6) (flushing filter outlet
"OUT") to the (high pressure port 17) on the travel
pump.
Disconnect the drum drive motor
3. Take the drum drive motor out of the hydraulic cir-
cuit by joining the high pressure hoses (12 and
13) on the drum drive motor together.
Fig. 2
i Note
Bleeding the travel circuit, see chapter "Bleeding
the travel circuit".
Fig. 3
Flushing the hoses
4. Block drums and wheels with suitable chocks.
Fig. 4
i Note
Keep circulating the complete tank content with
the filling and filtering unit throughout the entire
flushing process.
Fig. 5
! Caution
Move the travel lever only to travel direction
forward, as otherwise the flushing filter will be
subjected to oil flow from the wrong direction.
5. Start the engine and shift the travel lever to travel
direction forward.
6. Perform the flushing process at various engine
speeds for approx. 10 minutes.
7. Shut down the engine.
8. Reconnect the hydraulic hoses (12 and 13) to the
drum drive motor.
Fig. 6
! Danger
Danger of accident!
The drum must rotate freely.
9. Jack up the front of the machine, so that the drum
can rotate freely.
10. Secure the rear wheels with chocks.
11. Pre-select the slow speed range.
Fig. 7
i Note
Keep circulating the complete tank content with
the filling and filtering unit throughout the entire
flushing process.
Fig. 8
! Caution
Move the travel lever only to travel direction
forward, as otherwise the flushing filter will be
subjected to oil flow from the wrong direction.
12. Start the engine, run it with maximum speed and
shift the travel lever to travel direction forward.
13. Run the flushing procedure for approx. 10 min-
utes. During this process keep changing the
pump flow by shifting the travel lever several
times between full and halve forward travel.
14. Shut down the engine.
Fig. 9 15. Remove the flushing filter and reconnect the high
pressure lines.
Fig. 10
Disconnecting the axle motor
18. Take the axle drive motor out of the hydraulic cir-
cuit by joining the high pressure hoses (14 and
15) on the axle drive motor together.
Fig. 11
i Note
Bleeding the travel circuit, see chapter "Bleeding
the travel circuit".
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
i Note
Keep circulating the complete tank content with
the filling and filtering unit throughout the entire
flushing process.
Fig. 14
! Caution
Move the travel lever only to travel direction
forward, as otherwise the flushing filter will be
subjected to oil flow from the wrong direction.
20. Start the engine and shift the travel lever to travel
direction forward.
21. Perform the flushing process at various engine
speeds for approx. 10 minutes.
22. Shut down the engine.
23. Reconnect the hydraulic hoses (14 and 15) to the
axle drive motor.
Fig. 15
Flushing the axle motor
!Danger
Danger of accident!
Both wheels must be off the ground. The
wheels must be able to rotate freely.
24. Jack up the rear of the machine, so that the
wheels can rotate freely.
25. Secure the drum with wheel chocks.
26. Pre-select the slow speed range.
Fig. 16
i Note
Keep circulating the complete tank content with
the filling and filtering unit throughout the entire
flushing process.
Fig. 17
! Caution
Move the travel lever only to travel direction
forward, as otherwise the flushing filter will be
subjected to oil flow from the wrong direction.
27. Start the engine, run it with maximum speed and
shift the travel lever to travel direction forward.
28. Run the flushing procedure for approx. 10 min-
utes. During this process keep changing the
pump flow by shifting the travel lever several
times between full and halve forward travel.
29. Shut down the engine.
Fig. 18 30. Remove the flushing filter and reconnect the high
pressure lines.
Fig. 19
i Note
Observe the chapter "Flushing - General"
Installing the flushing filter
! Caution
Before the installation of the filters check hos-
es and connections for cleanliness.
The flushing filter must be installed in the low
pressure side in the return flow to the pump,
so that only cleaned oil will enter the travel
pump in forward travel.
With the connection shown in the illustration
the travel pump must therefore be actuated to
forward direction.
Fig. 1
1. Disconnect the high pressure hose 14 (see chap-
ter "Flushing schematic - travel circuit") from the
travel pump (high pressure port 16) and connect
it with the flushing hose (19) (flushing filter inlet
"IN").
2. Connect the flushing hose (18) (flushing filter out-
let "OUT") to the (high pressure port 16) on the
travel pump.
Disconnect the drum drive motor
3. Take the drum drive motor out of the hydraulic cir-
cuit by joining the high pressure hoses (12 and
13) on the drum drive motor together.
Fig. 2
i Note
Bleeding the travel circuit, see chapter "Bleeding
the travel circuit".
Fig. 3
Flushing the hoses
i Note
Keep circulating the complete tank content with
the filling and filtering unit throughout the entire
flushing process.
Fig. 4
4. Block drums and wheels with suitable chocks.
Fig. 5
! Caution
Move the travel lever only to travel direction
forward, as otherwise the flushing filter will be
subjected to oil flow from the wrong direction.
5. Start the engine and shift the travel lever to travel
direction forward.
6. Perform the flushing process at various engine
speeds for approx. 10 minutes.
7. Shut down the engine.
8. Reconnect the hydraulic hoses (12 and 13) to the
drum drive motor.
Fig. 6
! Danger
Danger of accident!
The drum must rotate freely.
9. Jack up the front of the machine, so that the drum
can rotate freely.
10. Secure the rear wheels with chocks.
11. Pre-select the slow speed range.
Fig. 7
i Note
Keep circulating the complete tank content with
the filling and filtering unit throughout the entire
flushing process.
Fig. 8
! Caution
Move the travel lever only to travel direction
forward, as otherwise the flushing filter will be
subjected to oil flow from the wrong direction.
12. Start the engine, run it with maximum speed and
shift the travel lever to travel direction forward.
13. Run the flushing procedure for approx. 10 min-
utes. During this process keep changing the
pump flow by shifting the travel lever several
times between full and halve forward travel.
14. Shut down the engine.
Fig. 9
Fig. 10
i Note
Keep circulating the complete tank content with
the filling and filtering unit throughout the entire
flushing process.
Fig. 11
! Caution
Move the travel lever only to travel direction
forward, as otherwise the flushing filter will be
subjected to oil flow from the wrong direction.
18. Start the engine, run it with maximum speed and
shift the travel lever to travel direction forward.
19. Run the flushing procedure for approx. 10 min-
utes. During this process keep changing the
pump flow by shifting the travel lever several
times between full and halve forward travel.
20. Shut down the engine.
Fig. 12 21. Remove the flushing filter and reconnect the high
pressure lines.
Function test
24. Check the hydraulic oil level in the tank, fill up if
necessary.
25. Check all connections for leaks with the engine
running (visual inspection).
26. Perform a test drive, load the travel system in for-
ward and reverse, e.g. by driving uphill or starting
on a gradient.
27. Check all ports and connections for leak tightness
(visual inspection).
Fig. 13
i Note
Observe the chapter "Flushing - General"
! Caution
Before the installation of the filters check hos-
es and connections for cleanliness.
The flushing filter must be installed in the low
pressure side in the return flow to the pump,
so that only cleaned oil will enter the vibration
pump in high frequency.
For the connection schematic shown here the
vibration must always be filtered with "high
frequency / low amplitude".
Fig. 1
1. Disconnect the high pressure hose 10 (see chap-
ter "Flushing schematic - vibration circuit") from
the vibration pump (4) and connect it with the
flushing hose (7) (flushing filter inlet "IN").
2. Connect the flushing hose (6) (flushing filter outlet
"OUT") to the (high pressure port A) on the vibra-
tion pump.
Disconnect the vibration motor
3. Take the vibration motor out of the hydraulic cir-
cuit by joining the high pressure hoses (10 and
11) on the vibration motor together.
Fig. 2
i Note
Bleeding the vibration circuit, see chapter "Bleed-
ing the vibration circuit".
Fig. 3
Flushing the hoses
4. Block drums and wheels with suitable chocks.
Fig. 4
i Note
Keep circulating the complete tank content with
the filling and filtering unit throughout the entire
flushing process.
Fig. 5
! Caution
Use only high frequency, as otherwise the
flushing filter will be subjected to oil flow from
the wrong direction.
5. Switch on vibration with high frequency.
6. Start the engine and run it with maximum speed.
7. Flush the circuit for approx. 10 minutes, thereby
switch the vibration on and off at intervals of ap-
prox. 30 seconds.
8. Shut down the engine.
9. Reconnect the hydraulic hoses (10 and 11) to the
Fig. 6 vibration motor.
Fig. 7
i Note
Keep circulating the complete tank content with
the filling and filtering unit throughout the entire
flushing process.
Fig. 8
! Caution
Use only high frequency, as otherwise the
flushing filter will be subjected to oil flow from
the wrong direction.
11. Start the engine and run it with maximum speed.
12. Run the flushing procedure for approx. 10 min-
utes. Switch the vibration on and off at intervals of
approx. 30 seconds.
13. Shut down the engine.
14. Remove the flushing filter and reinstall the vibra-
tion motor.
Fig. 9
Bleeding the vibration circuit
15. Bleed the vibration circuit (see corresponding
chapter).
Fig. 10
Environment
Catch hydraulic oil and dispose of environ-
mentally.
1. Install a pressure test hose to the charge pres-
sure test port.
2. Install a pressure test hose each to the high pres-
sure test ports.
3. Actuate the emergency stop switch.
! Danger
The engine should not start.
Fig. 1
4. Hold the open ends of the pressure test hoses
(Fig. 2) into a container.
5. Operate the starter motor for approx. 30 seconds.
Wait one minute and repeat this procedure, until
oil starts to run out from the pressure test hoses.
6. Remove the pressure test hoses.
Fig. 2
7. Unlock the emergency stop switch
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
! Caution
With the flushing filter installed shift the travel
lever only to travel direction forward, as oth-
erwise the flushing filter will be subjected to
oil flow from the wrong direction.
!Danger
Run the engine with idle speed.
10. Start the engine.
11. Shift the travel lever (Fig. 5) approx. 1/3 to for-
ward direction.
Fig. 5 12. After approx. 1 to 2 minutes shut down the engine
for a minute.
i Note
This waiting time is necessary to allow air bub-
bles to escape through the leak oil return line.
13. After a waiting time of approx. 1 minute keep re-
peating this procedure, until the indicated charge
pressure drops directly to zero when shutting
down the engine.
Environment
Catch hydraulic oil and dispose of environ-
mentally.
1. Install a pressure test hose to the charge pres-
sure test port.
2. Install a pressure test hose each to the high pres-
sure test ports.
3. Actuate the emergency stop switch.
Fig. 1
4. Hold the open ends of the pressure test hoses
(Fig. 2) into a container.
5. Crank the engine approx. 10 seconds with the
starter motor. Wait one minute and keep repeat-
ing this procedure, until oil starts to run out from
the pressure test hoses.
6. Remove the pressure test hoses.
Fig. 2
7. Unlock the emergency stop switch
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
! Caution
With the flushing filter installed use only high
frequency, as otherwise the flushing filter will
be subjected to oil flow from the wrong direc-
tion.
10. For bleeding switch on vibration with high fre-
quency (Fig. 5).
11. Start the engine.
12. After running the engine 1 to 2 minutes pause for
approx. one minute.
Fig. 5 i Note
This waiting time is necessary to allow air bub-
bles to escape through the leak oil return line.
13. After a waiting time of approx. 1 minute keep re-
peating this procedure, until the indicated charge
pressure drops directly to zero when shutting
down the engine.
Structure
● Table of contents
● Function groups
● List of components
Table of contents
The table of contents lists all function groups.
Example:
Function group "Warning systems“, drawing number XXX XX can be found on page no. 8.
Example:
Potential "15" on page no. 6 is continued to the left on page no. 4 in current path "10" and to the right on page
no. 8 in current path "1“.
Example:
The coil of relay (K99) is located on page no. 8 in current path "6".
The mimic diagram under the relay informs that a change-over switch with contact types 30, 87 and 87a is trig-
gered.
The changeover contact can be found on page no. 8 in current path "3".
Current paths
The pages of a circuit diagram are sub-divided into current paths (Fig. 1) (0 ..... 20).
Graphic symbol
Graphic symbols are standardized representations for electrical appliances. They serve the purpose of a simpli-
fied representation of complete systems, from which, however, the function can be clearly identified. This stand-
ardization is in compliance with the globally valid regulations of the IEC (International Electrical Commission).
For Germany these symbols were included in the DIN-Standard. The standardization serves the purpose of glo-
bal understanding and fault free connection of appliances, especially in automobile repairs.
Since the wiring diagram is intended to show only the most essential aspects, the graphic symbol only shows
as much of the function, as is needed for easy recognition and for the avoidance of mistakes.
54 Trailer signals, trailer plug device and lamp combination, brake light
54g Trailer signals, compressed air valve for permanent brake in trailer, electromag-
netically operated
55 Fog light
56 Head light
56a Head light, travel light and travel light control
56b Head lights, dimmed head light
56d Head lights, flash light
57 Parking light for motor cycles (abroad also for cars and trucks)
57a Parking light
57L Parking light left
57R Parking light right
61 Generator control
76 Loudspeaker
B+ Battery Plus
B- Battery Minus
D+ Dynamo Plus
D- Dynamo Minus
DF Dynamo field (generator excitation current)
DF1 Dynamo field 1 (generator excitation current)
Fig. 1
1 (Fig. 1) Charge
2 Voltage
3 Current
The equalization attempt between different electric
charges is referred to as electric voltage.
Voltage sources have two poles of different charge.
On the one side we have the plus pole with a lack of
electrons, on the opposite side the minus pole with a
surplus of electrons. This electric "pressure" is known
as electric voltage.
Fig. 2
If there is a connection between these two poles a dis-
charge will take place, resulting in the flow of an elec-
tric current.
Plus pole= lack of electrons
Minus pole = excess of electrons
The electric amperage (I) is measured in Ampere Direct current flows with steady voltage and amper-
(A). age from the plus to the minus pole.
Pure D.C.-voltages are only delivered by accumula-
The technical flow direction is specified from
tors or batteries.
PLUS to MINUS.
The voltage in the vehicle wiring system is no pure
D.C.-voltage. Even without the generator running, but
i Note the consumers switched on, the voltage is not con-
Current actually flows from minus to plus, because the stant, but drops gradually according to the battery
current flow is made up of negatively charged elec- charge condition.
trons.
The internal resistance of the battery also causes per-
But since this was only discovered after the poles of a manent changes in the vehicle voltage, as soon as
current source had already been designated, the as- consumers are switched on or off.
sumption that current flows from plus to minus was
maintained for historic reasons. Alternating current (A.C.)
Circuit
Fig. 3 Circuit Alternating current not only changes its direction, but
also its amperage.
A simple circuit consists of a current source 1 (Fig. 3),
a consumer (3) and the connecting wiring. Pulsating direct current
When the circuit is closed, current can flow.
The circuit can be interrupted or closed with a switch
(2).
The system is protected by a fuse (4).
Fig. 4 PWM
The PWM signal is in most cases generated by a con-
trol and can be used to trigger proportional valves.
The signal (square wave signal) is changed in its
pulse control factor, the period, however, remains un-
changed.
The following applies:
●
The signal voltage cannot be measured.
●
The current can be measured.
Caution
!
7.4 CAN-Bus
Development objectives:
Real-time critical, robust and low price communication of control units, such as transmission and engine control,
but also less time critical applications in the field of convenience electronics, such as air conditioning.
Fig. 1 CAN
Why CAN?
●
Networking of control units for the realization of complex functions.
●
Reduction of the extend of wiring and plug connections.
● Better diagnostic possibilities (central diagnostics socket).
Characteristics of CAN
It is a kind of serial data transmission. The individual bits are transmitted one after the other, only 2 lines are
required.
CAN lines are twisted together 30 to 40 times per metre. Electromagnetic interferences therefore always occur
simultaneously in both lines, the software is thus able to filter out interfering signals more easily.
Wire (+) = cable colour blue
Wire (-) = cable colour yellow
Measuring signals
Signals transmitted through the bus line can generally not be measured with simple measuring instruments.
Testing is therefore quite complicated for the user. Correct connection of lines can only be checked by means
7.5 Resistance ● The cleaner the contacts, the better the current.
● The quality of the ground cable is of the same im-
portance as the supply line.
Resistance and voltage drop
While current flows through a conductor the current
Unnecessary resistances
flow is more or less inhibited by the conductor, this in-
hibitation is referred to as Resistance. Unnecessary resistances are frequently caused by
mechanical connections, even clean ones, but mainly
soiled and oxidizes terminals, too thin cables, material
with poor conductivity or bent open cable lugs.
Bad
Symbol, R
Unit, Ohm Ω
Fig. 3
In many cases it is better to replace the contact. Soiled
or oxidized contacts should be cleaned with Ballistol
(Fig. 4) and subsequently wetted with copper paste.
Copper paste is a heat resistant grease, which has
been mixed with copper powder. The paste protects
electric contacts against oxidation. Copper paste
keeps water away.
Fig. 5
Hint for practice:
A tool you cannot buy. The pliers were converted, the
nail is permanently present.
7.6 Series / parallel connection ● In series connection the plus pole of the first battery
must be connected with the minus pole of the sec-
Series connection ond battery.
In a series circuit the resistors (consumers) are lined ● The sum of all individual voltages is applied to the
up one after the other and the same current (I) passes free poles.
through each of the consumers However, series con- ● The total capacity (Ah) is identical with the capacity
nection of consumers is not suitable in practice, as of the individual battery.
each resistance causes a voltage drop. In the vehicle
wiring system all consumers are designed for the
same vehicle voltage (e.g. 12 Volt).
Current
In series connection the current is identical at every
point.
Itotal = I1 = I2 = I3
Voltage
The sum of all partial voltages is identical with the total
voltage.
Utotal = U1 + U2 + U3
Resistance
The sum of all partial resistances is identical with the
total resistance.
Rtotal = R1 + R2 + R3
Fig. 2
In order to achieve a vehicle voltage of 24 V two bat-
teries of the same type and capacity must be connect-
ed in series mode.
Current
The total current is the sum of all currents.
Itotal = I1 + I2 + I3
Voltage
The voltage values are identical at every resistance
(consumer).
Utotal = U1 = U2 = U3
Resistance
The total resistance is less than the lowest individual
resistance.
Fig. 4
By connecting 2 batteries of same type and capacity
in parallel mode the capacity can be doubled, be-
cause the individual capacities add up to the total ca-
pacity.
Fig. 1
In a closed electric circuit current and voltage gener-
ate energy.
Fig. 1 If a current of 1 Ampere flows at a voltage of 1 Volt,
According to this law a voltage of 1V is required to let energy of 1 Watt is produced.
1A (ampere) flow through a conductor with a resist-
Advice
ance of 1 (Ohm Ω).
By means of this triangle the formula can be easily re-
Advice arranged, the value you are looking form must just be
By means of this triangle the formula can be easily re- blanked off with a finger.
arranged, the value you are looking form must just be
Energy P = I multiplied with U
blanked off with a finger.
Amperage I = P divided by U
Voltage U = I multiplied with R
Voltage U = P divided by I
Resistance R = U divided by I
U = Voltage in Volt
Amperage I = U divided by R
I = Current in Ampere
U = Voltage in Volt
P = Power in Watt
I = Current in Ampere
R = Resistance in OHM Ω
Example:
P = 150 Watt
U = 24 Volt
Sought for = Current in Ampere
I = P : U = 150 W : 24 Volt = 6.25 Ampere
Resistance, R Ohm Ω
Voltage, U Volt
Current, I Ampere
Power, P Watt
Fig. 1 Multimeter
In order to avoid damage:
Fig. 1 Test lamp
●
the range selector switch must be correctly set for
the corresponding measurement.
! Caution ●
the test cable must be plugged into the correct
This type of tester must not be used for testing on socket.
electronic components. The high power con- ●
the voltage type (AC/DC) must be set.
sumption of the test lamp may destroy electronic ●
In case of direct voltage the correct polarity must be
components in the control units.
assured.
Diode test lamp ●
the measuring range should be chosen higher at
This instrument is used for simple voltage measure- the beginning of the test.
ments. The test lamp consists of two test points. The ● In order to avoid any influence on the circuitry to be
negative measuring cable is connected to ground and measured, the internal resistance of the voltage
the positive measuring cable to the corresponding tester should be as high as possible.
measuring location.
Resistance and continuity measurement with mul-
timeter
The continuity tester of the multimeter can be used to
measure whether there is a connection between 2
measuring points. The following information should be
observed when measuring resistance and continuity:
● The component to be measured must not be con-
nected to the power supply during the measure-
ment.
● At least one side of the component to be measured
must be disconnected from the circuitry, as other-
wise the measuring result may be influenced by
parallel components.
● Polarity is of no significance.
Advice
If the electric circuit is difficult to access and the inter-
nal resistance of the consumer is known, the voltage
may also be measured at the consumer.
The current value can then be calculated with the help
of Ohm's law.
Fig. 2
Diodes
Fig. 1
A diode consists of two different semi-conductors,
which are connected by a separating layer. The max.
conducting state current must not be exceeded.
Plus-voltage on diode:
● At 0.6 – 0.7 Volt (silicium diode) the diode becomes
conductive.
Negative voltage on diode:
● The diode does not allow current to pass through.
Fig. 1 Relays
Relays are commonly used to realize switching proc-
esses.
Fig. 4 LED
A free-wheeling diode prevents induction voltage from
The light emitting diode, also referred to as LED, is a
flowing back from the coil into the vehicle wiring sys-
semi-conductor diode, which generates (emits) light
tem, which would cause interference with electronic
during operation in forward direction. A semi-conduc-
components (control units).
tor crystal thereby emits a light signal, which is con-
verged or scattered by the lenticular shape of the With the possibility of using breaker - maker contacts
head. Light emitting diodes are available in various the effect of an information can be reversed.
colours, sizes and shapes. They are for this reason
used as signal lamps. This component is constructed
of different semi-conductor crystals, depending on its
colour. It works like any other semi-conductor diode.
Fig. 1
Fuses are used to protect lines and equipment against
overloads and short circuit. If the fuse is overloaded
the fusible wire heats up with increasing current, until
it finally melts.
Caution
!
Battery – accumulator
i Note
Maintenance free batteries are gaining more and
more significance, this freedom from maintenance,
however, is only limited to the fact that no water needs
to be added.
If the battery is not charged and discharged over a
longer period of time, the battery will slowly discharge
by itself.
The accumulator may only be discharged down to a fi-
nal discharging voltage of 10.5 Volt, as otherwise
there is a risk of sulphation, i.e. the generated lead
sulphate forms increasingly coarser crystals, which
will finally not react at all or only very sluggishly during
Fig. 1 a subsequent charging process.
In vehicles batteries are used to start the engine. The In the worst case the accumulator can only be dis-
ability to start the engine depends on the charge con- posed of after such an exhaustive discharge.
dition of the batteries. The following therefore applies for longer downtimes:
Lead collectors or accumulators are secondary ele- ● Remove the battery and store it in a cool, dry and
ments, i.e they can be recharged after discharging frost protected room.
electric current. ● Check the open circuit voltage on the battery at reg-
The basic element of a lead accumulator is the cell. It ular intervals (at least once every month).
contains the plate blocks consisting of positive and ● Recharge immediately if the open circuit voltage
negative plates. These plates are separated from has dropped to 12.25 Volt (no rapid charging).
each other by separators.
All positive plates are arranged parallel to the plus
pole, the negative plates parallel to the minus pole of i Note
the cells. The open circuit voltage of batteries occurs approx. 10
h after the last charging or approx. 1 h after the last
discharge.
! Danger
! Caution
Before removing the generator you must discon-
nect the ground cable from the minus pole of the
battery while the ignition is switched off. Do not
disconnect the generator while the engine is run-
ning, because this may cause extremely high volt-
age peaks in the vehicle wiring system ("Load
Dump"), which could possibly damage control
units, radios or other electronic equipment.
When disassembling the battery cable, the B+-nut
underneath on the generator side may also be Fig. 6 Rotor with claw poles
loosened. This nut must in this case be retight-
ened.
When connecting e.g. the battery cable to the ter-
minal of the generator you must make sure that
the polarity is correct (generator B+ to the + pole
of the battery). Mixing up the polarities by mistake
causes short circuit and damage to the rectifier el-
ements - the generator will be out of function.
The generator can only be operated with the bat-
tery connected. Under special conditions emer-
gency operation without battery is permitted, the
lifetime of the generator is in such cases especial-
ly limited.
Plus and minus cables must be disconnected dur-
ing rapid charging of the battery or electric weld-
ing on the vehicle.
When cleaning the generator with a steam or wa-
ter jet make sure not to direct the steam or water
jet directly on or into the generator openings or
ball bearings. After cleaning the generator should
be operated for about 1 - 2 minutes to remove any
deposits of water from the generator.
Fig. 7 Stator with 3 windings
The three stator windings (Fig. 7) are electrically offset
to each other by 120°. The excitation of the magnetic
field requires direct current, which is fed to the rotor
via two carbon brushes and slip rings.
This includes :
● Electric motors
● Relays
Finally, a variety of important components solely re-
quire direct current. These will under no circumstanc-
es work with alternating or three-phase current.
This includes :
● Accumulators
● Control units
● All electronics
● Communication equipment.
i Note
The rotor coils can only be measured in disassembled
state.
Fig. 11 Rotor
●
Remove the regulator with carbon brush.
Fig. 12 Stator
●
Contact the rotor slip ring with the tester points.
●
The resistance should be between 3 and 6 OHM Ω.
i Note
●
The rotor coils should not have continuity to ground. The stator coils can only be measured in disassem-
bled state.
● Measure the resistance of all three coils.
● The coils should not have contact among each oth-
er.
Checking the regulator voltage with the generator Checking the regulator voltage with the multime-
tester ter
The battery and generator tester comes with an 8-line
LC display with background illumination and is able to
print out test results via an (optional) thermal printer.
Fig. 14
● All plug-and-socket connectors must be free of cor-
rosion and intermittent contact.
Fig. 13 ● The generator ground connection must be OK.
The generator test assesses the regulator voltage and ●
The battery should be in good condition – the idle
the ripple factor of the generator voltage. speed voltage of the battery should be at least 12.6
●
All plug-and-socket connectors must be free of cor- Volt.
rosion and intermittent contact. ●
If possible switch off all consumers.
●
The generator ground connection must be OK. ●
Perform the measurement at raised engine speed.
●
The battery should be in good condition – the idle ●
The voltage (B+) should adjust itself at 13 to 14 Volt.
speed voltage of the battery should be at least 12.6
Volt.
●
If possible switch off all consumers.
●
Perform the measurement at raised engine speed.
Fig. 17
Fig. 18
Fig. 15
The illustrations (Fig. 17) and (Fig. 18) show two dif-
● If the carbon brush is connected to ground the reg-
ferent regulator types.
ulator is a so-called plus controlled regulator. The
exciter winding is positioned between DF and D-,
the regulator therefore regulates the exciter winding
on the plus side. The other carbon brush is then
connected with terminal DF. This leaves one further
terminal, this is D+.
The basic function of a disassembled regulator can be
easily tested with a 12V lamp and an adjustable D.C.
power supply unit (0V ... 20V).
Fig. 1 Electric starter For purposes like e.g. purging the fuel systems,
1 Pinion starters may be operated for maximum 1 minute
2 Roller free-wheeling without interruption. Then you should wait for at
least 30 minutes (cooling down) until trying again.
3 Steep thread
During the 1 minute starting period this process
4 Guide ring should not be interrupted.
5 Spring winding Starter motors must not be cleaned with high
6 Armature pressure steam cleaning equipment.
7 Pole shoe The contacts on starter terminals 30, 45, 50 must
8 Carbon brushes be protected against unintended shorting (jump
protection).
9 Armature brake
10 Collector When replacing the starter the ring gear on the en-
gine flywheel must be checked for damage and its
11 Magnetic switch
number of teeth - if necessary replace the ring
12 Engagement lever gear.
Always disconnect the battery before starting as-
!Caution sembly work in the starter area of the engine or on
So-called jump starting (using an additional exter- the starter itself.
nal battery) without the battery connected is dan-
gerous. When disconnecting the cables from the
poles high inductivities (arcs, voltage peaks) may
occur and destroy the electrical installation.
Magnetic switch
The magnetic switch is normally arranged directly
above the starter. Fig. 3 Switching position during starting
With the starter switch switched on, both the pickup 1 Ground
winding and the holding winding are energized and 2 Battery
shift the iron core in axial direction. With a lever this
iron core pulls the starter pinion towards the engine 3 Starter switch
flywheel. 4 Pull-in winding
Once the gears are engaged the starter current is ap- 5 Holding winding
plied to the back through a large cross-section. At the 6 Exciter winding
same time the pickup winding is shorted via the starter 7 Restoring spring
current and thus switched off as a measure to reduce
8 Driver
the load on the energy household.
9 Pinion
10 Flywheel
i Note
If e.g. block 5 is not needed to design a switch, the
numbering for blocks 1,2,3,4 and 6 remains un-
changed.
Fig. 2 Disassembly
● Lift up the interlock (5).
Assembly
Fig. 5 Assembly
● Insert the front element (3) into the bore in the con-
trol panel.
i Note
Watch the marls on front element (Fig. 6) and fasten-
ing flange.
●
Tighten the screw (1) with a tightening torque of 0.6
Nm.
General
In all automated sequences the use of sensors as a
source of information for the electronic control is indis-
pensable. The sensors deliver the necessary signals
about positions, end positions, filling levels or serve as
pulse transducers for counting tasks or speed detec-
tion. In industrial applications inductive and capacitive Fig. 10 NPN circuitry
proximity switches are today indispensable. Com-
pared with mechanical switches, they offer almost ide- On sensors with NPN-circuitry the output stage con-
al prerequisites: non-contact, wear free operation, tains a NPN-transistor, which switches the load
high switching frequencies and switching accuracies, against the negative operating voltage. The load is
as well as high protection against vibration, dust and connected between the output and the positive oper-
moisture. Inductive sensors detect all metals without ating voltage.
contact, capacitive sensors detect almost all solid and Breaking and making contacts
liquid media, such as metal, glass, wood, plastic, wa-
ter, oil, etc.
Working principle
Fig. 8
The working principle is based on the principle of the
dampened LC-oscillator. The coil of the oscillation cir-
cuit forms a high-frequency magnetic stray field. Fig. 11
This stray field leaks out from the active area of the Proximity switches are used as breaking or making
proximity switch. If metal or non-ferrous metal enters contacts. Depending on the design the switching dis-
into the response range energy is absorbed. The os- tances are 2 or 4 mm. The maximum amperage is 300
cillator is thus dampened and the resulting change in mA.
current consumption is evaluated. The LED (Fig. 11) lights up, when the initiator has de-
tected metal in its stray field.
PNP circuitry
Fig. 1 Sensor
The the function of the angle sensor (Fig. 1) is based
on the so-called "Hall-Effect". Named after the Ameri-
can physicist E.H. Hall. Due to the fact that moving
electrons are deflected in a magnetic field, a voltage
transverse to the flow direction of the primary current
can be expected on a current conducting conductor in
Fig. 12 Circuit diagram, making contact
the magnetic field. Since the electrons are deflected in
The circuit diagram (Fig. 12) shows a proximity switch transverse direction by the magnetic field, they must
with normally open contact. enrich on the one side and reduce on the opposite
Brown = voltage supply side. If a very thin circuit board is now subjected to a
current that is uniformly distributed across its cross
Blue = ground supply
section, no voltage will be measured between two
Black = switching output points A and B, which have an identical distance to the
The initiator switches the relay (K05) current supply lines and are connected by a highly
sensitive galvanometer. When generating a magnetic
field vertical to the circuit board, voltage will be
present between A and B and a current will flow
through the galvanometer connected to these points.
This is referred to as "Hall-Effect". The cause for this
effect is the warping of the originally parallel electron
orbits in the board by the magnetic field.
Pulling test
This pulling test ensures that the lead is perfectly
crimped and the contact has correctly engaged in the
housing.
●
Perform a pull test on each lead, each of the termi-
nals and connections must withstand a pulling force
of 45 N without any difficulties.
Fig. 2 DT Series
Installing DT contacts
Fig. 4
● Insert the contacts through the rubber grommet until
they click into place.
● Insert the orange wedge in direction of arrow.
Caution
!
i Note
Use the same method when assembling the socket.
Fig. 5
● Pull the orange wedge out with long nose pliers.
●
Slightly pull the lead and unlock the interlocking
hook with a screw driver.
● Pull the contact out of the socket.
i Note
Use the same method when assembling the socket.
In this case the interlock disassembly tool (see special
tools for electrics) serves as an aid to remove the
wedges.
DTM Series
Fig. 4
●
Insert the contacts through the rubber grommet until
they click into place.
●
Insert the orange wedge, until it clicks into place.
Caution
!
i Note
Use the same method when assembling the socket.
Fig. 5
● Pull the orange wedge (interlock) out with long nose
pliers.
● Slightly pull the lead and unlock the interlocking
hook with a screw driver.
● Pull the contact out of the socket.
i Note
Use the same method when assembling the socket.
In this case the interlock disassembly tool (see special
tools for electrics) serves as an aid to remove the
wedges.
Fig. 1
Spring clamp technology (Fig. 1) for quick, vibration
resistant and maintenance-free connection of all con-
!Caution
Perform a pull test on each lead, each of the termi-
nals must withstand a pulling force of 45 N with-
out any difficulties.
Series clamp
!Caution
Perform a pull test on each lead, each of the termi-
nals must withstand a pulling force of 45 N with-
out any difficulties.
Measuring signals
On these terminal blocks the bridge slot is most suita-
ble for tapping off and measuring signals. Here you
may directly insert a 4 mm test adapter (see special
tools for electrics) for connecting a measuring lead.
This test adapter is standard in the central electrics of
heavy equipment machines.
!Caution
Perform a pull test on each lead, each of the termi-
nals must withstand a pulling force of 45 N with-
out any difficulties.
Fig. 1
The modules have control lights on inputs and outputs to monitor the applied signals.
Fig. 2
15. Multimeter
Fig. 3
16. Test prod black, with flexible insulated shaft and
button operated gripper with 4 mm bushing,
length 157 mm.
Fig. 4
18. Test prod black, with elastic insulated shaft 4 mm
bushing, length 97.5 mm.
Fig. 5
Fig. 8
Fig. 9
32. Clip-on measuring instrument
Fig. 10
33. Battery - generator tester
Fig. 11
Spring clamps (Wago or Weidmüller)
34. Cranked screwdriver (Fig. 12) to open spring
clamps (Fig. 13).
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
Deutsch contacts
36. Tool to disassemble the interlocking on Deutsch
plugs (series DT and DTM).
Fig. 14
37. Crimping pliers for Deutsch contacts of series DT
and DTM, size AWG 20,16 and 12.
AWG 20 = 0.5 mm2 cable cross-section
AWG 16 = 1,5 mm2 cable cross-section
AWG 12 = 4,0 mm2 cable cross-section
BOMAG part-no.: 079 900 79
Fig. 15
38. Crimping pliers for Deutsch contacts of series
HDT, size AWG 6 and 8.
AWG 8 = 10,0 mm2 cable cross-section
AWG 6 = 16,0 mm2 cable cross-section
AWG 6 = 16,0 mm2 cable cross-section
Fig. 16
Fig. 17
ITT contacts
40. Installation tool for ITT crimp contacts of series
CA-COM, contact size 15S/16S/15/16.
Fig. 18
41. Disassembly tool for ITT male contacts of series
CA-COM, contact size 15S/16S/15/16.
Fig. 19
42. Disassembly tool for ITT female contacts of se-
ries CA-COM, contact size 15S/16S/15/16.
Fig. 20
Fig. 21
44. Crimping pliers for Schaltbau contacts of series
M1, M2 with connecting cross-section 0.14 - 6.0
mm2.
Fig. 22
FCI Burndy contacts
45. Disassembly tool for FCI Burndy contacts of se-
ries TRIM TRIO
Fig. 23
AMP contacts
46. Crimping pliers for AMP-contacts of series FAS-
TIN-FASTON with a connecting cross-section of
1.0 - 2.5 mm2 (18 -14 AWG).
Fig. 24
Fig. 25
48. Crimping pliers for AMP-contacts of series .070-
SERIES with a connecting cross-section of AWG
20 - 18 (0.5 - 0.9 mm2) and AWG 16 (1.25 - 1.5
mm2).
Fig. 26
49. Crimping pliers for AMP-contacts of series FAS-
TON with connecting cross-section AWG 14 - 10.
Fig. 27
50. Crimping pliers for AMP-contacts of series FAS-
TON with connecting cross-section AWG 16 - 14
and AWG 18.
Fig. 28
Fig. 29
52. Crimping jaws for Crimping tool 079 900 25
Fig. 30
53. Disassembly tool for AMP-contacts of series CIR-
CULAR-CONNECTOR.
1.5 mm2, BOMAG part-no.: 079 900 74
2,5 mm2, BOMAG part-no.: 079 900 75
Spare sleeve 1.5 mm2, BOMAG part-no.: 079
900 76
Spare sleeve 2,5 mm2, BOMAG part-no.: 079
900 77
Fig. 31
Universal tools
54. Universal pressing pliers with toggle lever trans-
mission and adjustable end pressure for Crimp-
ing roller connector 0.14 - 1.0 mm2.
Fig. 32
Fig. 33
Measuring adapter
56. Current measurement adapter for Hirschmann
plugs.
Fig. 34
57. Voltage measurement adapter for Deutsch plugs,
8-piece (2 to 12 pole).
Fig. 35
58. Current measurement adapter for Deutsch and
AMP plugs, 2 pole.
Fig. 36
Bild 37
i Hinweis
The documentation "Service Training Electrics MESX" contains also the documentation BEM (BOMAG Evib-me-
ter).
The BOP (BOMAG Operation Panel) is only installed in connection with BVC machines, BEM-machines are
equipped wit display module. The display module is used for the output of fault codes and display values, as
well as for the input of code numbers.
Service Training
Electrics
MESX
Table of contents
1 Document alteration list.....................................................................................................................3
2 Proof of software change MESX .......................................................................................................4
3 Proof of software change BOP..........................................................................................................6
4 Known faults......................................................................................................................................7
5 How to proceed when replacing components?.................................................................................8
5.1 How to proceed when replacing an ESX control? .....................................................................8
5.2 How to proceed when replacing a rear axle sensor? ................................................................8
5.3 Which components can be replaced without a subsequent adjustment procedure? ................8
5.4 List of machine types .................................................................................................................9
6 Possible adjustments on machines without BOP ...........................................................................12
6.1 Description of the Display Module ...........................................................................................12
6.2 Input of code numbers .............................................................................................................12
6.3 Changing the machine type (only via display module) ............................................................13
6.4 Inverting the direction signal (only via display module) ...........................................................14
6.5 Changing the bit rate (only with display module).....................................................................15
7 Adjustment/display possibilities on machines with BOP.................................................................16
7.1 Adjusting the machine type (BOP)...........................................................................................16
7.2 Inverting the direction signal via the BOP control terminal ......................................................18
7.3 Accessing the diagnostics menu .............................................................................................20
7.3.1 Extended diagnostics on machines with circular exciter (BTMplus, BTMprof) ................. 22
7.3.2 Extended diagnose BVC machines ......................................................................................... 23
7.4 Changing the printout language...............................................................................................24
7.5 Setting the machine serial number ..........................................................................................26
7.6 Teaching distance pulses ........................................................................................................28
7.7 Activating the amplitude limitation (only BVC machines) ........................................................30
7.8 Changing the display mode (metric/imperial) ..........................................................................32
7.9 Switching the GPS Receiver Voltage Supply Mode ................................................................34
8 Possible settings on the BCM05mobile ..........................................................................................36
8.1 Reading the software version ..................................................................................................36
8.2 Changing the language............................................................................................................36
8.3 Changing the unit system (metric/imperial) .............................................................................36
9 Block diagram BEM.........................................................................................................................37
10 Block diagram BTMplus / VARIOCONTROL...............................................................................38
11 Block diagram BTMplus / VARIOCONTROL and BCM05mobile................................................39
12 Description of the signals on the ESX-control .............................................................................40
13 Fault codes of the ESX control ....................................................................................................45
13.1 Overview...............................................................................................................................45
13.2 Description of fault reactions ................................................................................................46
13.3 Detailed description of fault codes and their possible causes ............................................47
14 Input codes for ESX control (only via BEM display module) .......................................................51
14.1 Travel system .......................................................................................................................51
14.2 Vibration ...............................................................................................................................52
14.3 Light......................................................................................................................................52
14.4 Acceleration transducer........................................................................................................53
14.5 Diesel engine........................................................................................................................53
14.6 Setting the machine type......................................................................................................54
14.7 Parameter change................................................................................................................55
15 Terminology in connection with ESX...........................................................................................56
Status:05.06.2007 Page 2 of 59
Author: T.Löw / TE
Status:05.06.2007 Page 3 of 59
Author: T.Löw / TE
Status:05.06.2007 Page 4 of 59
Author: T.Löw / TE
Status:05.06.2007 Page 5 of 59
Author: T.Löw / TE
Status:05.06.2007 Page 6 of 59
Author: T.Löw / TE
4 Known faults
Despite the fault monitoring of inputs and outputs on the ESX control, the ESX control is not able to
detect all faults. The following list contains a selection of known fault reactions of the control, which
mostly have a different cause to the one described in this documentation.
During initial commissioning the display shows the Bit rate on bmfsa not set to 125 kbit
reading "ct0" => see "Setting the bit rate"
Status:05.06.2007 Page 7 of 59
Author: T.Löw / TE
The following chapter describes the necessary adjustments to the control when replacing individual
components in the measuring system.
You should therefore set the machine type first! see "5.4 List of
machine types, or "7.1 Adjusting the machine type (BOP)").
Check the direction signal, invert the signal if necessary, see 6.4, or 7.2.
Set the machine serial number (only on machines with BOP), see: 7.5
Set the printer language (only machines with printer), see: 7.4
Check the direction signal, invert the signal if necessary, see 6.4, or 7.2.
Status:05.06.2007 Page 8 of 59
Author: T.Löw / TE
Machine type First serial number Last serial number Code Available from
version
177 D 101 582 20 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7500 1.00
177 DH 101 582 21 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7501 1.00
177 PDH 101 582 22 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7502 3.03
177 BVC 101 582 23 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7503 1.00
179 DH 101 582 24 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7511 3.03
179 PDH 101 582 25 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7512 3.03
211 D 101 582 40 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7520 1.03
101 582 41 1001
101 583 09 1001
211 PD 101 582 45 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7529 4.00
101 583 10 1001
213 D 101 582 50 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7530 1.03
101 583 08 1001
213 DH 101 582 51 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7531 1.03
101 583 14 1001
213 PD 101 582 46 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7539 4.00
101 583 13 1001
213 PDH 101 582 52 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7532 3.03
213 BVC 101 582 53 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7533 1.02
101 583 16 1001
213 BVC plates 101 582 54 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7534 3.00
101 583 06 1001
213 BVC DI 101 582 53 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7535 1.05
101 583 16 1001
214 DH 101 582 58 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7541 3.03
101 583 19 1001
214 PDH 101 582 59 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7542 3.03
101 583 20 1001
216 D 101 582 62 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7550 3.03
101 583 23 1001
216 DH 101 582 60 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7551 3.03
101 582 64 1001
216 PD 101 582 63 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7559 4.00
101 583 24 1001
216 PDH 101 582 61 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7552 3.03
101 582 65 1001
219 D 101 582 72 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7560 2.00
101 582 10 1001
219 DH 101 582 70 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7561 1.05
101 582 77 1001
219 PD 101 582 73 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7569 4.00
101 582 11 1001
219 PDH 101 582 71 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7562 3.03
101 582 78 1001
Status:05.06.2007 Page 9 of 59
Author: T.Löw / TE
Machine type First serial number Last serial number Code Available from
version
226 DH 101 582 80 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7571 3.03
101 582 83 1001
101 582 88 1001
226 PDH 101 582 81 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7572 3.03
101 582 84 1001
101 582 89 1001
226 BVC 101 582 82 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7573 3.01
101 582 85 1001
101 582 86 1001
226 BVC DI 101 582 82 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7575 1.04
101 582 85 1001
101 582 86 1001
226 BVC RC 101 582 82 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7576 3.03
101 582 85 1001
101 582 86 1001
Machine type First serial number Last serial number Code Available from
version
VARIOCONTROL 101 582 12 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7537 4.00
VARIOCONTROL+ 101 582 13 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7538 4.00
Machine type First serial number Last serial number Code Available from
version
177 D-40 101 582 26 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7600 4.00
177 DH-40 101 582 27 1001
177 DHC-4 101 582 00 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7601 4.00
177 PDHC-4 101 582 01 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7602 4.00
177 PDH-40 101 582 28 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7609 4.00
179 DHC-4 101 582 02 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7611 4.00
179 PDHC-4 101 582 03 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7612 4.00
211 D-40 101 583 02 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7620 4.00
101 583 25 1001
211 PD-40 101 583 03 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7629 4.00
101 583 26 1001
212 D-40 101 582 43 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7680 4.00
212 PD-40 101 583 48 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7689 4.00
213 D-40 101 582 44 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7630 4.00
101 582 55 1001
101 583 07 1001
213 DH-40 101 582 56 1001
213 DHC-4 101 582 04 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7631 4.00
101 583 11 1001
213 PDHC-4 101 582 05 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7632 4.00
101 583 12 1001
213 PD-40 101 582 49 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7639 4.00
213 PDH-40 101 582 57 1001
214 DHC-4 101 582 06 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7641 4.00
101 583 17 1001
214 PDHC-4 101 582 07 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7642 4.00
101 583 18 1001
216 DHC-4 101 582 08 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7651 4.00
101 583 21 1001
216 PDHC-4 101 582 09 1001 XXX XXX XX XXXX 7652 4.00
Status:05.06.2007 Page 10 of 59
Author: T.Löw / TE
Status:05.06.2007 Page 11 of 59
Author: T.Löw / TE
Note: The display module described next is only used in machines without the Bomag
Operation Panel (BOP). On machines with BOP the settings are made via the BOP!
(See item 7 "Adjustment/display possibilities on machines with BOP")
The display module consists of a 4-digit display and two keys, F1 and F2.
It is used for the output of fault codes and display values as well as for the input of code numbers.
Faults and warnings are displayed by flashing. If several faults are detected, the displayed fault codes
will change in a 3 second cycle.
Display values are permanently displayed, whereby values from 0 0 0 0 …9 9 9 9 are possible. Higher
values lead to the display "- - - - ", negative values are indicated by the "minus dot" lighting up (see
illustration).
sign
057 667 72
15/54
Press both keys (F1 and F2) on the instrument cluster for 2 seconds.
)The value 0 0 0 0 will be displayed, whereby the 1st digit is flashing.
1. The value of the flashing digit can be increased by pressing the left hand key (F1). When the figure 9
is displayed and the left hand key (F1) is pressed again, the display will return to the value .
2. When pressing the right hand key (F2) the flashing digit will move one digit to the right. When the
4th digit is flashing, the right hand key (F2) is pressed once again to confirm the input. The desired
function is then executed or the desired value is displayed respectively.
In order to terminate a display function you must either enter code number 0 0 0 0 or switch the
ignition off.
Note: Parameter adjustments can only be performed when the engine is not running!
Enter code number 7 0 1 0 . This code number activates the function "Adjusting machine type".
The display module now permanently shows the entered code. (e.g. 7 5 3 3 )
Enter code number 7 0 1 1 . This code number confirms the entered machine type.
After confirming the machine type the control initiates a restart, the display module shows the new
machine type for approx. 3 seconds.
After this the newly adjusted machine type will be displayed for approx. 3 seconds.
Attention: A machine must not be operated with a wrong type setting, because in such a
case the correct function of the control cannot be assured!
New controls are delivered with the default machine type setting 7 5 0 0 .
This direction signal may need to be inverted, so that exciter adjustment (only BVC machines) and
printout for the the travel direction correspond with the actual travel direction.
Note: Parameter adjustments can only be performed when the engine is not running!
Enter code number 7 6 0 0 . This code number activates the function "Invert direction signal“.
Enter code number 7 6 0 1 . This code number inverts the direction signal.
The display module now permanently shows the code 0 0 0 1 (signal inverted), or the code 0 0 0 0
(signal not inverted).
In succession the code number 1 0 0 1 can be used to check whether the direction signal is correctly
interpreted (see item 14 "Input codes for ESX control").
Hold both keys (F1 and F2) of the multi-function display depressed and switch on the ignition.
) The currently set bit rate is displayed, e.g. 0 1 0 0 .
The bit rate can now be changed in fixed steps by pressing the right hand key (F2). Hold the key
depressed until the display reads 0 1 2 5 .
By pressing the left hand key (F1) the bit rate is accepted and the display changes back to the
normal display mode.
Note: Parameter adjustments can only be performed when the engine is not running!
Press key "?" to open the screen page "MENU". The following screen is displayed:
Press key "F2" to open the screen page "Adjust machine type". The following screen is displayed:
The desired machine type can be selected by pressing the keys "F11" and "F12". (see "List of
machine types" under item "Item 5.4 "List of machine types" ).
After selecting the desired machine type press key "F14", until the symbol (F14) lights green for
confirmation (approx. 4s).
When releasing the key the start screen will automatically be displayed and the control will initiate a restart.
BOP and MESX are now adjusted to the new machine type.
7.2 Inverting the direction signal via the BOP control terminal
Depending on the installation position, the axle sensor used delivers a 12V output signal in forward
and reverse.
This direction signal may need to be inverted, so that exciter adjustment (only BVC machines) and
printout for the travel direction correspond with the actual travel direction.
Note: Parameter adjustments can only be performed when the engine is not running!
Press key "?" to open the screen page "MENU". The following screen is displayed:
Press key "F1" to open the screen page "Invert direction signal". The following screen is
displayed:
The direction signal can now be inverted or not inverted by pressing key "F5" ("Invert = 1" or
"Invert = 0").
After the desired change press key "F14" to save the adjustment. The symbol lights green for a
moment as a sign of confirmation.
Check on the printout or in the diagnostics menu whether the travel direction has been correctly detected.
Press key "F5" to open the screen page "Diagnose1". The following screen is displayed:
If an actual error is present the corresponding error code will be displayed in the field "Actual Errors".
By pressing key "A" you can change into a machine specific, more detailed diagnostics menu (see
below).
+01234 Distance pulses detected by the MESX (10 cm steps). The actually detected
travel direction can be recognized by the roller symbol above.
+01234 Distance pulses detected by the MESX (10 cm steps). The actually detected
travel direction can be recognized by the roller symbol above.
Press key "F6" to open the screen page "Printout language". The following screen is displayed:
The desired printout language can be selected by pressing the keys "F11" and "F12".
After selecting the desired language press key "F14" to save the setting. The symbol (F14) lights
green for a moment as a sign of confirmation.
Press key "F7" to open the screen page "Serial number". The following screen is displayed:
The desired printout language can be selected by pressing the keys "F11" and "F12".
After the adjustment press key"F14" to save the setting. The symbol (F14) lights green for a
moment as a sign of confirmation.
Note: An adaptation of the distance pulses is only possible within a range of +/- 10%
of the preset value.
Press key "?" to open the screen page "MENU". The following screen is displayed:
Press key "F8" to open the screen page "Distance pulses". The following screen is displayed:
Pressing the key "F5" starts the teach mode. The following symbol appears:
Drive a distance of 10 m length in forward and press the key "F6" at the end. The following symbol
appears:
After the end of the measuring travel press key "F14" to save the adjustment. The following
symbol appears:
Note: If the following symbol is displayed after the end of the travel distance the
measured distance pulses are not in the range of +/- 10% of the preset value.
Saving is in this case not possible! The measurement must be repeated!
Press key "F3" to open the screen page "Amplitude limitation". The following screen is displayed:
The limitation can now be activated or deactivated by pressing key "F5" ("Limit = 1" or "Limit = 0").
After the desired change press key "F14" to save the adjustment. The symbol lights green for a
moment as a sign of confirmation.
Press key "F4" to open the screen page "Display mode". The following screen is displayed:
The imperial display (mph, °F, etc.) can now be activated or deactivated by pressing key "F5"
("Imperial = 1" or "Imperial = 0").
After the desired change press key "F14" to save the adjustment. The symbol lights green for a
moment as a sign of confirmation.
Press key "F14" to open the screen page "GPS Mode". The following screen is displayed:
This function enables the GPS Receiver Power Supply to be controlled via MESX, so that the receiver
can be switched on and off in a defined way.
The GPS Mode can now be changed over by pressing the "F5"-key:
Note: After this setting the service window must be closed to avoid unauthorized
access. Press "Close window" at the bottom right in the service window.
008 911 63
9 Block diagram BEM
BEM, BOMAG Evib-meter
BOMAG
commande
211
212
9.1
printer
BOMAG
commande
008 911 63
Service Training MESX Block diagram
008 911 63
11 Block diagram BTMplus / VARIOCONTROL and BCM05mobile
BEM, BOMAG Evib-meter
BCM 05
(mobile device
with card reader)
USB CAN
interface
BOMAG
Printer
commandes
213
214
9.1
X44:5 Interface RS 232 TxD, used for printer control. Measurement not possible!
X44:6
BOMAG
X44:7 Input acceleration transducer VH20g/HR15g Acceleration signal (measured against AGND)
X44:9 Input exciter position front Position of front exciter (measured against AGND)
Analogue input / voltage input 0..8,5 V Bottom stop ) approx. 2,2 V
Neutral position ) approx. 4,25 V
Top stop ) approx. 6,6 V
008 911 63
Service Training MESX Description of signals
008 911 63
ESX terminal Signal description Nominal values (voltage / current)
X44:10
X44:11
X44:12
BEM, BOMAG Evib-meter
X44:13
X44:14
BOMAG
Digital input active high Button not depressed ) 2V
X44:19 Input button CLEAR (option) Button depressed: ) 12 V
Digital input active high Button not depressed ) 2V
X44:20
X44:21
X44:22
215
216
9.1
X44:26 Interface CAN-Bus Wire -, is used to communicate with the BOP Measurement not possible!
operating unit.
X44:27 Interface CAN-Bus Wire +, is used to communicate with the BOP Measurement not possible!
operating unit.
BOMAG
Open circuit voltage (vibration off): ) 4,2..4,3 V
Analogue input / voltage input 0..8,5 V
X44:31 Input acceleration transducer VV20g/HR15g Acceleration signal (measured against AGND)
X44:33 Interface CAN-Bus2 Wire -, is used to communicate with the BCM05. Measurement not possible!
X44:34
X44:35 Input distance transducer Transducer delivers square-wave pulses Frequency depends on
machine type.
Digital input active high
008 911 63
Service Training MESX Description of signals
008 911 63
ESX terminal Signal description Nominal values (voltage / current)
X44:36
X44:39
X44:40
X44:41
X44:42
X44:43
X44:44
BOMAG
X44:45
X44:49
X44:50
X44:51
X44:52
217
218
9.1
X44:61
BOMAG
X44:62
X44:63
X44:64
008 911 63
BEM, BOMAG Evib-meter 9.1
13.1 Overview
BOMAG
) the diesel engine is shut down.
Fault code is displayed.
Signal light in BOP (option) lights in 1 second intervals.
5 Fatal fault. The function of the control can no longer be guaranteed.
Control is switched off.
Error code is displayed.
Signal light in BOP (option) lights permanently.
Note: Errors with error reaction 1 are only warning messages and are NOT stored in the error log!
008 911 63
Service Training MESX Description of fault codes of the ESX control
008 911 63
13.3 Detailed description of fault codes and their possible causes
BOMAG
Status: 05.06.2007 Fault Code Description ESX Control Page 47 of 59
Author: T. Löw / TE
9.1
221
222
9.1
4 5 2 6 Output proportional solenoid front ) Current path has short circuit to voltage supply X44:47 2
Valve for exciter down ) Current path has non-permitted connection to another current
BOMAG
Output current too low. path
) Current path is interrupted
4 5 2 7 Output proportional solenoid front ) Current path has short circuit to ground X44:47 2
Valve for exciter down ) Current path has non-permitted connection to another current
Output current too high. path
008 911 63
Service Training MESX Description of fault codes of the ESX control
008 911 63
Fault Fault description Possible cause Terminal Input - Fault -
code on ESX code for reaction
diagnose
4 5 3 1 Position controller positive limit reached ) Supply and ground terminal on exciter potentiometer mixed up X44:09 5000 2
The exciter does not move to the desired ) Valves for "Exciter up" and "Exciter down" mixed up X44:37
direction or does not move at all. ) MD+ input has 12 V potential, even though the engine is not
running
BEM, BOMAG Evib-meter
4 5 3 2 Position controller negative limit reached ) Supply and ground terminal on exciter potentiometer mixed up X44:09 5000 2
The exciter does not move to the desired ) Valves for "Exciter up" and "Exciter down" mixed up X44:37
direction or does not move at all. ) MD+ input has 12 V potential, even though the engine is not
running
) Air in hydraulic system, hydraulic pressure too low
4 6 0 1 Input acceleration transducer 1 ) Current path has no connection to +12 V / +8,5 V X44:29, 4601 2
The voltage applied to the input is below the ) Current path connected to ground or
specified range (see signal description). ) Transducer defective X44:31
BOMAG
4 6 0 2 Input acceleration transducer 1 ) Current path has connection to +12 V / +8,5 V X44:29, 4601 2
The voltage applied to the input is above the ) Current path not connected to ground or
specified range (see signal description). ) Transducer defective X44:31
4 6 0 6 Input acceleration transducer 2 ) Current path has no connection to +12 V / +8,5 V X44:30, 4606 2
The voltage applied to the input is below the ) Current path connected to ground or
specified range (see signal description). ) Transducer defective X44:07
4 6 0 7 Input acceleration transducer 2 ) Current path has connection to +12 V / +8,5 V X44:30, 4606 2
The voltage applied to the input is above the ) Current path not connected to ground or
specified range (see signal description). ) Transducer defective X44:07
223
224
9.1
BOMAG
- The control has automatically switched off. This
9 9 9 9 fault cannot be rectified on the machine. The
control must be immediately replaced.
Ct0 Display module has no connection to ESX- ) Wire breakage in CAN bus lines X44:26 - -
control. ) Short circuit between CAN bus lines X44:27
) One or both CAN bus line(s) has (have) connection to 12V or
ground
) Incorrect bit rate in display module (nominal value: 125 kBit)
008 911 63
Service Training MESX Description of Control Input Codes
008 911 63
14 Input codes for ESX control (only via BEM display module)
BOMAG
Shows the actual speed.
1010 Parameter "Show distance pulses per 10m" Depending on the selected machine type, e.g. 5896 for
Eeprom Parameter is displayed BW177 BVC
1011 Parameter "Invert travel direction" 0000 ) Direction signal is not inverted
Eeprom Parameter is displayed 000I ) Direction signal is inverted
225
226
9.1
14.2 Vibration
14.3 Light
BOMAG
Status: 05.06.2007 Description of Control Input Codes Page 52 of 59
Author: T. Löw / TE
BEM, BOMAG Evib-meter
008 911 63
Service Training MESX Description of Control Input Codes
008 911 63
14.4 Acceleration transducer
BOMAG
Status: 05.06.2007 Description of Control Input Codes Page 53 of 59
Author: T. Löw / TE
9.1
227
228
9.1
BOMAG
Status: 05.06.2007 Description of Control Input Codes Page 54 of 59
Author: T. Löw / TE
BEM, BOMAG Evib-meter
008 911 63
Service Training MESX Description of Control Input Codes
008 911 63
14.7 Parameter change
BOMAG
Status: 05.06.2007 Description of Control Input Codes Page 55 of 59
Author: T. Löw / TE
9.1
229
9.1 BEM, BOMAG Evib-meter
Wire breakage
This generally means that a connection is interrupted. Possible reasons may be:
Line:
torn (not necessarily visible from outside)
chafed
chafed mostly in connection with a short circuit to ground
Digital
There are only two permissible states, e.g. switched on or off; lamp on / off; current flows /
does not flow; valve open / closed (black-white valve)
Analogue
In contrast to Digital many conditions are permitted within a certain range. For instance room
temperature 0° to 40°; current 4mA to 20mA; voltage 0V to 8,5V; resistance 100 Ω to 300 Ω;
valve 0% to 100% opened (proportional valve)
Control
Controlling describes the process during which an input value influences a distance (the
value to be controlled), following a fixed command. For this purpose all possible interfering
factors (e.g. temperature, humidity ...) must be known.
disturbance
variable (z)
disturbance
variable (z)
Ohm’s law:
U =R∗I
U = Voltage
R = Resistance U
I = Current
I=
R
U
R=
I
Plausibility check
The control (ESX) runs a plausibility check on all inputs. This means the control checks
permanently whether certain state combinations are permitted; e.g. travel lever position
forward and reverse will cause an fault message, because this condition is normally not
possible.
GND - AGND
Besides the "normal" battery ground (terminal 31) in the vehicle there is an additional
analogue ground, which is only to be used for sensors. (see description of the signals on the
ESX-control)
Description of function
With the programmable module BM UPM the software
realizes a speedometer function. To ensure that the
tachometer function is not only realized for one spe-
cial roller, there is a possibility to adapt the module to
any machine with the help of a self-teaching mode.
● Whenever the module is switched on the system
runs a self-test by passing through the entire dis-
play range in both directions. The display self-test
takes approx. 15 seconds.
● After this the module changes to measuring mode.
The frequency of the travel pulses of the roller is de-
tected and converted to a proportional output volt-
age that triggers the display.
● The output signal for the display is a PWM-signal.
Caution
!
i Note
If the module is in teach mode the LED on output
"OUT +" will flash with the frequency of the path puls-
es arriving at input (IN).
●
Disconnect the cable bridge from "Teach" to "15/
54“.
●
Switch the ignition off and on again (Reset).
Service Training
11/2005
Service Training
Table of contents
Travel system E1
Travel pump E3
Control E6
Charge pressure relief valve E 11
High pressure relief valve E 12
Pressure override E 14
Axle drive motor E 16
Drum drive motor E 20
Test and adjustment points, travel system E 25
Trouble shooting in travel system E 29
Service Training
Vibration F1
Vibration pump F3
High pressure relief valves F6
Control F7
Charge pump F8
Vibration motor F9
Drum F 12
Test and adjustment points, vibration system F 14
Trouble shooting in vibration system F 16
Steering G1
Steering pump(s) G2
Steering valve G4
Articulated joint G6
Measuring and adjustment points G8
Trouble shooting steering system G9
Travel circuit
from brake valve
M4 M5
from speed
ø 0.8
ø 0.81
ø 0.6
6
ø 0.6
4 8
BOMAG
T3
25 bar 9
3
1
M2
B
1 Travel pump Sauer 90 R 075 4 Multi function valve 7 Speed range valve
2 Servo control 5 Rear axle 8 Flushing valve
3 Charge pressure relief valve 6 Axle drive motor Sauer 51 D 110 9 Drum drive motor Poclain MSE 18 1C
Service Training
-E1-
Service Training
008 911 63
Service Training 11.1
Service Training
The travel system of the single drum rollers is a closed hydraulic circuit and consists mainly of:
• hydraulic lines.
Travel pump and vibration pump are connected to a tandem pump unit. The charge pump is an integral
part of the vibration pump.
The travel pump is the first pump section, flanged directly to the flywheel side of the diesel engine.
The pump delivers the hydraulic oil to the travel motors for drum and axle drives. The multi-function
valves in the pump limit the pressure in the closed circuit to (Δp = 400 bar between low and high
pressure sides).
A flushing valve in the axle drive motor (and in the Sauer drum drive motor 51 C 110) flushes a certain
oil quantity out of the closed circuit when the machine is driving (Δp between the two sides of the closed
circuit).
Leakage in the individual components of the circuit are replaced by the charge circuit through the boost
check valves in the travel pump.
The charge pumps draw hydraulic oil out of the tank and deliver it through the hydraulic oil filter and the
charge pressure relief valve to the boost check valves in travel and vibration pumps. The machine is
fitted with two charge pumps. One pump is integrated in the vibration pump and the other pump is driven
by the auxiliary output of the engine and serves primarily as steering pump.
The charge circuit provides the oil for the charge system and the control functions in the closed circuits
for travel and vibration drive, as well as to release the parking brakes and to change the travel speed
ranges.
The travel motor in the axle is desired with variable displacement. The operator can choose from two
different travel speed ranges.
Service Training
Travel pump
The travel pump is a swash plate operated axial piston pump with variable displacement, most suitable
for applications in hydrostatic drives with closed circuit.
M4 M5
2
A from/to
Travel motor
25 bar 4
3
1
from/to
Travel motor
B
Charge pressure to vibration pump
Service Training
The travel pump delivers the hydraulic oil to the motors on rear axle and drum. The pump flow is
proportional to the pump speed (output speed of diesel engine) and the actual displacement (swashing
angle of swash plate) of the pump.
7 1
6
5
Fig. 3: Travel pump
With the servo control the swashing angle can be infinitely adjusted from neutral position (0) to both
maximum displacement positions.
When altering the swash plate position through the neutral position, the oil flow will be reversed and the
machine will drive to the opposite direction.
All valves as well as the safety and control elements needed for operation in a closed circuit, are
integrated in the pump.
Note:
These machines are equipped with two charge pumps.
Service Training
Cross-sectional view of travel pump
2
4
5
1 3
9
10
8
11
Service Training
View of the rotating group
4 3
5
1 Working pistons
2 Slipper pad
3 Pre-tensioning spring
4 Cylinder block
5 Drive shaft
Service Training
Description of function
2 3 4 5 6
1
8 6 7
The drive shaft (1) is directly driven by the diesel engine via an elastic coupling. the shaft turns the tightly
connected cylinder block (5).
With the rotation of the drive shaft (1) the cylinder block (5) moves the working pistons (4). The slipper
pads of the working pistons abut against the swash plate (3).
Service Training
When moving the swash plate out of neutral position, the working pistons will perform a stroke
movement with every rotation of the cylinder block.
The slipper pads are hydrostatically balanced and are retained on the sliding face of the swashing cradle
by a retaining device.
During a full rotation of the cylinder block each working piston will move through the bottom and top dead
centre back to the initial position. During this movement each piston performs a complete stroke.
During the piston stroke each piston draws in a certain quantity of oil from the low pressure side of the
hydraulic circuit and presses it out into the high pressure side.
Service Training
Tandem pump
Service Training
Tandem pump, connections and adjustment points
32
Thermostat
housing
Service Training
1 Control solenoid, high frequency (vibration pump)
2 Control solenoid, low frequency (vibration pump)
3 Multi-function valve 400 bar (charging and pressure limitation), travel system
4 Charge pressure to solenoid valve for brakes and speed range selector, charging vibration
5 Multi-function valve 400 bar (charging and pressure limitation), travel system
6
7 Port L, leak oil to vibration pump
8 Travel lever
9 Pressure test port, pilot pressure
10 High pressure port B, high pressure reverse
11 Charge pressure relief valve, 26 bar
12 Adjustment screw, low frequency
13 Port L2, leak oil to tank
14 Pressure test port MB, high frequency
15 Pressure test port MA, low frequency
16 High pressure port A, low frequency
17 High pressure port B, high frequency
18 End plate with integrated charge pump (only in vibration pump)
19 Port L2
20 Adjustment screw, high frequency
21 Port D, charge pressure to filter
22 Multi-function valve 345 bar (charging and pressure limitation), vibration high frequency
23 Port S, suction line between hydraulic oil tank and charge pump
24 Multi-function valve 345 bar (charging and pressure limitation), vibration low frequency
25 Charge pressure relief valve, vibration pump (blocked)
26 Port E, charge oil from travel pump
27 Port L1, leak oil port to travel pump
28 Pressure test port MB, high pressure reverse
29 Charge oil from filter
30 Pressure test port MA, high pressure forward
31 High pressure port A, high pressure forward
32 Adjustment screw for mechanical neutral position, vibration
Service Training
servo control
The servo control (mechanical – hydraulic displacement control) converts the mechanical input signal
of the pump control lever into a position controlling output signal. This position controlling signal
determines the swashing angle of the swash plate (the displacement of the pump), as well as the
swashing direction (flow direction of the pressure fluid).
The flow quantity delivered by the variable displacement pump is proportional to the value of the
mechanical input signal. A mechanical feedback device ensures the fixed correlation between the
mechanical input signal and the swashing angle of the swash plate (displacement of pump).
Servo cylinder
Control piston
Sliding block
Servo arm
A mechanical safety device (spring) makes sure that a too fast lever movement will not cause any
damage to the servo control.
The pump displacement can be adjusted by actuating the pump control lever via travel lever and travel
control cable. This requires only very little manual forces and only a slight movement of the lever.
Since the control is spring centred, the swash plate will automatically return to neutral position under the
following conditions, thereby interrupting the oil flow and braking the machine:
Service Training
• when shutting the engine down,
Service Training
Multi-function valves
Pumps of series 90 are equipped with so-called multi-function valves, which activate a pressure override
and a pressure relief valve, one after the other.
1 2
3
A
6 5
B
4
If the adjusted pressure is reached, the pressure override will move the swash plate quickly back
towards neutral position, thereby limiting the system pressure. The average response time is less than
90 ms.
Service Training
In case of a very quick increase in pressure (pressure peaks) the system utilizes the function of the
pressure relief valves as a protection for the hydraulic systems. In such a case the pressure override
works as a pre-control unit for the control piston of the pressure relief valve. The pressure level of the
high pressure relief valve is higher than the pressure level of the pressure override. The high pressure
relief valves will only respond if the pressure override is not able to swash the pump back quick enough
in case of sudden pressure peaks.
2 3
4
5
1
6
9 7
8
10
11
Pressure override and high pressure relief valve are both parts of the multi-function valve, which is
screwed into the pump.
With its possibility to swash the swash plate inside the pump back within a period of 90 ms, the pressure
override makes sure that the high pressure relief valves will only respond in exceptional cases. This
protects the hydraulic circuit against overheating and reduces the load on the diesel engine.
Note:
The multi function valves must be tightened with a torque of 89 Nm!
Service Training
Charge pressure relief valve
The machines are equipped with two charge pumps, one driven by the auxiliary output of the engine
(steering and charge pump) and the other pump is integrated in the vibration pump.
The pressures of both pumps are limited by a charge pressure relief valve.
The charge pressure relief valve is a direct acting valve with fixed adjustment and is part of the safety
elements in a closed hydraulic circuit. This valve limits the pressure in the charge circuit to the adjusted
value (26 bar).
The charge circuit compensates leaks and flushing quantities in the closed travel and vibration circuits
and provides the necessary pressure to control the travel and vibration pumps and to operate the multi-
disc brakes in the travel drives.
Since feeding of cool and filtered oil is only possible in the low pressure side of the closed circuit, the
pressure in the low pressure side is almost identical with the pressure in the charge circuit.
When parking the machine on level ground with the engine running, the pressures in both sides of the
closed circuit are identical (charge pressure).
Service Training
Flushing valve
1 Flushing spool
2 Flushing pressure relief valve
The flushing valve is integrated in the axle drive motor. In case of a pressure increase in one of the two
sides of the closed circuit the flushing valves have the function to flush a certain quantity of oil out of the
low pressure side.
The valve is operated by the pressure difference between the two sides of the closed circuit (A and B).
If the pressure in one side is higher than in the other, this pressure will move the valve out of neutral
position against the neutral setting spring. Oil can now flow out of the low pressure side. This oil flows
through a thermostat valve back to the tank. The oil quantity flushed out of the closed circuit is
immediately replaced by oil entering from the charge circuit through the corresponding boost check
valve (part of the multi-function valve).
In this way the closed travel circuit is permanently supplied with cool and filtered oil and the temperature
household of the hydraulic system is maintained at a permissible level.
Service Training
Axle drive motor,
The axle drive motor is a swash plate controlled axial piston motor of series 51 D 110 with variable
displacement.
5 7 8
6
9
11
10
4
2
Service Training
The motor can be adjusted to two fixed displacements. This is accomplished by changing the angle
between cylinder block and output shaft.
With a large angle position the motor works with maximum displacement, slow speed and high torque.
When changing the swash plate position to minimal angle the motor works with minimum displacement,
high speed and low torque.
The displacement is changed by a control piston, which is tightly connected with the valve segment.
Changing of the displacement is accomplished by pressurizing the corresponding control piston side
with pressure oil from the charge circuit via a 4/2-way solenoid valve.
Function
The motor is connected with the travel pump via the high pressure ports A and B. The hydraulic oil flows
under high pressure through the corresponding port to the back of the working pistons. Since the
working pistons are arranged under an angle to the output shaft, the pressurized pistons will perform a
stroke movement, thereby causing a rotation of the output shaft.
Once the respective piston has passed its dead centre (max. extended position), it will change to the
low pressure side. As the rotation progresses, the piston will move back into the cylinder bore. Oil is
thereby displaced out of the cylinder chamber through the low pressure side back to the pump.
The synchronizing shaft with roller surfaces ensures uniform rotation of output shaft and cylinder block.
The ball joints of the pistons run in journal bearings, which are pressed into the outer shaft. For the
connection between output shaft and pistons no other parts are required. The output shaft runs in two
tapered roller bearings.
Service Training
Rear axle
Releasing the axle drive brake manually (on both axle drive designs)
For manual releasing of the brakes on the rear axle you should proceed as follows:
• Slacken the counter nut (Fig. 14, Pos. 1) and back it off by approx. 8 mm.
• To release the brake tighten the screw for max. 1 complete turn.
Attention!
Service Training
Front drum drive motor: Radial piston motor MSE 18 2 CX
On single drum rollers of series D-40 the drum is driven by a hydraulic radial piston motor.
These drum drive motors consist of three housing parts, the flat distributor, the cylinder block with the
working pistons and the output shaft.
2 3
4
1
43090070
6 5 4 5
Service Training
• bearing section (drive shaft bearings),
• oil distributor.
Pressure oil flows through the flat distributor to the working pistons in the cylinder block. This pressure
oil presses the working pistons with the rollers against the cam race of the torque section and forces the
rollers to roll along the cam race.
This transforms the axial movement of the pistons to a radial movement of the cylinder block. The
cylinder block transfers this rotation via a splined connection to the output shaft.
The output shaft runs in two tapered roller bearings. It transfers the rotary movement via the drive disc
and the rubber elements to the drum.
The function of the radial piston motor is described hereunder. The piston positions described in this
explanation can be seen in the related illustration.
The movement of a piston along the cam race must be examined in several phases during a full rotation:
2
3
Service Training
Piston position 1:
The oil enters into the oil distributor under pressure, flows through the distributor and presses against
the piston. The rotation starts at this point. The pressure applied to the back of the piston moves the
roller along the cam and causes a rotation of the cylinder block.
Piston position 2:
At this point the opening cross-section for the oil flow to the piston has reached its maximum size. The
piston continues his travel along the cam race towards the valley between two cams. As the movement
continues the opening cross-section for the oil supply decreases.
Piston position 3:
Once the piston has reached the bottom of the valley, the oil flow to the piston is interrupted. The piston
is no longer driven. It has reached its dead centre. Now another piston must be driven to move the first
piston out of the dead centre.
Piston position 4:
Other driven pistons now move the first piston out of the dead centre. The oil behind the piston is now
connected with the low pressure side and the reverse movement of the piston presses the oil back to
the pump.
Piston position 5:
The pumping movement of the motor back to the pump comes to an end, the connecting bore between
cylinder chamber and low pressure side closes again. The piston will now reach its second dead centre
position. This point is the start of a new working cycle.
Reversing the oil flow reverses also the rotation of the motor.
The output shaft runs in two tapered roller bearings. It transmits the rotary movement via the drive disc
and the rubber elements to the drum.
Service Training
Travel circuit: Drum drive with radial piston motor
1
4
6 1
n
ctio 1 Travel pump
i r e
e ld 2 Vibration pump
av 3 Travel lever
Tr 4 Hydraulic oil filter
High pressure 5 Rear axle
Low pressure 6 Axle drive motor
7 Drum drive motor
Charge pressure
8 Hydraulic oil tank
Leak oil (case pressure)
Fig. 16: Single drum rollers D-40, travel circuit, hose installation
Service Training
Brake control: Travel motor in axle
Brake valve
Charge pressure
Brake releasing pressure
Leak oil
Service Training
Travel drive, components and test points
Travel pump:
2
2 1
1
Pos. Designation Pos. in wiring diagram Pos. in hydraulic Measuring values
diagram
1 Test port, forward 10, MD max. 426 bar
2 High pressure port, forward 10, A
3 Charge pressure port 7, MA 26 bar
Service Training
Travel pump: right hand side
2 3
1
Pos. Designation Pos. in wiring diagram Pos. in hydraulic Measuring values
diagram
1 Test port, reverse 10, MC max. 426 bar
2 High pressure port, reverse 10, B
3 Travel control (travel control cable)
Service Training
Front travel motor, without brake (radial piston motor)
2 1
2 1
45 3
4
6
3
Service Training
Rear travel motor: Axle motor
1
4
3 2
6
5
7
Service Training
Brake valve
11
Service Training
Travel lever console
Service Training
Travel lever
Service Training
Trouble shooting
The following trouble shooting chart contains a small selection of possible faults, which may occur
during operation of the machine. The fault list is by no means complete, however, the fault table is based
on the experience of the central service department, i.e. the list covers almost all faults that have
occurred in the past.
Procedure:
The following trouble shooting table contains both electrical as well as mechanical and hydraulic faults.
The numerical values specified in the table indicate the probability of the fault cause and thereby the
recommended trouble shooting sequence, based on our latest field experience.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Brake valve (electric/mechanical/hydraulic) 1
Brake in axle-drive motor (mechanical/hydraulic) 2 2 3
Travel speed range switch position /defective/wiring 1
Charge pump / charge pressure relief valve(s)
2 3
dirty/defective
Pump control (servo control) 2 1 2 3
Pressure override/ travel pump high pressure limitation
3 2 3 3
dirty/out of adjustment/defective
Adjustment of travel cable 1 2
Travel pump mechanical neutral 3 3
Travel pump(s) defective 3 3 2
Axle drive motor control valve (electric / mechanical / hydraulic) 1 2
Flushing valve axle drive motor seized 3
Travel motor(s) defective 3 3
Hydraulic oil cooler soiled (internally/externally) 1
Thermostat (hydraulics) soiled/jammed/defective 2
Clutch- Dieselmotor-Pumpe 2
Dieselmotor 1
Service Training
Vibration system
The vibration system of the single drum rollers of generation D-40 works with two frequencies and two
amplitudes. This enables perfect adaptation of the machine to various types of soil and different
applications.
The vibration drive is a closed hydraulic circuit. The circuit consists of:
L2 N
Block
M1
M2
S
B
2
1
M4
M5
1 Vibration pump
2 Vibration motor
Service Training
Vibration pump and travel pump are joined together to a tandem pump unit. This tandem unit is directly
driven by the diesel engine.
When operating a 4/3-way solenoid valve on the pump control the pump is actuated out of neutral
position to one of the two possible displacement positions, pilot oil from the charge circuit is guided to
one of the two control piston sides. The swash plate inside the pump will swash to the corresponding
side and the pump will deliver oil to the vibration motor. The vibration motor starts and rotates the
vibrator shaft inside the drum.
When altering the position of the swash plate through the neutral position to the opposite side, the oil
flow will change its direction and the vibration motor will change its sense of rotation.
Since the end stops for the swash plate are set to different swashing angles to both directions, the angle
for the piston stroke is also different to both sides. This angle influences the length of the piston stroke
and thereby the actual displacement of the pump.
The eccentric weights on the vibrator shaft are fitted with additional change-over weights. Depending
on the sense of rotation of the vibrator shaft these change-over weights add to or subtract from the basic
weights.
In order to achieve effective compaction results the vibration system is designed in such a way, that high
amplitude is coupled with low frequency and low amplitude with high frequency.
Fig. 2:
Service Training
Vibration pump
Similar to the travel pump the vibration pump is also a swash plate operated axial piston pump with
variable displacement for operation in a closed circuit.
The displacement of the pump is proportional to the engine speed and the chosen displacement.
When actuating the swash plate out of neutral position the flow quantity to the chosen direction will
increase from ”0” to the maximum value. When altering the position of the swash plate through the
neutral position to the opposite side, the oil flow will change its direction and the vibration motor will
change its sense of rotation. All valves and safety elements for operation in a closed circuit are
integrated in the pump.
1 Vibration pump
L2 N 2 Charge pump
3 High pressure limitation
Block
4 4/3-way solenoid valve
A
M1
M2
S
B
M4
M5
Service Training
Function
1 2
5 4 3
1 Servo piston
2 Working pistons
3 Charge pump
4 Valve plate
5 Roller bearing
6 Swash plate
Service Training
1
2
5
4 3
1 Control
2 Servo piston
3 Friction free swash plate bearing
4 Attachment plate
5 Spool valve
The engine drives the drive shaft with the cylinder block. The cylinder block carries the working pistons.
The slipper pads rest against the sliding surface of the swash plate and are at the same time held on
the sliding surface by a retaining device.
During each rotation the piston pass through their upper and lower dead centre back to their initial
position. Between both dead centres each piston performs a full working stroke. During this stroke
movement oil is drawn in from the low pressure side of the closed circuit and pressed out through the
slots in the valve plate into the high pressure side. The oil quantity depends on the piston area and the
length of the working stroke.
Service Training
During the suction stroke the oil is drawn into the piston chamber, i.e. the charge pressure forces it into
the piston chamber. On the opposite side the piston presses the oil out into the high pressure side of he
closed circuit.
Control
The electro-hydraulic displacement control (remote control) converts the electric input signal to a load
controlling output signal. Since the pump is not equipped with a proportional control, but a 12 Volt
solenoid valve, the pump is always actuated to one of the two end stop positions.
Charge pumps
One of the pumps is an external gear pump, which is directly driven by the auxiliary output of the engine
and serves also as steering pump.
The second pump is an internal gear pump and is located in the end cover of the vibration pump.
The oil flow generated by the charge pumps is joined together with the return flow from the steering
valve before the hydraulic oil filter and flows through the filter to the charge ports on travel pump and
vibration pump.
Service Training
High pressure relief valves
As a measure to protect the closed vibration circuit against to high pressures the vibration pump is fitted
with pressure relief valves.
Since the heavy mass of the vibrator shaft must be set into motion during the acceleration of the
vibration, very high pressure peaks will occur in the high pressure side of the closed circuit during this
phase. The high pressure relief valve reduces these pressure peaks to a value of max. 371 bar
(pressure difference between high and low pressure side = 345 bar + charge pressure = 26 bar).
The screw-type cartridges of the high pressure relief valves contain also the boost check valves for the
closed vibration circuit. The function of these valves has already been described in the chapter "travel
system".
Service Training
Vibration motor
The vibration motor is a Bosch-Rexroth (Hydromatik) axial piston motor of series A10FM 45 with fixed
displacement in bent axle design. Since the motor can be subjected to pressure from both sides, it is
most suitable for the use in closed hydraulic circuits.
The output speed of the motor depends on the oil quantity supplied by the vibration pump.
2 3
4 5
1
8 7
10 9
Service Training
The output torque raises with increasing pressure difference between low and high pressure side in the
closed circuit.
Changing the flow direction of the oil will also change the sense of rotation of the vibration motor.
When switching the vibration on the motor must first start to move the resting vibration shaft. This
resistance causes a hydraulic starting pressure, which is limited to 345 bar by the corresponding high
pressure relief valve. Once the vibrator shaft has reached its final speed, the pressure will drop to a
value between 100 and 150 bar (operating pressure). The value of the operating pressure mainly
depends on the condition of the ground (degree of compaction, material etc.).
A MA
3 1
B MB
1 Vibration motor
2 Flushing valve
3 Flushing pressure relief valve
Service Training
The vibration motor is equipped with an integrated flushing valve. When switching the vibration on a
pressure difference will appear between the two sides of the closed circuit. The higher pressure moves
the valve spool of the flushing valve against the neutral setting spring, so that oil can flow out of the low
pressure side.
1
A
1 Flushing spool
2 Flushing pressure limitation valve
The flushing valve is fitted with a downstream 13 bar pressure relief valve. This valve ensures that only
a certain quantity of hydraulic oil is flushed out of the low pressure side.
This oil flows via a thermostat valve back to the hydraulic tank. The flushed out oil is immediately
replaced with fresh and filtered oil through the corresponding boost check valve.
Service Training
Drum
4
14
5 9
7 13
6
10
3 8 11
12
Service Training
Vibration system: Components and test ports
Vibration pump
11
2
3
2
5 6 3
6
5 4
4
Pos. Designation Pos. in wiring diagram Pos. in hydraulic Measuring values
diagram
1 Pressure test port, charge pressure MA 26 bar
2 Hydraulic oil filter (charge circuit) 07
with visual pressure differential
indicator
3 High pressure port, low MF
amplitude
4 High pressure port, high ME
amplitude
5 Solenoid valve, low amplitude Y08 12V / 3,33A
6 Solenoid valve, high amplitude Y07 12V / 3,33A
Service Training
Vibration pump
Service Training
Vibration motor
Service Training
Trouble shooting
The following trouble shooting chart contains a small selection of possible faults, which may occur
during operation of the machine. The fault list is by no means complete, however, the fault table is based
on the experience of the central service department, i.e. the list covers almost all faults that have
occurred in the past.
Procedure:
The following trouble shooting table contains both electrical as well as mechanical and hydraulic faults.
The numerical values specified in the table indicate the probability of the fault cause and thereby the
recommended trouble shooting sequence, based on our latest field experience.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Vibration switch (amplitude pre-selection) 1 1
Vibration push button (on/off) 1
Electrics defective / wiring 2 2
Pump control (electrical / hydraulic) 1 1
Pressure override / high pressure relief valves in vibration pump
2
soiled/out of adjustment/ defective
Charge pump / charge pressure relief valve
2
soiled/ defective
Vibration pump frequency adjustment 2
Vibration pump defective 2 2
Coupling between diesel engine and travel pump defective
Exciter shaft bearings defective 3
Vibration motor coupling defective 2
Vibration motor defective 2 1
Diesel engine 1
Service Training
Steering
Single drum rollers of series BW 211 / 212 / 213 D-40 are equipped with a hydrostatically operated
articulated steering system.
The steering system mainly consists of steering pump, steering valve, steering cylinders and pressure
resistant connecting hoses.
to charge
system
1
7
6
5
3
2
4
1 Rating pump
2 Distributor valve
3 Steering pressure relief valve (Δp =175 bar)
4 Check valve (pre-loaded to 0.5 bar)
5 Anti-cavitation valve
6 Shock valves (240 bar)
7 Steering cylinders
The steering pump draws the hydraulic oil out of the hydraulic oil tank and delivers it to the steering valve
and the connected steering unit under the operator's platform of the machine. If the steering is not
operated, the complete oil supply will flow through the fine filter to the charge system for the closed travel
circuits.
When turning the steering wheel the distributor valve guides the oil flow to the piston or piston rod side
of the steering cylinder. A rating pump inside the steering unit measures the exact oil quantity
corresponding with the turning angle of the steering wheel and delivers the oil to the steering cylinders.
The steering cylinders retract or extend and steer the machine.
The steering unit is equipped with a pressure relief valve. This valve limits the steering pressure to 175
bar. The charge pressure must, however, be added to this value, because the oil leaving the steering
system enters the charge circuit. The actual steering pressure is therefore approx. 200 bar.
Service Training
Steering pump
The steering pump is a gear pump with fixed displacement. It is driven by the auxiliary drive of the diesel
engine, draws the hydraulic oil out of the hydraulic oil tank and pumps it through the steering valve to
the steering cylinders or to the boost check valves for travel and vibration circuits.
9 9 6 1 7
8
2
4 5
1 Housing
2 Flange
3 Shaft
4 Bearing plate
5 Bearing plate
6 Cover
7 Gear (driving)
8 Gear (driven)
9 Seals
Service Training
Working principle of the gear pumps
The drive gear of the steering pump is connected with the auxiliary drive of the diesel engine via a
coupling. Drive gear and driven gear are positioned by a bearing plate in such a way, that the teeth of
both gears mesh with minimum clearance when rotating.
The displacement chambers are created between the tooth flanks, the inside wall of the housing and
the faces of the bearing plates.
When the pump is running the chambers transport hydraulic oil from the suction side to the pressure
side. This causes a vacuum in the suction line by which the hydraulic oil is drawn out of the tank. The
tooth chambers transport the fluid to the outlet of the pump from where it is pressed to the consumers.
To ensure a safe function of the pump the tooth chambers must be so tightly sealed that the hydraulic
fluid can be transported from the suction side to the pressure side without any losses.
For this purpose external gear pumps are fitted with gap seals. This causes pressure dependent fluid
losses from the pressure side to the suction side. As a measure to ensure that these losses are reduced
to a minimum, the bearing plate on the cover side is pressed against the faces of the gears by an axial
pressure field.
Service Training
Steering valve
The steering valve block consists mainly of distributor valve, measuring pump, pressure relief valve and
shock valves.
9 2
5
8
Service Training
240 bar
Δp = 175 bar
240 bar
0,5 bar
The high pressure relief valve in the steering unit limits the pressure in the steering system to 175 bar.
The charge pressure value must be added to this pressure, because the oil leaving the steering system
is fed into the charge circuit for the closed travel circuits.
The steering unit is fitted with so-called shock valves in each supply line to the steering cylinder. These
valves are adjusted to an opening pressure of 240 bar. The valves compensate extreme pressure peaks
which may occur, e.g. when driving over obstructions, and protect the system against overloads.
Each of these shock valves is fitted with an additional anti-cavitation valve. If the shock valves respond
these anti-cavitation valves protect the system against cavitation damage.
A check valve at the inlet of the steering unit makes sure that no oil will flow back to the pump in case
of pressure peaks caused by sudden steering movements. In such a case the steering cylinders would
act as pumps and press the oil back to the pump.
Service Training
Articulated joint
Front and rear frames of the single drum rollers are connected by an oscillating articulated joint. This
ensures that drum and wheels are at all times in contact with the ground, even when driving extreme
curves.
Service Training
The rear console is tightly bolted to the rear frame.
The front console is fastened with screws to the rear cross-member of the front frame. The use of rocker
bearings between front and rear frame ensures that both frames can oscillate to each other for +/- 12°.
This gives drum and wheels excellent ground contact, even under extremely severe conditions.
The front console is connected with the rear console by two vertical bolts. The vertical bolts are mounted
in friction bearings.
When turning the steering wheel the steering cylinder will extend or retract. The piston rod swivels the
front console around the vertical bolts. This articulates the machine and results in a steering movement.
All bearings on the articulated joint are maintenance free and do not require any lubrication.
Notes on assembly:
When assembling or repairing the articulated joint the correct pretension of the centre pin is of highest
importance.
Please follow the instructions in the repair manual for the articulated joint.
Service Training
Steering: Components and test ports
Steering pump
Service Training
Vibration and noise damper
The damper is located in the steering/charge circuit directly after the steering and charge pump.
It is subjected to hydraulic oil flow and has the function of eliminating any vibrations and noises.
The damper is mounted to the front plate of the rear frame, between both steering cylinders.
Service Training
Steering valve
Service Training
Trouble shooting
The following trouble shooting chart contains a small selection of possible faults, which may occur
during operation of the machine. The fault list is by no means complete, however, the fault table is based
on the experience of the central service department, i.e. the list covers almost all faults that have
occurred in the past.
Procedure:
The following trouble shooting table contains both electrical as well as mechanical and hydraulic faults.
The numerical values specified in the table indicate the probability of the fault cause and thereby the
recommended trouble shooting sequence, based on our latest field experience.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Steering orbitrol valve 2 2 1
Steering/charge pump 1 1 2
Steering cylinder 3 3 3
Articulated joint 3 3 2
Fig. 1 Engine compartment The pistons are made of aluminium alloy. The side
Single drum rollers of series BW211/213 D/PD-4 and walls of the slightly externally arranged combustion
BW213/214 DHC/PDHC-4 are powered by Deutz die- trough are inclined towards the inside by 10°. All pis-
sel engines type BF4M 2012 C with intercooling. The tons are fitted with three piston rings and a cast iron
intercooler reduces the thermal load on the engine, ring carrier for the first ring. The pistons are oil mist lu-
the exhaust temperature and the fuel consumption bricated.
and thus enables a higher power output. The forged crankshaft is designed with integrated
The engines are characterized by the following posi- counter weights.
tive features: The block-type cylinder head is made of cast steel.
● short and compact design Each of the cylinders has an inlet and an outlet valve.
●
low noise level The valve guides are shrunk into the cylinders. The
valve seat rings are made of high quality steel and
●
almost vibration free operation
also shrunk fit.
●
low fuel consumption
●
low exhaust emissions (EPA II)
●
high power reserves and
●
excellent access to all service locations.
Crankcase and cylinders on this engine are made of
alloyed cast iron. This provides rigidness and high
wear resistance.
The forged steel conrods are designed with balancing
weights in the area of the conrod bearing seats. These
weights compensate manufacturing tolerances with
respect to weight and position of the centre of gravity.
General
The oil inside the combustion engine has the function
of lubricating and cooling all drive components, re-
moving impurities and neutralizing chemically effec-
tive combustion products, transferring forces and
damping vibrations.. The oil is only able to fulfil this
function, if sufficient quantities are transported to the
critical points in the engine and if its properties are
adapted to the prevailing requirements by corre-
sponding manufacturing processes and refining (addi-
tives).
Figure (1) shows pressure circulation lubrication in
combination with splash and oil mist lubrication. Here
oil is transported under pressure to all bearing loca-
tions by the oil pump (16), while sliding surfaces are
splash or oil mist lubricated. After flowing through the
bearing locations and along sliding surfaces the oil is
collected in the oil sump (1) under the drive, where the
oil is cooled, defoamed by calming and stored.
The oil filter (19) removes solid foreign particles from
the engine oil (combustion residues, metal abrasion,
dust) and thus maintains the function of the lubrication
oil during the maintenance intervals.
Fig. 1
1 Oil pressure switch
! Danger
Danger of injury!
Support the engine hood for all maintenance and
repair work.
i Note
The machine must be parked horizontally with the en-
gine shut down.
!Caution
Before longer work periods you should always top
the oil up to the "MAX"-mark.
Caution
!
Danger
!
Fig. 5
Danger of scalding! ● Thoroughly clean the outside of both filter cartridges
When draining off hot oil. (Fig. 5).
By hot oil when unscrewing the engine oil filter. ● Unscrew both filter cartridges using an appropriate
filter wrench.
Environment
Catch running out oil and dispose of environmen- i Note
tally together with the engine oil filter cartridge. The filter cartridges are fitted with a valve that pre-
vents engine oil from running out during removal and
installation.
● Clean the sealing face on the filter carrier from any
dirt.
●
Slightly oil the rubber seal on the new filter cartridg-
es.
Fig. 4
● Unscrew the drain plug (Fig. 4) and catch running
out oil.
●
Turn the drain plug tightly back in.
Fig. 6
● Turn the new filter cartridges (Fig. 6) on by hand,
until the seal contacts.
● Tighten the filter cartridges for another half turn.
Fig. 7
● Fill in new engine oil (Fig. 7).
! Caution
Before starting crank the engine with the starter
motor until the oil pressure warning light goes
out.
●
After a short test run check the oil level on the dip-
stick, if necessary top up to the top dipstick mark.
●
Check filter cartridge and drain plug for leaks after a
short test run.
●
Shut the engine down and wait for about 15 min-
utes, so that all oil can flow back into the oil sump.
●
Check the oil level again, if necessary fill up to the
Max.-mark.
General
In order to avoid thermal overloads, burning of lubrica-
tion oil on piston sliding surfaces and uncontrolled
burns caused by high component temperatures, the
components surrounding the combustion chamber,
like cylinders, cylinder head, valves and possibly also
the pistons, must be cooled intensively.
Brief description
The coolant pump ("water pump") draws coolant
through the hose lines directly out of the radiator and
forces it first of all through the lubrication oil cooler,
which is integrated in the engine. The coolant then en- Fig. 2 Direct heating
ters into the engine, flows up along the cylinders into
the cylinder head and to the thermostat at the coolant 1 Thermostat
outlet. Form their the coolant is returned through the 2 Coolant pump
corresponding lines to the radiator inlet. When the en- 3 Lubrication oil cooler
gine is cold the coolant is pumped in a short circuit 4 Heat exchanger
through the engine, until the response temperature of
the thermostat (start of opening) is reached. The wa-
ter pump draws cold coolant out of the radiator, as re-
quired to replenish the hot out flowing coolant.
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze
agent. The anti-freeze agent increases the boiling
temperature of the mixture and thus enables temper-
atures of up to 120° C at an overpressure of up to 1.4
bar.
The coolant compensation tank enables reliable gas
separation, thus avoiding cavitation in the cooling sys-
tem, which mainly occurs in the suction side of the
pump. The air volume inside the compensation must
be so high, that quick build-up of pressure in case of
heating and expansion of coolant is assured and any
escape of coolant during after-boiling is avoided.
The radiator (1) dissipates the waste heat generated
in the engine into the into the environment.
Part of the combustion heat is transferred to the lubri-
cation oil. The lubrication oil cooler (5) serves the
function of cooling the lubrication oil.
Heating
Water-cooled DEUTZ diesel engines utilize the cool-
ant to heat the driver's cab. For this purpose the en-
gine coolant is guided directly to the heat exchanger
and the heat is directly dissipated into the environ-
ment (direct heating).
Environment
Dispose of escaping coolant environmentally
● Unscrew the temperature switch.
Danger
!
Danger of scalding!
Do not remove the cap from the compensation
tank when the engine is still hot.
● Drain the coolant from the engine and catch it.
Environment
Catch running out coolant and dispose of environ-
mentally. Fig. 6
● Assemble the outlet socket (Fig. 6).
● Tightening torque: 30 Nm.
● Install the coolant hose again.
● Fill in coolant up to the “MAX” mark .
●
Run the engine up to operating temperature.
i Note
Check for leaks around the thermostat.
● Let the engine cool down and check the coolant lev-
el again, top up if necessary.
Fig. 4
●
Disconnect the coolant hose.
● Remove the outlet socket (Fig. 4).
● Remove the thermostat.
Fig. 5
●
Fit a new seal to the thermostat.
● Insert the new thermostat with the seal ring (Fig. 5).
i Note
Mind the installation position. The arrow (ventilation
groove) points up.
12.12Checking the thermostat in The temperature increase should not exceed 1°C/
min, as otherwise the start of opening will be delayed
disassembled state accordingly.
The thermostat serves the optimal temperature con-
trol of the coolant, in order to promote efficient com-
bustion and to bring the engine quickly to operating
temperature after starting. At temperatures below ap-
prox. 83°C the thermostat is closed. Once the coolant
temperature has reached about 83°C, the thermostat
will start to open, at about 95° C it is fully open. In this
condition the full coolant flow is guided through the ra-
diator.
Fig. 3
● Measure and write down the measurement "b" on
the thermostat . (Fig. 3).
● Calculate the stroke.
Stroke = b - a
i Note
Fig. 1 The stroke at the given temperature (T2) should be
min. 8 mm.
● Measure and write down the measurement "a" on
the thermostat (Fig. 4).
i Note
"a" = beginning of stroke at approx. 83 ± 2°C (T1)
"b" = end of stroke at approx. 95 °C (T2)
Fig. 2
● Warm up the thermostat in a water bath (Fig. 2).
i Note
In order to determine the exact start of opening the
temperature should be measured as close to the ther-
mostat as possible, but without touching it.
The water must thereby be stirred continuously, to en-
sure even temperature distribution.
! Danger ! Danger
Environment
Catch running out coolant and dispose of environ-
mentally.
Fig. 4
●
Check the coolant level (Fig. 4).
!Caution
Fig. 5
If, during the daily inspection the coolant level is
found to have dropped, check all lines, hoses and ●
Set the cock valve for the cabin heater to position
engine for leaks. "warm".
●
To top up unscrew the filler cap and fill in coolant up
to the MAX-mark.
Fig. 6
● Unscrew the plug, let the coolant run out and catch
it.
● Screw the plug back in once all coolant has run out.
!Caution
In order to avoid damage to the engine e.g. by cor-
rosion, cavitation and freezing, particular atten-
tion must be paid to the inspection of the coolant.
Danger
!
Danger of scalding!
Fig. 7
Check the anti-freeze concentration only when the
engine is cold.
● Unscrew the cap and fill in coolant up to the MAX-
mark.
●
Perform the inspection with conventional test equip-
ment.
For quality of coolant refer to the chapter 5.2, fuels ● The anti-freeze concentration (additive) must be at
and lubricants. least 35 Vol% and maximum 45 Vol%.
● Start the diesel engine and run it warm to operating
temperature.
! Danger
● Let the engine cool down and check the coolant lev- Health hazard!
el again, top up if necessary.
The mixing of nitrite based anti-freeze agents with
amine based agents results in the formation of
health affecting nitrosamines.
Environment
Catch all anti-freeze agent and dispose of environ-
mentally.
Danger
!
Danger of injury!
Perform cleaning work only after the engine has
cooled down and with the engine stopped.
Caution
!
i Note
Dirt on fan blades and oil cooler reduce the cooling ef-
fect. Dirt deposits in these areas are substantially sup-
ported by oil and fuel on these surfaces. For this
reason you should always seal any oil or fuel leaks in
the vicinity of the cooling fan or the oil cooler and clean
the cooling surfaces after.
Fig. 8
i Note
Start to blow out from the exhaust side.
● Blow the cooler (Fig. 8) out with compressed air.
Caution
!
12.17Three-phase generator
Fig. 1
1 Generator (G02)
i Note
The generator is maintenance free. Function tests and
repair work must only be performed in authorized
workshops.
! Caution
Before removing the generator you must discon-
nect the ground cable from the minus pole of the
battery while the ignition is switched off. Do not
disconnect the generator while the engine is run-
ning, because this may cause extremely high volt-
age peaks in the vehicle wiring system ("Load
Dump"), which could possibly damage control
units, radios or other electronic equipment.
When disassembling the battery cable, the B+-nut
underneath on the generator side may also be
loosened. This nut must in this case be retight-
ened.
When connecting e.g. the battery cable to the ter-
minal of the generator you must make sure that
the polarity is correct (generator B+ to the + pole
of the battery). Mixing up the polarities by mistake
causes short circuit and damage to the rectifier el-
ements - the generator will be out of function.
The generator can only be operated with the bat-
tery connected. Under special conditions emer-
gency operation without battery is permitted, the
lifetime of the generator is in such cases especial-
ly limited.
Plus and minus cables must be disconnected dur-
ing rapid charging of the battery or electric weld-
ing on the vehicle.
When cleaning the generator with a steam or wa-
ter jet make sure not to direct the steam or water
jet directly on or into the generator openings or
ball bearings. After cleaning the generator should
be operated for about 1 - 2 minutes to remove any
deposits of water from the generator.
12.18Fuel supply
! Danger
For diesel fuel the ignition temperature, i.e. the
temperature at which fuel will ignite when coming
into contact with air, is approx. 220°C, but may de-
viate strongly because of impurities.
Fuel conducting components and lines therefore
are a source of danger inside the engine compart-
ment, because leaks may lead to fire resulting in
considerably damage to material and persons.
Check valve
Fig. 1
● According to our experience, it is not always as-
sured that only clean fuel will be used. Fuel tanks
are frequently filled without suitable precautions
against contamination or fuel filters are inappropri-
ately serviced. Many damage analyses on injection
pumps and injection valves have revealed that most
of these components had failed due to premature
wear. Wear on injection pump plunger and injection
valve needle seat is caused by contaminated fuel. Fig. 2 Observe the direction of flow
Modern exhaust optimized diesel engines with high
pressure injection systems strictly require clean fuel i Note
to be able to work reliably over their entire lifetime. From August 2006 the check valve (Fig. 2) is used by
If the throttle resistances of pre-cleaner/main filter BOMAG in series machines.
caused by contaminated fuel are so high that the
fuel pump is no longer able to ensure a sufficient
fuel supply, the injection pumps will draw the re- ! Caution
quired fuel through the leak fuiel return line from the This valve must strictly be installed into the fuel
tank without filtration. The engine is no longer able return line by our customers.
to provide its full power, operation of construction
equipment or other machines, however, may still be
possible to a limited extent. After short time opera-
tion under such conditions the injection system
components may already be pre-damaged.
1 Tensioning nut ●
Disassemble pressure control valve and cylinder
2 Nozzle head cover (Fig. 1).
3 Intermediate piece ●
Disconnect the cable plugs from shut-down sole-
noid, governor and temperature sensor.
4 Pressure bolt
5 Pressure spring
● Swing the holding plate to the side.
6 Shim
i Note
A thicker shim 6 (Fig. 4) increases the opening pres-
sure.
!Caution
When replacing an injection pump and/or an injec-
tion valve, you must also replace the high pres-
sure line between pump and valve.
Fig. 2
● Remove the engine shut-down assy (Fig. 2).
Fig. 3 Fig. 5
● Use the shut-down lever to push the governor rod to ● Set the cylinder of the injection pump to be disas-
stop position (Fig. 3). sembled to top dead centre (TDC) for ignition
● Insert and fasten the pressing device 100 830. (valves overlapping) (Fig. 5).
● Turn the crankshaft for approx. 120° against the
sense of rotation.
i Note
Illustration shows view on flywheel.
Fig. 4
● Use the knurled fastening screw to force the gover-
nor rod to stop position (Fig. 4).
i Note
Tighten the knurled fastening screw by hand. Fig. 6
●
Remove the injection line (Fig. 6).
i Note
Close the connections with protection caps.
Fig. 7
● Carefully remove the shim with a rod-type magneto
(Fig. 7).
i Note
Old injection pump and shim are not required for this
purpose.
Example:
The injection pump for cylinder 3 is to be replaced on
an engine BF6M 2012.
Procedure:
● Read the EP-code for cylinder 3 in the column "EP"
on the type plate (table) (Fig. 8), e.g. 295.
i Note
Sequence of reading: Line 1 = cyl.1, line 2 = cyl.2, etc.
● Take the corrected injection pump installation
measurement (EK) matching the EP-code from the
table (Fig. 11), e.g. 120.875 mm.
i Note
Measurement "A" (Fig. 3) determines by how many 1/
100 of a mm the distance between cylinder crankcase
contact surface and plunger foot is longer than the ba-
sic measurement Lo.
Basic measurement of injection pump (Lo) = 117.5
mm.
● Determine the theoretical thickness of the shim
(TS).
TS = EK - (Lo + A/100)
TS = 2.955 mm
Fig. 9 Length of injection pump (A) ● Choose the shim thickness (SS) from the table.
● Read the coefficient for the injection pump length
(A) (Fig. 9) on the new injection pump, e.g. 42.
TS 2.955 mm = SS 3.0 mm
Theor. thickness "TS" Shim thickness "SS" Theor. thickness "TS" Shim thickness "SS"
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
0.95 - 1.049 1.0 2.45 - 2.549 2.5
1.05 - 1.149 1.1 2.55 - 2.649 2.6
1.15 - 1.249 1.2 2.65 - 2.749 2.7
1.25 - 1.349 1.3 2.75 - 2.849 2.8
1.35 - 1.449 1.4 2.85 - 2.949 2.9
1.45 - 1.549 1.5 2.95 - 3.049 3.0
1.55 - 1.649 1.6 3.05 - 3.149 3.1
1.65 - 1.749 1.7 3.15 - 3.249 3.2
1.75 - 1.849 1.8 3.25 - 3.349 3.3
1.85 - 1.949 1.9 3.35 - 3.449 3.4
1.95 - 2.049 2.0 3.45 - 3.549 3.5
2.05 - 2.149 2.1 3.55 - 3.649 3.6
2.15 - 2.249 2.2 3.65 - 3.749 3.7
2.25 - 2.349 2.3 3.75 - 3.849 3.8
2.35 - 2.449 2.4
Assembly
Fig. 15
● Slightly oil the receiving bore in the crankcase and
Fig. 12 the O-rings on the injection pump.
●
Carefully insert the injection pump control lever into
the governor rod. (Fig. 15).
Caution
!
Fig. 13
● Lay the newly determined shim on roller plungers
(Fig. 12) and (Fig. 13).
Fig. 16
● Attach the flange (Fig. 16).
! Caution
The chamfer must face towards the injection
pump body.
Fig. 14
● Turn the injection pump control lever approx. to
middle position (Fig. 14).
Fig. 20
Fig. 17
● Turn the screws in again for 60°, then tighten in
●
Slightly oil the screws and tighten with a torque of 5
steps to a torque of 7 Nm, 10 Nm and 30 Nm. (Fig.
Nm (Fig. 17).
20).
i Note
Always start with the outer screw furthest away from
the flywheel.
Fig. 18
● Loosen the screws again for 60° (Fig. 18).
Fig. 21
● Turn the knurled fastening screw back (Fig. 21).
● Remove the pressing device.
Caution
!
Fig. 19
● Carefully turn the injection pump with an open end
spanner anti-clockwise against the noticeable end
stop (Fig. 19).
Fig. 22
● Assemble a new O-ring (Fig. 22). Fig. 24
i Note Caution
!
Cover the O-ring slightly with oil. Take care that the sealing cones match exactly
when assembling the injection line. Subsequent
bending is not permitted. The injection line must
never be used twice.
●
Install the new injection line with the sealing rubber
(Fig. 24).
● Pre-tension the injection line cap nuts on injection
pump and injection valve with a torque of approx. 5
Nm (use claw spanner 8018).
●
Tighten the cap nut with 25 ± 3.5 Nm.
Fig. 23
●
Use the shut-down lever to push the governor rod to
stop position and hold it (Fig. 23).
●
Assemble the engine shut-down assy.
●
Tighten the screws with 21 Nm.
● Plug the cable plug onto the shut-down magneto.
Fig. 25
● Install the gasket (Fig. 25).
i Note
Injection valves may wear mechanically over the
course of time. Spray pattern and injection pressure
should be tested on an injection valve test bench ("hy-
drostesting"). The nozzles must be disassembled for
this purpose. In case of excessive deposits on the
nozzles these may be cleaned in an ultrasonic bath
with gasoline. The injection pressure can be corrected
by means of shims.
Fig. 26
●
Assemble cylinder head cover and holding plate !Caution
(Fig. 26). Ensure strict cleanliness when working on the in-
jection system. Use only clean testing oil acc. to
● Tighten the screws with 11 Nm.
ISO 4113 or clean diesel fuel to test the injection
valves.
i Note
Ensure the sealing rubber is fitted correctly. Removal
● If necessary assemble the pressure control valve
with a new seal.
● Tighten the screws with 8.5 Nm.
Fig. 1
●
Disassemble pressure control valve and cylinder
head cover (Fig. 4).
●
Disconnect the cable plugs from shut-down sole-
noid, governor and temperature sensor.
●
Swing the holding plate to the side.
Installation
Fig. 2
● Disassemble the injection lines (Fig. 2). Fig. 1
● Slide the new seal rings with some grease over the
i Note injection valves and insert the injection valves (Fig.
Close connections on injection valves and injection 1).
pumps with protective caps.
Caution
!
Fig. 3
●
Disassemble the claws and take out the injection
valves (Fig. 3).
Fig. 2
i Note ● Attach the claws and turn the screws in loosely (Fig.
In case of tight fit use the extracting device 150 800 2).
with puller 110 030.
Pull out the seal ring with the extracting device 120
680.
Fig. 3 Fig. 5
● Pre-tension the injection line cap nuts on injection
Caution
! pumps and injection valves with a torque of approx.
Take care that the sealing cones match exactly 5 Nm (Fig. 5).
when assembling the injection line. Subsequent ● Tighten the cap nuts with 25 + 3.5 Nm.
bending is not permitted. The injection line must
never be used twice.
i Note
● Install the new injection lines with the sealing rub-
Use a claw spanner 8018.
bers (Fig. 3).
● Tighten the cap nuts finger tight.
Fig. 6
●
Install the gasket (Fig. 25).
Fig. 4
●
Tighten the screws for the claws with 16 + 5 Nm
(Fig. 4).
!Caution
Ensure strict cleanliness when working on the in-
jection system. Use only clean testing oil acc. to
Fig. 7 ISO 4113 or clean diesel fuel to test the injection
●
Assemble cylinder head cover and holding plate valves.
(Fig. 26).
● Tighten the screws with 11 Nm. Check the injection valves
i Note i Note
Ensure the sealing rubber is fitted correctly. The injection valves are leak fuel free. Fuel cannot
flow off and will accumulate above the nozzle needle
● If necessary assemble the pressure control valve in the spring chamber of the nozzle holder. Operation
with a new seal. of the nozzle tester hand leever is in this case no long-
● Tighten the screws with 8.5 Nm. er possible. In order to eliminate the pressure inside
the spring chamber the clamping nut must be slack-
ened and retightened again before each test.
Fig. 1
●
Loosen the clamping screw by approx. 180° and
tighten it again (Fig. 1).
Tightening instructions: 30 - 40 Nm
i Note
Use injection valve holder 110 110.
i Note
If the opening pressure needs toi be corrected: De-
tach the injection valve from the nozzle tester 8008.
Unscrew the clamping nut and remove all parts. Use
injection valve holder 110 110.
Fig. 2
●
Mount the injection valve to the nozzle tester (Fig.
2).
! Danger
Fig. 3
● Slowly press the lever of the nozzle tester 8008
down with the pressure gauge connected (Fig. 3).
Fig. 5
Opening pressure: 220 bar Sequence of disassembly (Fig. 5):
1 Tensioning nut
i Note 2 Injection nozzle
The opening pressure is reached, when the pointer 3 Intermediate piece
stops or suddenly drops. 4 Pressure bolt
The pressure inside the spring chamber will have 5 Pressure spring
build up again after approx. 3 - 4 strokes. In order to 6 Shim
repeat the test the clamping nut needs to be slack-
ened and retightened again, as specified.
● Clean all parts with clean diesel fuel and blow off
with compressed air.
Once identical values are measured during 3 tests,
the values can be considered valid.
Fig. 6 Fig. 8
●
Assemble the shim (Fig. 8).
!Caution
Nozzle needle and nozzle body have been fitted i Note
by lapping and must never be mixed up by mis- Adjust the opening pressure by choosing the required
take or replaced individually. Do not touch the shim. A thicker shim increases the opening pressure.
nozzle needle with your fingers. With the nozzle
body in vertical position, the nozzle needle must
smoothly slide on its seat just by its own weight
(Fig. 6).
i Note
If the needle slides down jerkily, wash out the nozzle
body with diesel fuel again, replace if necessary.
Clean the new injection nozzle also in clean diesel fu-
el.
Fig. 9
●
Assemble the pressure spring.
Fig. 7
● Check the seat areas of the intermediate piece for
signs of wear. Make sure that the centring pins are
present (Fig. 7).
Fig. 10
● Install the pressure bolt with the centring collar to-
wards the pressure spring (Fig. 10).
Fig. 11 Fig. 13
●
Insert the centring pins of the intermediate piece ●
Screw on the clamping nut.
into the bores of the nozzle holder (Fig. 11).
i Note
The chamfer points towards the pressure bolt.
Fig. 14
● Tighten the clamping nut.
i Note
Fig. 12
Use the injection valve holder 110 110 and a long
● Attach the centring bores of the injection nozzle to socket 8012.
the centring pins of the intermediate piece (Fig. 12).
Tightening torque: 30 to 40 Nm
i Note
The nozzle needle must not drop out of the nozzle
body.
Fig. 1 Fig. 1
● Dry nozzle and nozzle holder - blow dry with com- ●
Switch off the pressure gauge on the tester.
pressed air.
● Press the hand klever of the tester slowly down, to i Note
a point about 20 bar before the previously indicated The rattle test enables audible testing of the nozzle
opening pressure (Fig. 1). needle movement inside the nozzle body. In compar-
ison with used injection valves, new ones have a dif-
ferent rattling behaviour. It becomes worse as the
wear in the needle seat area progresses.
!Caution
A used injection valve must audibly rattle and
spray off well atomized fuel when operating the le-
ver quickly. The spray pattern may be noticeably
different from the one produced by a new injection
valve.
If an injection nozzle does not rattle despite of
cleaning, it nees to be replaced by a new one!
Fig. 2
i Note
The nozzle is leak tight, if no drop drips off within a pe-
riod of 10 seconds.
! Caution
If a drop drips off (Fig. 2), the injection valve must
be dismantled and the leak must be eliminated by
thorough cleaning. If this does not lead to a suc-
cess, replace the injection nozzle.
Rework is not permitted!
General ● Open the drain valve and drain off approx. 0.5 l of
The quality of the fuel filter and the compliance with fuel. The fuel above the filter element presses
the specified service intervals are decisive for the life- through the filter element and frees the underside
time of the fuel injection system. The heart of the fuel from dirt.
filter is made of hydrophobic special paper, which is ● Close the drain valve again.
spirally wound in form of a bag in order to offer the
largest possible filtering area under the prevailing spa- Perform
tial conditions and thus to achieve a high lifetime in
combination with a high dirt retaining capacity. A power drop or poor starting of the engine is mainly
caused by leaks in the fuel system. If you suspect a fil-
The fuel pre-filter / water separator mainly consists of:
ter problem, you should check whether bleeding
●
the dirt / water collecting bowl screw and drain valve are tightly closed and the filter
element is flush with the sight glass. Check the filter
● and the filter element
connections for leaks and the lines for clogging or po-
rous points.
Function
The fuel lift pump draws the fuel through this filter. Main fuel filter
Any water contained in the fuel deposits on the dirt
side of the filter paper and separates from the fuel in
form of large drops on the clean side of the filter (coa-
lescence effect).
Water is heavier than diesel fuel, it settles as a differ-
ent colour fluid on the bottom.
Once the water level reaches the height of the warn-
ing connections (sensor B124), the warning lamp
(H70) in the monitoring board (A15) will come on.
Danger
! Danger
!
Environment
Catch running out fuel and dispose of environ-
mentally.
Fig. 4
●
Close the shut-off cock (Fig. 4) again
Fig. 3
●
Slacken the drain plug (Fig. 3) for a few turns and
catch running out fuel / water.
● Tighten the drain plug again and check for leaks, if Fig. 5
necessary replace the seal ring.
● Unscrew the fuel filter cartridge (Fig. 5) using an ap-
propriate filter wrench.
● Clean the sealing face on the filter carrier from any
dirt.
Fig. 6 Fig. 8
● Unscrew the water separator from the filter car- ● Slacken the bleeding screw (Fig. 8) on the fuel pre-
tridge (Fig. 6). filter for 2 to 3 turns.
● Operate the hand pump manually, until fuel flows
out of the slackened bleeding screw (Fig. 8) without
air bubbles.
● Then tighten the bleeding screw while pumping.
Fig. 7
● Apply a thin coat of oil to the rubber seal of the water
separator 1 (Fig. 7).
● Screw the water separator on by hand (2), until the
seal contacts.
●
Tighten the water separator for another half turn (3).
●
Fill the filter cartridge with clean diesel fuel (4).
● Apply some oil to the rubber seal of the filter ele-
ment (5) and screw it on by hand, until the seal con-
tacts.
● Tighten the filter element for another half turn (6).
●
Open the shut-off cock (Fig. 4) again.
● Check the filter cartridge for leaks after a short test
run.
i Note
Air in the fuel system causes irregular running of the
engine, a drop in engine power, stalls the engine and
makes starting impossible.
Therefore bleed the fuel system after changing the
fuel pre-filter.
Fig. 1
● Insert the connecting piece 100 110 with seal ring
(Fig. 4).
Fig. 9
●
Loosen and unscrew the fuel filter cartridge (Fig. 9)
using an appropriate filter wrench.
●
Clean the sealing face on the filter carrier from any
dirt.
Fig. 2
●
Attach the claws (Fig. 2).
● Tighten the screw.
Fig. 10
● Slightly oil the rubber seal (Fig. 10) on the new filter
cartridge.
● Fill the filter cartridge with clean diesel fuel.
● Turn the new filter cartridge on by hand, until the
seal contacts.
● Tighten the filter element for another half turn.
● Check the filter cartridge for leaks after a short test
run.
Fig. 3
●
Screw on the adapter for connecting piece 100 110
(Fig. 3).
Caution
!
Fig. 4
● Connect the compression tester 8005 (Fig. 4).
●
Crank the engine with the starter.
i Note
Check the compression on each of the cylinders.
Compression: 30 - 38 bar
The measured compression depends on the starter
speed during the measuring process and the altitude
of the engine location. Limit values can therefore not
be specified exactly. It is recommended to use the Fig. 5
compression measurement to compare the cylinders
of an engine among each other. Should a deviation of Valve 1 (Fig. 5) white = not adjustable
more than 15% be measured, the affected cylinders Valve (2) black = adjustable
should be dismantled to examine the cause.
● Remove the compression tester 8005 and the con-
necting piece 100 110.
● Install the injection valves.
Fig. 6
Fig. 7 Fig. 9
Fig. 8 Fig. 10
●
Remove the valve cover (Fig. 8). ●
Slightly slacken the counter nut. Adjust setscrew 7
● Crankshaft position as per "valve adjustment sche- (Fig. 10) with a screwdriver, until the feeler gauge
matic". (6) can be inserted and pulled out with little resist-
ance after retightening the counter nut.
●
Perform tests and adjustments on all other adjusta-
ble valves.
● Check the gasket of the valve cover, replace it if
necessary.
● Reassemble the cylinder head cover.
●
Swivel the ventilation valve back to correct position
and fasten it.
● Fasten the air filter again and ensure correct fit of
combustion air hoses and clamps.
12.29Boost fuel solenoid valve for rising the engine torque during the acceleration
phase after starting. For this compensation and to as-
During the starting process the solenoid valve is sup- sure starting of the cold engine additional fuel needs
plied with 12 Volt. to be injected at the time of starting and accelerating.
This injection adaptation serves the purpose of com-
pensating for condensation and leakage losses and
Fig. 11
1 Boost fuel solenoid valve
Fig. 1
1 Engine shut-down solenoid
General
When switching the ignition on, the engine solenoid is
supplied with 12 Volt.
Interrupting this power supply shuts down the engine.
The engine shut-down can be triggered through the
ignition switch (S00), the emergency stop button
(S01) or the monitoring board in case of too low oil
pressure.
12.31Air filter gine speed and inclination) and thus enable long
lasting and low wear engine operation.
The air filter retains the dust contained in the intake air The air filter has the additional function of damping the
and keeps it away from the engine in order to avoid air intake noise. This damping is achieved by the de-
engine wear.
sign of the air filter in from of a reflection silencer
On paved roads the dust content in the air is 1 mg/m3 based on the principle of a Helmholz resonator, damp-
on average, on sealed roads or construction sites the ing the intake noise by its resonance frequency.
dust content can rise up to 40 mg/m3.
Dry air filters with integrated dust separator are char-
acterized by a good filtering effect (irrespective of en-
Fig. 2
Caution
!
Fig. 5
● Pull the main filter element (Fig. 5) with light turning
movements.
!Caution
If necessary, the main filter element may be
Fig. 3 cleaned up to five times. It must be renewed at the
Servicing of the dry air filter is necessary when the yel- latest after a maximum utilization period of two
low piston (Fig. 3) has reached the inscription "Serv- years.
ice" in front of a red background, but at the latest after The number of cleaning intervals of the main filter
2 years. element can be marked on the safety element with
After completion of the filter service reset the indicator a ball pen or a felt pen.
back to "Zero" by pressing the button. Cleaning does not make sense if the main filter el-
ement is covered with a sooty deposit. Use a new
Removing the main filter element filter cartridge.
●
Fully open the engine hood. Incorrectly handled inserts may be ineffective be-
cause of damage (e.g. cracks) and cause damage
to the engine.
Replace the safety cartridge if the main filter ele-
ment is defective!
Additional cleaning intervals between two filter
services signalized by the fault monitoring board
are not necessary.
Fig. 4
● Unclip three clamps on the housing cover and take
off the cover (Fig. 4).
!Caution
When assembling the inner part make sure that
the notch in the cover engages in the opening of
the inner part.
Caution
!
if the warning light comes on again after servicing
the main filter cartridge.
Do not continue to run the machine with a dam-
aged main filter element. If in doubt use a new ● Remove the housing cover and pull the main filter
main filter element. element off.
Fig. 8
●
Perforate the seal of the safety filter element from
Fig. 7 inside to outside using a suitable tool (Fig. 8) and
pull both latches up.
● Pull the internal part (Fig. 7) out and remove the
dust from the cover. ● Grip the safety element by both latches and pull it
out with slight turning movements.
● Reinsert the inner part.
●
Push in a new safety filter element.
● Reassemble main filter element and cover.
i Note
Pre-heating is triggered by switching on the ignition
(12 Volt on control unit A13, terminals 15(7) and S(2)).
With a coolant temperature of -30°C the preheating
time will be max. 52 seconds, with +5°C the minimum
time will be 38 seconds. During the preheating period
the control light in the monitoring board is permanently
on. In case of a fault the lamp will flash.
After-heating is triggered by the starting process (12
Volt on control unit A13, terminal 50(5)). With a cool-
ant temperature of -30°C the subsequent heating time
will be max. 180 seconds, with +25°C the minimum
time will be 35 seconds. This after-heating time is not
indicated by the control light.
! Caution
Multiple activation of the heater control in short
term operation (low generator running time) dis-
charges the starter battery.
If the engine does not start properly in case of au-
tomatic starting of the heating flange because the
starter does not get energized due to a fault and
does not crank the engine, the starting process
must be completely aborted (ignition key to OFF,
voltage supply to heating flange interrupted). In
order to avoid damage to heating flange or charge
air hoses caused by overheating, another start of
Fig. 3
1 Heating control unit (A13)
2 Heating relay (K14)
12.34Checking the heating flange perature sensor is pulled off (simulated sensor fail-
ure), a coolant temperature of 0° C is assumed.
control
● Start the heating process.
i Note
The relay must remain energized for another approx.
15 seconds, after the control light has gone out.
After the engine has started the after heating time
must continue for 35 to 180 seconds. This after-heat-
Fig. 1 Monitoring module, old design (A15)
ing time is not indicated by the control light.
i Note
During the preheating period the control light K (Fig.
1), c (Fig. 2) is permanently on. In case of a fault the
lamp will flash.
● The lamp flashes with a frequency of 1 Hz during
the pre-heating phase.
i Note
The heating flange only becomes active at a coolant
temperature below 25°C. When the plug of the tem-
Fig. 4
● Switch on the ignition.
● Turn the rotary switch (Fig. 4) to position "MAX".
Fig. 1 Monitoring module, old design Tank gauge, Pin 2: (0Ω ⇒tank fuel, 65Ω ⇒tank empty,
Output warning buzzer, Pin 1: +UB switching. 26Ω ⇒tank ½. If no level switch is connected or the ca-
ble is broken, the gauge will go out.
Output engine shut down, Pin 9: +UB switching.
Water separator, Pin 3 and 4: Resistance <500kΩ .
10 sec. 2 min.
a Control light, over- red, flashing X X Switch off vibration, run
heating of engine Low-active engine with idle speed or
shut down engine if nec-
essary, clean engine oil
cooler and radiator, if
necessary repair engine.
b Engine oil pressure red, flashing X X Check the engine oil lev-
control light Low-active el, if necessary repair the
engine.
c Control light for en- not used
gine air filter Low-active
d Charge control light yellow, lights Check V-belt, if neces-
High-active sary repair the generator
i Control light, water yellow, lights X X Check, clean the water
in diesel filter separator
k Control light, pre- yellow, lights
heating monitoring Low-active
j Coolant provision not used
Low-active
e Hydraulic oil filter yellow, lights X X Change the hydraulic oil
Low-active filter
Fig. 2 Monitoring module, new design Tank gauge, Pin 1: (0Ω ⇒tank fuel, 65Ω ⇒tank empty,
Output warning buzzer, Pin 23: +UB switching. 26Ω ⇒tank ½. If no level switch is connected or the ca-
ble is broken, the gauge will go out.
Output engine shut down, Pin 24: +UB switching.
Water separator, Pin 21 and 22: Resistance <500kΩ .
10 sec. 2 min.
g Control light, over- red, flashing X X Switch off vibration, run
heating of engine Low-active engine with idle speed or
shut down engine if nec-
essary, clean engine oil
cooler and radiator, if
necessary repair engine.
d Engine oil pressure red, flashing X X Check the engine oil lev-
control light Low-active el, if necessary repair the
engine.
h Control light for en- not used
gine air filter Low-active
f Charge control light yellow, lights Check V-belt, if neces-
High-active sary repair the generator
a Control light, water in yellow, lights X X Check, clean the water
diesel filter Low-active separator
b Control light, preheat- yellow, lights
ing monitoring Low-active
e Coolant provision not used
Low-active
i Hydraulic oil filter yellow, lights X X Change the hydraulic oil
Low-active filter
Engine overheating
12.37Engine
The engine Starter defective or pinion not engaging Have examined by a specialist
does not start
Fuel tank empty Fill and bleed the tank
Temperature below starting limit Use winter fuel and engine oil acc. to the
ambient temperature.
Fuel filter clogged, in winter due to paraf- Change the filter. use winter fuel
fin separation.
Battery discharged or not connected Tighten the pole clamps, check the cable
connections
The engine Battery power too low, battery clamps Have the battery checked, clean the ter-
starts poorly and loose or oxidized, causing the starter to minal clamps, tighten them and cover
works irregularly turn too slowly them with acid free grease
with poor power
Especially during winter: the use of too Use engine oil suitable for the ambient
viscous engine oil temperature
Fuel supply restricted, in winter fuel sys- Change the fuel filter. Check the line con-
tem clogged due to paraffin separation nections for leaks and tighten the fittings.
Use winter fuel in the cold season.
Excessive play in the throttle cable Adjust the throttle cable, change it if nec-
essary
Excessive ex- Engine oil level too high Drain the oil to the upper dipstick mark
haust smoke
Dry air filter dirty clean, replace if necessary
Poor compression due to burned or bro- Have compression rings and pistons ex-
ken compression rings or incorrect valve amined by a specialist, adjust the valve
clearance clearance
Engine over- Cooling fins on radiator extremely soiled Clean the cooling fins
heats, shut (the warning light "engine oil temperature"
down immedi- lights)
ately!
Injection valve defective Have examined by a specialist
Engine oil level too low Top up engine oil to the upper dipstick
mark
Poor engine Engine oil level too high Drain the engine oil down to the upper dip-
power stick mark
Engine oil pres- Engine oil level too low (control light "en- Top up oil
sure too low gine oil pressure" lights, the warning
buzzer sounds)
Leakages in the lubrication system Shut the engine down immediately, check
fittings on oil lines, lubrication oil filter and
oil cooler for leaks, if necessary tighten
the fittings.
The charge con- Generator speed too low Check the V-belt tension, replace the V-
trol light lights belt if necessary
during opera-
tion, the warning The generator does not charge the bat- Have examined by a specialis
buzzer sounds tery, because generator or regulator is de-
fective
35409 ©
Kompressionsdruckprüfer 8005
057 250 67
Compression tester
Compressiomètre
Compresímetro
35410 ©
Düsenprüfgerät 8008
Nozzle tester
35411 ©
057 250 78
35421 ©
Dispositif vireur
Dispositivo de viraje
35422 ©
Dispositif vireur
Dispositivo de viraje
35423 ©
35424 ©
35426 ©
35427 ©
35428 ©
35429 ©
35431 ©
35432 ©
35436 ©
35437 ©
35438 ©
35439 ©
35440 ©
35441 ©
35442 ©
35443 ©
35443 ©
35445 ©
35446 ©
35447 ©
057 250 99
079 947 18
35450 ©
35452 ©
1. gaseous (invisible)
2. vaporous
3. liquid
4. solid
Fig. 2
Heat always flows from the warmer to the colder mat-
ter. Any matter consists of a mass of moving mole-
cules. The rapidly moving molecules or a warmer
matter dissipate part of their energy to the slower
moving molecules with less heat. The movement of
the molecules in the warmer matter becomes slower
and the molecules in the cooler matter are accelerat-
ed. This process continued, until all molecules in the
two matters move with identical speed. The matters
have then reached an identical temperature and the
transfer of heat stops.
Fig. 1
If the water in a container is heated up (absorption of
heat), the rising steam is visible. If the steam is heated
up further, due to the absorption of heat, the visible
steam will turn into invisible gas. This process is re-
versible. When withdrawing the heat contained in gas-
eous water, the gas will turn into steam, then into
water and finally into ice.
Steam pressure:
Chemical formula:
In an incompletely filled, closed container, vaporous
CH2F-CF3 or CF3-CH2F refrigerant will volatilize from the surface in the same
quantity that will turn liquid in combination with steam
particles. This state of equilibrium occurs under pres-
Chemical designation: sure and is frequently referred to as steam pressure.
Tetrafluoroethane The steam pressure is independent from the temper-
ature.
Critical temperature:
Behaviour with metals:
100,6 °C
In pure condition refrigerant R134a is chemically sta-
ble and does not attack iron and aluminium. However,
contamination of the refrigerant, e.g. with chlorine
Critical pressure:
compounds, leads to aggressiveness against certain
40.56 bar (absolute) metals and plastics. This can cause clogging, leaks or
deposits on the pistons of the compressor.
Critical point:
Critical point (critical temperature and critical pres- Critical temperature / critical pressure:
sure) means that above this point there is no separat- Up to a gas pressure of 39.5 bar overpressure (this
ing interface between liquid and gas. Above its critical corresponds with a temperature of 101 °C) the refrig-
point any substance is gaseous. At temperatures be- erant R134a remains chemically stable, above this
low the critical point all refrigerant types in pressure temperature the refrigerant decomposes (see com-
containers have a liquid and a gaseous phase, i.e. a bustibility).
gas cushion is above the liquid. As long as gas is in
the container, besides the liquid, the pressure de-
pends on the ambient temperature. Water content:
In liquid refrigerant water can only be dissolved in very
low quantities. In contrast to this refrigerant steam
mixes with water steam at any ratio. If the dryer in the
liquid container has absorbed approx. 8 gr. of water, 13.3 Compressor oil / refrigeration
the refrigerant circuit transports possibly existing wa-
ter in form of droplets. This water flows to the nozzle oil
of the expansion valve and turns to ice. The air condi- The compressor oil lubricates the movable parts in the
tioning system stops cooling. Water destroys the air compressor, seals e.g. the gap between piston and
conditioning system, because under high pressures cylinder inside the compressor to prevent refrigerant
and temperatures and in connection with other con- loss and prevents other seals in the system from dry-
taminants it forms acids. ing up.
Part of the compressor oil dissolves in the refrigerant
Inflammability: until saturation is reached, so that a gas mixture of re-
frigerant, water steam, compressor oil and contrast
Refrigerant is not inflammable. On the contrary, it has agent circulates through the system.
fire inhibiting or fire extinguishing properties. Refriger-
ant is decomposed by flames or glowing surfaces. Ul- Compressor oil (the oil quantity should be 10 % of the
traviolet light also cracks refrigerant (caused by refrigerant weight) mixes with the refrigerant and cir-
electric welding). This results in toxic fission products, culates permanently through the system.
these must not be inhaled. However, irritation of the In connection with R134a- air conditioning systems
mucous membranes is an early and in-time warning. special synthetic compressor oils, e.g. polyalkylene
glycol (PAG) oils, are used. This is necessary, be-
cause e.g. mineral oil does not mix with R134a. Apart
Filling factor: from this, the materials in the R134a air conditioning
In a container there must be a steam space above the system may be attacked when the mixture is flowing
liquid space. The liquid expands with increasing tem- through the refrigerant circuit under high pressure and
perature. The steam filled space becomes smaller. at high temperatures or if the lubrication film in the
From a certain time on the container will be filled with compressor tears off. The use of non-permitted oils
just liquid. After this only a minor temperature in- can cause damage to the air conditioning system, you
crease is enough to generate very high pressures in should therefore only used the approved oils.
the container, because the liquid would like to expand,
but there is no more room. The related forces are high
enough to cause the container to burst. In order to Properties of compressor oil / refrigeration oil:
avoid overfilling of a container the pressure gas direc- The most important properties are high solvency in
tive clearly specifies how many kilograms of refriger- connection with refrigerants, good lubrication charac-
ant may be filled into the container per litre volume. teristics, that they are free of acids and their low water
Multiplied with the internal volume this "filling factor" content. For this purpose only certain oils can be
determines the permissible filling capacity For refrig- used. PAG-oils suitable for use with refrigerant R134a
erants used in motor vehicles it is 1.15 kg/l. are highly hygroscopic and will not mix with other oil.
As a protection against the invasion of moisture drums
must immediately be closed again after they had been
opened. Compressor oil ages under the effect of
Environmental aspects moisture and acids, becomes dark, viscous and ag-
The contribution of R134a to the greenhouse effect is gressive against metals.
by factor 10 smaller than the contribution of R12.
Since approx. 1992 the air conditioning systems for
newly produced construction equipment were succes-
sively converted to refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant
does not contain any chlorine and is thus harmless for
the ozone layer. Until approx. 1992 air conditioning
systems were filled with refrigerant R12. Due to its
chlorine atoms this CFC has a high ozone decompo-
sition potential and also a potential to amplify the
greenhouse effect. Conversion programs for existing
old systems with the ozone damaging R12 are in ef-
fect. For reasons of protecting the environment refrig-
erant must not be discharged into the atmosphere.
Compressor
Compressor data
Displacement: 155 cm²
Weight: 6,9 kg
max. rpm: 6000
Sense of rotation: cw
Refrigerant: R134a
Oil quantity (scope of delivery): 207 gr
Oil: PAG SP-20 (H14-003-404)
! Caution
The compressor oil level must be checked after
replacing a system component or if a leak in the
system is suspected. Use only refrigeration oil
PAG SP-20 (H14-003-404).
When replacing a heat exchanger, e.g. evaporator
or condenser, any compressor oil / refrigeration
oil lost by exchanging the components, must be
replaced with fresh oil.
The actual quantity depends on the amount of oil
that may have been lost in connection with the
possible replacement of other components.
Environment
Used compressor oil / refrigeration oil must be
disposed of as hazardous waste.
The following table shows how much compressor oil /
refrigeration oil will be lost in connection with various
types of work on the air conditioning system.
! Caution
Please bear in mind, that the new compressor is
delivered with a filling of 207 gr. compressor oil. Fig. 1
To avoid excessive oil in the A/C-system and thus The condenser is located in front of the the radiator for
a poor cooling effect, the oil level in the A/C-sys- the machine. It emits heat energy from the system into
tem must be adjusted accordingly. the surrounding air and liquefies the gaseous refriger-
The quantity depends on the amount of oil that ant.
may have been lost in connection with the possi-
ble replacement of other components.
i Note
The compressor oil quantity must be 10% of the The fins must be free of dirt and damage.
refrigerant quantity in the complete system.
With a refrigerant filling of 1100 gr. the system re- ! Caution
quires a compressor oil / refrigerant oil filling of
100 gr. When replacing a heat exchanger, e.g. evaporator
or condenser, any compressor oil lost by ex-
Procedure: changing the components, must be replaced with
Drain and measure the compressor oil from the fresh oil.
old compressor.
Drain the compressor oil from the new compres-
sor and only fill in the exact quantity that had been
drained out of the old compressor. The compres-
sor oil from the new compressor can be used for
this purpose.
i Note
Topping up compressor oil / refrigeration oil is possi-
ble on a pressureless compressor directly into the oil
pan, in a pressureless refrigeration system directly
into the pressure side, but it is also possible to draw it
into the pressure side of the refrigeration system dur-
ing the evacuation process.
Fig. 2
! Danger
i Note
In case of dirt in the refrigerant system you should also
check or clean the screen at the expansion valve in-
let.+
Fig. 1 Fig. 1
The evaporator is mounted inside the HKL-module in The feeler of a defroster thermostat to switch off the
the cabin. It consists of a heat exchanger (inside air - magnetic clutch in case of icing up or to switch the
refrigerant), with refrigerant flowing to a pipe system clutch back on after defrosting, is mounted on the
with cooling flanges. evaporator. The correct adjustment of the defroster
thermostat as well as the correct feeler assembly
As with the condenser, correct operation of all fans
should be checked during maintenance.
and cleanliness of the fins must be assured.
Switching point on: + 1°C (± 1°C)
Air conditioning systems have a circulation air filter
mounted in the air flow in front of the evaporator, Switching point off: + 5,5°C (± 1°C)
which should be cleaned or changed by the operator
after each third trip, depending on the amount of dirt. i Note
A condensation water filter is mounted in the air flow It is very important that the feeler is mounted down-
after the evaporator. This filter has the function to col- stream of the evaporator, but before the pressure sen-
lect the water that has condensed from the air in the sor, in countercurrent direction, with full length and
evaporator block and to discharge this water into the insulated against the outside temperature.
water pan With a defective condensation water filter
condensation water may flow into the inside of the ve-
hicle.
! Caution
When replacing a heat exchanger, e.g. evaporator
or condenser, any compressor oil lost by ex-
changing the components, must be replaced with
fresh oil.
!Caution
The compressor oil level must be checked after
replacing a system component or if a leak in the
system is suspected. Use only compressor oil / re-
frigeration oil PAG SP-20 (H14-003-404).
● Run the compressor for 10 minutes at engine idle
speed.
● In order to avoid any compressor oil losses you
should slowly drain all refrigerant from the air condi- Fig. 2
tioning system. ● Turn the nut that hold the armature clockwise with a
socket wrench, until the counterweight is correctly
positioned.
i Note
2 o'clock position with inclination to the right (Fig. 2).
10 o'clock position with inclination to the left
● Insert the oil dipstick.
● Pull out the dipstick and count the notches covered
by oil.
● Drain off oil or fill up as specified in the table.
Environment
Used compressor oil / refrigeration oil must be
disposed of as hazardous waste.
Fig. 1
Fastening angle (de- Oil dipstick in incre-
● Measure the fastening angle (Fig. 1) of the com- gree) ments
pressor (oil plug at top) 0 5-7
●
Remove the oil filler plug. 10 6-8
20 7-9
30 8-10
40 9-11
50 10-12
60 11-13
90 16-18
●
Screw the oil filler plug back in.
! Caution
The contact area must be clean and should be free
of damage.
Use a new O-ring.
Tightening torque 15 to 25 Nm
● Refill the air conditioning system.
Fig. 1
i Note
at 12 Volt vehicle voltage approx. 3.5 Amp.
at 24 Volt vehicle voltage approx. 1.75 Amp.
Overcurrent indicates a short circuit inside the mag-
netic coil.
No current indicates an interrupted electric circuit.
Fig. 5
●
Slightly slacken fastening screws 1, 2 and 3 (Fig.
5).
1 Optional equipment
Danger
!
Danger of accident!
Do not clean with a hot water jet. Heat will cause
extreme overpressure, which could cause dam-
age or explosion of the system.
Use access steps and grips to mount and dis-
mount the machine.
Fig. 6
● Unscrew the condenser fastening screws (Fig. 6)
and fold the condenser forward.
●
Clean the condenser fins on front and back with
compressed air or cold water .
1 Optional equipment
Fig. 7 Fig. 9
● Switch the air conditioning (Fig. 7) on. ● Check whether the white float (Fig. 9) inside the in-
spection glass of the drier/collector unit floats right
at the top.
i Note
The refrigerant level is correct.
Fig. 8
● Choose a cooling temperature with the rotary switch
for cabin heater (Fig. 8) in the blue section.
●
Open the air outlet nozzles.
●
Check, whether the outflowing air is noticeably cool-
er. Fig. 10
●
If the white float (Fig. 10) inside the inspection glass
of the drier/collector unit floats at the bottom, inform
i Note
the service department.
The adjusted temperature must be below the actual
temperature inside the cabin, so that the compressor
will be switched on. i Note
● Open the hood. The refrigerant level is not correct.
● Refrigerant must be filled up, if necessary check the
air conditioning system for leaks.
Fig. 12
● Check the drier/collector unit (Fig. 12) for mechani-
cal damage or rust.
Fig. 11
● Check the moisture indication pearl (Fig. 11) inside
the inspection glass of the drier/collector unit.
orange = drying agent o.k.
colorless = moisture level of drying agent too high.
● Inform the service department. Replace drier/col-
lector unit, check air conditioning system.
Caution
!
!Caution
According to the regulation for pressure reser-
voirs all pressure reservoirs must be repeatedly
inspected by a specialist. In this sense repeated
inspections are external examinations, normally
on pressure reservoirs in operation. In connection
with this inspection the drier/collector unit must
be visually examined twice every year. During
these inspections special attention must be paid
to corrosion and mechanical damage. If the reser-
voir is not in proper condition it must be replaced
for safety reasons, as a precaution to protect op-
erators and third parties against any danger aris-
ing from the handling and operation of pressure
reservoirs.
! Danger
Danger of injury!
In case of mechanical damage or corrosion on
this drier/collector unit this unit must be replaced,
to avoid bursting and further damage.
! Caution
The use of leak detection colouring matter is not
permitted, because its chemical composition is
unknown and its effect on compressor oil and rub-
ber elements is not predictable. The use of leak
detection colouring matter makes any warranty
claims null and void.
Before starting the evacuation process, the refrigerant
circuit is filled with nitrogen through a pressure reduc-
er valve (approx. 22 bar). After this all connections in
the air conditioning system are checked with the help
of a suitable leak detection spray. A leak is thereby in-
dicated by means of foam bubbles.
A leak test is required if a pressure drop is noticed.
The leak test must be repeated after filling the air con-
ditioning system with refrigerant.
13.15Filling instructions
! Caution
Liquid refrigerant in the suction side of the com-
pressor should generally be avoided during filling
and operation of the refrigeration system, since
this could damage the compressor..
When filling the air conditioning system directly from
the refrigerant bottle care must be taken not to overfill
the system. As an additional control and for statistical
purposes, e.g. for refilling, it is important to write down
the weight of the filled in refrigerant.
With correct operation of the air conditioning the re-
frigerant container should be about 1/3 filled with liq-
uid refrigerant, the evaporator should be maximally
filled at the calculated evaporation temperature, i.e.
the suction line should only be a few degrees warmer
than the evaporation temperature indicated by the
pressure gauge.
i Note
White frost on the suction line is no measure for as-
sessing the filling.
19 Pressure reducing valve 16 Switch off the vacuum pump, watch the pressure
20 Vacuum pump gauges to see whether the vacuum is maintained.
21 Nitrogen bottle 17 Open the valve on the refrigerant bottle and open
the black and red hand wheels on the pressure
22 Refrigerant bottle
gauge bar. Fill refrigerant into the system, until a
23 Pressure gauge bar pressure equilibrium between suction and pres-
sure side is reached (reading of pressure gaug-
Filling instructions es).
1 Connect the service adapter with the blue hand 18 Close the red hand wheel.
wheel in the suction side. 19 Perform a leak test with the electronic leak detec-
2 Connect the service adapter with the red hand tor.
wheel in the pressure side (the hand wheels on 20 Start the engine and switch on the system.
the service adapters must be fully backed out - left 21 Open the blue hand wheel and continue filling in
hand stop) refrigerant until the inspection glass is free or air
3 Connect the blue suction hose below the blue bubbles (in fluid container/dryer combinations the
hand wheel on the pressure gauge bar to the blue white pearl should float in the upper third of the in-
service adapter. spection glass). Then close the refrigerant bottle.
4 Connect the red pressure hose below the red 22 Close the blue hand wheel on the pressure gauge
hand wheel on the pressure gauge bar to the red bar.
service adapter. 23 Preparing the test run: -Close windows and doors
5 Connect the yellow hose below the yellow hand -Fan on full speed stage -Mount measuring feel-
wheel on the manometer bar to the 2-stage vacu- ers to air discharge and air intake.
um pump. 24 Run the system for approx. 20 minutes with medi-
6 Connect the last hose below the black hand wheel um engine speed.
on the nitrogen bottle via the pressure reducing 25 The temperature difference between air discharge
valve. and air intake should be (depending on type of air
7 Check on the pressure gauge bar that all hand condition) 8-10°C. The ambient temperature
wheels are closed. thereby is approx. 20°C. (These data are only ref-
8 Turn the hand wheels on both service adapter erence values, which may be influenced by possi-
clockwise. This opens the valves (right hand ble insolation)
stop). 26 Switch off system and engine and check for leaks
9 Open the valve on the nitrogen bottle (only via again.
pressure reducer); pressure approx. 20 bar. 27 Turn out (left hand stop) and remove the hand
10 Open the black and red hand wheels on the pres- wheels on both service adapters.
sure gauge bar and fill nitrogen into the system, 28 Fit all valves with dust caps.
until a pressure of approx. 3.5 to 5.0 bar is indicat- 29 Perform a leak test.
ed on the suction side.
30 Mark the system with the corresponding type
11 Then open the blue hand wheel and raise the plates and information decals, such as type of oil
pressure in the suction side (max. 10 bar). Check and refrigerant.
for leaks with a leak detection fluid or soapsuds.
12 If the system is leak tight, release the nitrogen
from the system. For this purpose disconnect the
hose from the nitrogen bottle and open the red,
blue and black hand wheels on the pressure
gauge bar.
13 Then connect the hose to the refrigerant bottle.
14 Switch on the vacuum pump and open all hand
wheels on the pressure gauge bar. In case of a
leak no or only an insufficient vacuum will be
reached. In this case proceed as described under
point 9-12. Once the leak is sealed continue with
point 14.
15 Once a sufficient vacuum is reached, both pres-
sure gauges show -1, close all hand wheels on the
pressure gauge bar.
Basic principles
Requirements
For trouble shooting two requirements must be ful-
filled:
● Expert knowledge
● technical equipment
Technical equipment
The most important aids for trouble shooting are pres-
sure gauges and thermometer. The refrigerant condi-
tions, like overheating and excessive cooling provide
important Information when searching for faults. Even
your own senses are important aids for trouble shoot-
ing. Bubbles in the sight glass, dirt and white frost can
be visibly perceived. If the compressor draws in wet
steam, this can be noticed by the suction line and it
may also be audibly detectable. An overloaded com- Fig. 2 Pressure gauge
pressor can even be smelled.
Example:
The following tools and auxiliary materials should be
A totally empty air conditioning system holds an at-
available for trouble shooting:
mospheric pressure of approx. Pamp = 1 bar.
●
Service station
Filling the system with refrigerant causes an excess
●
Pressure gauge pressure of Pe = 3 bar.
●
Thermometer
Pabs = Pamb + Pe = 1 bar + 3 bar = 4 bar
●
dry nitrogen
Evacuating the system down to Pe = -0.6 bar, creates
●
Refrigerant bottle for new refrigerant
a "vacuum" (negative excess pressure).
●
Container for old oil
●
Vacuum pump Pabs = Pamb + Pe = 1 bar +(- 0,6) bar = 0,4 bar
●
Hoses
● Scales
● Suction station
● Leak detector
The measuring equipment must be checked at regular
intervals. Calibration can only be made by an ap-
proved testing authority.
Pressure gauge
Most pressure gauges used in practice are (for cost
reasons) excess pressure gauges. These pressure
gauges measure the excess pressure in relation to the
ambient pressure (air pressure). In order to achieve
the absolute (actual) pressure the ambient pressure
must be added to the pressure gauge reading. The
absolute pressure is needed for the calculation and
determination of material data.
Pabs = Pamb + Pe
Pabs = absolute pressure
Pamb = atmospheric air pressure (ambient pressure)
Pe = excess pressure (pressure gauge reading)
Pressure gauge with saturation temperature scale If the suction condition of the compressor is directly on
the dew line, an e.g. incorrect evaporator load can
cause "wet suction". This can lead to two processes,
which are destructive for the compressor. The liquid
refrigerant washes off the lubricating film between pis-
ton and cylinder wall, and insufficient lubrication will
cause extreme wear. Liquid refrigerant remaining in
the cylinder causes a direct energy transfer from pis-
ton to cylinder cover during compression. The valve
plate may then be damaged by so-called fluid strokes.
Apart from protecting the compressor against fluid,
overheating has further advantages. Since the fluid
proportions in the drawn in steam reduces the flow
rate of the compressor, it may be increased by a over-
heating. Overheating also improves the oil recircula-
tion.
Thermometer
It is the function of the expansion valve to reduce the
Normally digital thermometers with surface or contact refrigerant to a lower pressure level (evaporation
feelers are used. Especially for high temperature dif- pressure) after it has been liquefied. For an optimal
ferences excellent heat insulation of the measuring lo- function of the valve pure fluid must be applied to its
cation is of utmost importance. The sparing use of a inlet port.
heat conducting paste is highly recommended. If the
The refrigerant must "squeeze" (literally speaking)
measuring location is soiled, it needs to be cleaned
through a throttle gap inside the expansion valve.
and probably treated with a fine emery cloth. Only the
When comparing a certain mass of refrigerant in fluid
temperature of the feeler is measured. Due to missing
and in vaporous state (with constant pressure), the
heat insulation and insulating oxide layers on the line,
vaporous refrigerant requires a much higher volume.
temperature differences of a few degrees Kelvin be-
That's why the vaporous refrigerant needs a much
tween the measured and the actual values may arise.
longer time to "squeeze" through the throttle gap.
Vaporous refrigerant in front of the expansion valve
Overheating
reduces the flow rate and results in an undersupply of
the evaporator with refrigerant. Evaporation pressure
and evaporator power will drop.
Due to its design a refrigerant compressor can only
deliver gaseous or vaporous substances. Fluids are If the refrigeration system is operated with the "expan-
not compressible and must therefore not enter into the sion valve inlet" condition directly on the boiling curve,
compression chamber of the compressor. slightest fluctuations in operating condition may cause
Δ tc2u = tc - tc2u
Δ tc2u, supercooling at evaporator outlet in K
tc2u, temperature at evaporator outlet in °C
tc, evaporation temperature in °C
„u“ represents "supercooled"
13.18Trouble shooting procedure ● Evaporator and heating (with highest fresh air fan
speed) do not draw leak air.
● The fresh air fan runs when the engine is running
Procedure
and the air conditioning system is set to max. cool-
Knowledge ing power.
Trouble shooting is not possible with exact knowledge
● Ambient temperature above 15 °C.
about the system design, the installed components ● The thermostat is correctly installed and the switch-
and their function in the system trouble shooting is not ing temperatures are correct.
possible:
Visual inspection
With the appropriate experience some faults can be
visually detected or felt. Frequently occurring con-
denser soiling or formation of steam bubbles in the in-
spection glass can be quickly detected.
In case of unusual formation of hoarfrost on the evap-
orator the hoarfrost pattern provides useful informa-
tion. Hoarfrost only occurring at the inlet side is a clear
indication of insufficient refrigerant feed, which in turn
indicates an incorrectly working expansion valve or a
lack of refrigerant.. Complete hoarfrost covering indi-
cates load problems, i.e. no or insufficient air flow.
Even overheating can sometimes be detected with the
naked eye. At the end of the evaporator there should
be an area which is dry or at least drier at evaporator
temperatures above -2 °C.
The fluid line in the refrigeration system is warm. If a
local cooling can be felt or if condensation develops,
this is a clear indicator for an extreme pressure drop
in the line. Similar phenomena can be noticed in case
of blocked filters.
Unusually cold pressure lines indicate "wet" intake of
the compressor.
The oil level in the compressor sight glass provides in-
formation about the oil quantity and the oil recircula-
tion in the system. However, the oil level may also be
considerably influenced by condensing refrigerant.
Discoloration informs about the state of the oil.
Water in the system can simply be detected through
the inspection glass with moisture indicator.
i Note
The dangerous part of common rules is that they ap-
ply in most, but not in all cases. The refrigerant states
in the individual piping sections or components must
therefore be exactly determined by means of pressure
and temperature measurements.
Test prerequisites
● Cooler and condenser are clean, clean if neces-
sary.
● The ribbed belt for compressor and generator is
correctly tightened.
● All air ducts, covers and seals are OK and correctly
fitted. Flaps reach their end positions.
● The engine has operating temperature.
Fig. 2 Flow diagram with measuring points to assess the filling quantity. In systems with fluid con-
● C, condenser measuring points tainer the inspection glass is most suitable to check
● E, expansion valve measuring points the minimum filling quantity. Supercooling is in this
case the between indicator for overfilling.
● O, evaporator measuring points
The hot gas temperature can be used to check wheth-
● V, compressor measuring points
er the compressor runs in the permissible operating
The flow diagram contains "Minimum Requirements" range.
which must be fulfilled to be able to check the system
or perform trouble shooting. Example: Measurement of overheating
Temperature and pressure at the evaporator outlet
● a) Which measuring equipment is required ?
can be used to derive the overheating of the evapora- ● b) Where to measure with which size ?
tor. Overheating is a clear indicator for the evaporator ● c) A pressure gauge connected to the evaporator
filling level. In case of excessive overheating the re- indicates "Peo2 = 1.7 bar". How high is the evapora-
frigerant quantity fed into the evaporator is too low, in tor pressure "Po" ?
case of insufficient overheating it is too high. In indi-
vidual cases one must then check if this situation is ●
d) How high is the evaporator temperature "to" ?
caused by the expansion element or by insufficient fill- ● e) A thermal sensor attached to the evaporator out-
ing. A differentiation is only possible if there is a clear let measures the temperature "to2h = +3 °C". How
indicator for the refrigerant filling quantity. high is the overheating „Δto2h“ ?
Pressure and temperature at the condenser outlet can ●
f) Evaluation of the measured overheating.
be used to derive the supercooling. This can be used
Solution:
●
a) Pressure gauge, thermometer, steam table
●
b) Condensing pressure "Pec2" and temperature
"tc2u" are measured at the same point on the con-
denser.
● c) Pc = Pec2 + Pamb, "Evaporation pressure =
pressure on evaporator + atmospheric pressure" =
15 bar + 1 bar = 16 bar.
● d) "Pcc = 16 bar can then be used to derive an con-
densing temperature "tc" of 57.9 °C from the steam
table for R134a.
● e) Δtc2u = tc - tc2u, "Supercooling at condenser out-
let = condensing temperature - condenser outlet
temperature" = 57.9°C - 58 °C) = -0.1 Kelvin.
● f) The determined overheating is within the usual
range of approx. "0" Zero Kelvin.
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Other faults
Noise in system
Monitoring devices
Fig. 1
1 Glass panes
2 Fastening element
3 Fixing washer and spacer
4 Washer
5 Hexagon nut, self locking
6 Protective cap
Fig. 1
2. Suction lifter
commercial
Fig. 2
Commercial
Fig. 1
4. Window glass bonding agent
Fig. 2
5. Activator
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
! Danger
Danger of cutting
Wear safety gloves.
1. Pull large glass rests off the bonding strip (Fig. 1).
Fig. 1
2. Clean the sealing surfaces from any adhesive
material (Fig. 2).
3. Use a cutter to remove adhesive residues with
glass rests.
4. Cover places without adhesive residues with an
activator.
Fig. 2
5. Insert the fastening element with washer into the
bore in the glass pane (Fig. 3).
Fig. 3
i Note
Do not overtighten the thread.
Fig. 4
7. Lay an approx. 1 cm high triangular bead of glass
pane bonding agent on the inside of the pane, ap-
prox. 1.5 cm away from the edge (Fig. 5).
i Note
Apply window pane bonding agent only to the
sides (sealing areas) which have contact with the
cabin.
Fig. 5
8. Attach the suction lifter to the outside of the pane
(Fig. 6).
9. Install the window pane so that the fastening ele-
ments fit into the bores of the fastening bars.
10. Press the glass pane against the sealing surface.
Fig. 6
11. Assemble the washer and the self-locking hexa-
gon nut.
12. Fasten the window pane to the fastening bar us-
ing a locking handle and a ring spanner (Fig. 7).
i Note
Only use the locking handle to counter.
13. Press the protective cap onto the hexagon nut.
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
15. Clean the joining edges on the window pane (Fig.
9).
i Note
The joint flanks must be solid, dry and free of dirt,
dust, grease, oil and other foreign substances.
16. Mask the upper and lower contact areas to the
cabin.
Fig. 9
17. Apply silicone sealant evenly and under pressure
first to the inside joint edge (Fig. 10).
Fig. 10
18. Then apply silicone sealant evenly and under
pressure to the outside joint edge (Fig. 11).
Fig. 11
Fig. 12
20. Treat the inside joint (Fig. 13)
Fig. 13
21. and the outside joint (Fig. 14) with a scraper or a
spattle.
i Note
Once the silicone sealing agent has cured it can
only be removed mechanically.
Fig. 14
Fig. 1
2. Assembly device for side plate
Fig. 2
3. Assembly device for coupling hub and flanged
hub
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
5. Pressing plate for travel bearing
Fig. 5
6. Pressing bushing for radial seal
Fig. 6
7. Lifting device for exciter unit
Fig. 7
i Note
After disassembling the side plate (vibration mo-
tor side) the drum can be lifted sideways out of
the frame (Fig. 1).
Fig. 1
i Note
However, the drum can also be removed without
having to disassemble the side plate, if it is lifted
up and out of the frame (Fig. 2).
Fig. 2
Removing the drum
i Note
The following section describes the procedure for
lifting the frame sideways out of the drum.
Environment
Environmental damage
Catch running out hydraulic oil and dispose
of environmentally.
1. Mark the hydraulic hoses (Fig. 3)on the travel mo-
tor and disconnect them from the ports.
2. Close all hydraulic hoses and motor ports with
suitable plugs.
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
5. Unscrew screws 1 (Fig. 5) from holding plate (2)
for hydraulic hoses from both sides.
Fig. 5
6. Unscrew screws (Fig. 6) from the spacer piece on
vibration and travel motors.
Fig. 6
7. Fasten the lifting gear to the side plate on the vi-
bration side.
8. Support the front cross-member safely with suita-
ble trestles or wooden blocks (Fig. 7).
9. Unscrew plugs (1) and screws (2).
Fig. 7
! Danger
Fig. 8
13. Fasten the lifting tackle to the drum and lift the
drum carefully sideways out of the front frame
(Fig. 9).
! Danger
Fig. 9
14. Check all rubber buffers (Fig. 10), replace if nec-
essary (see corresponding chapter).
Fig. 10
15. Check rectangular rubber buffers (Fig. 11), re-
place if necessary.
Fig. 11
Fig. 12
2. Attach the side plate, insert screws 2 (Fig. 13) into
the rear cross-member, slide on washers, turn on
and tighten the nuts.
i Note
Apply sliding lacquer OKS 240 to threads and
screw head contact face to ease assembly.
3. Close the screw holes with plugs (1).
Fig. 13
4. Attach the side plate, insert screws 2 (Fig. 14) into
the rear cross-member, slide on washers, turn on
and tighten the nuts.
i Note
Apply sliding lacquer OKS 240 to threads and
screw head contact face to ease assembly.
5. Close the screw holes with plugs (1).
Fig. 14
6. Fasten the spacer pieces with screws (Fig. 15)
and nuts to the side plate.
Fig. 15
Nominal value:
Distance "X" + 2 mm
9. Turn one screw (3) into the welded nut (2) at top
and bottom and open a sufficient gap to insert the
compensation plates.
Fig. 16
10. Insert the compensation plates (Fig. 17). Insert
screws (1), slide on washers (3), turn on and
tighten nuts (2).
11. Unscrew the screws from the welded nuts.
Fig. 17
12. Connect hydraulic hoses to the connections on
travel motor and vibration motor according to the
marking.
Fig. 18
13. Fasten holding plate 2 (Fig. 19) for hydraulic hos-
es with screws (1).
! Caution
After connecting the hydraulic components
and before starting operation bleed the hy-
draulic system, check the function and in-
spect the system for leaks.
Fig. 19
Fig. 1
4. Unscrew the nuts, pull out the screws and re-
move the support legs (Fig. 4).
Fig. 2
5. Attach the lifting tackle to the travel motor (Fig. 3).
!Danger
Danger of squashing!
Do not stand or step under suspended loads.
Fig. 3
! Caution
Flush the hydraulic system if dirt or chips are
found in the travel motor.
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
2. Mount bracket 1 (Fig. 8) for the lifting device to
the flange.
3. Unscrew screws (2) from the flange.
i Note
Do not unscrew the thin drawn screws.
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
! Danger
Danger of squashing!
Do not stand or step under suspended loads.
6. Pull the exciter unit out of the drum (Fig. 8).
7. Take the coupling element off the coupling half.
Fig. 8
Fig. 9
Fig. 10
Environment
Environmental damage!
Catch running out oil and dispose of environ-
mentally.
6. Lift the flange off the flanged housing (Fig. 11).
7. Take the O-ring out of the groove in the flanged
housing.
Fig. 11
8. Unclip the circlip from the groove in the flange
(Fig. 12).
Fig. 12
9. Press the cylinder roller bearing with forcing
screws out of the flange (Fig. 13).
Fig. 13
10. Take the exciter unit (Fig. 14) out of the flanged
housing.
Fig. 14
11. Knock the radial seal (Fig. 15) out of the flanged
housing.
Fig. 15
12. Unclip the circlip from the groove in the flanged
housing (Fig. 16).
Fig. 16
13. Press the cylinder roller bearing with forcing
screws out of the flanged housing (Fig. 17).
Fig. 17
! Danger
Danger of burning!
Wear safety gloves.
i Note
If the rings are very tight, heat them up with a
torch.
Fig. 18
15. Unclip the circlip from the basic weight (Fig. 19).
Fig. 19
16. To change shaft 1 (Fig. 20) knock out dowel pins
(2 and 3) and press the shaft out of the basic
weight.
i Note
If necessary disassemble, assemble the change-
over weight (see corresponding chapter).
Fig. 20
i Note
Remove both rectangular rubber buffers.
Fig. 21
3. Unscrew fastening screws 1 (Fig. 22).
4. Force cover (2) together with the attached vibra-
tion motor off the side plate with forcing screws.
Fig. 22
5. To change the vibration motor loosen clamping
screw 1 (Fig. 23) and pull off coupling half (2).
Fig. 23
Fig. 24
8. Remove the coupling element (Fig. 25).
Fig. 25
9. Fasten the lifting device.
10. Unscrew fastening screws 1 (Fig. 26).
! Caution
The four short fastening screws (2) must re-
main screwed in (the two others are not visi-
ble).
Fig. 26
11. Press the exciter unit out of the drum with forcing
screws (Fig. 27).
i Note
The second forcing screw is covered by the side
plate.
Fig. 27
! Caution
Danger of squashing!
Do not stand or step under suspended loads.
12. Pull the exciter unit out of the drum (Fig. 28).
Fig. 28
Fig. 29
3. Attach the disassembly device to the side plate
(Fig. 30) and force off the side plate.
Fig. 30
4. Lift the side plate of the flanged hub (Fig. 31).
Fig. 31
Fig. 32
6. Unclip the circlip from the side plate (Fig. 33).
Fig. 33
7. Take the mechanical seal off the flanged hub
(Fig. 34).
Fig. 34
Fig. 35
3. Loosen hose clamp 1 (Fig. 36).
4. Pull coupling hub (2) off the shaft.
Fig. 36
5. Unscrew all other fastening screws 1 (Fig. 37)
and press the flanged hub off the flanged housing
with forcing screws (2).
6. Take off the flanged hub.
7. Take the O-ring out of the groove in the flanged
housing.
Fig. 37
Fig. 38
9. Knock the cylinder roller bearing out of the flang-
ed hub (Fig. 39).
Fig. 39
Environment
Environmental damage!
Catch running out oil and dispose of environ-
mentally.
10. Lift the exciter unit out of the flanged housing (Fig.
40).
Fig. 40
11. Knock the radial seal (Fig. 41) out of the flanged
housing.
Fig. 41
Fig. 42
13. Press the cylinder roller bearing with forcing
screws out of the flanged housing (Fig. 43).
Fig. 43
14. Extract inner rings 1 (Fig. 44) for the radial seals
and inner bearing races (2) from the shaft.
!Danger
Danger of burning!
Wear protective gloves.
i Note
If the rings are very tight, heat them up with a
torch.
Fig. 44
15. Unclip the circlip from the basic weight and re-
move the cover (Fig. 45).
i Note
The shafts cannot be pressed out. If damaged
they must be replaced with basic weight and cov-
er.
If necessary disassemble, assemble the change-
over weight (see corresponding chapter).
Fig. 45
i Note
If the shafts are damaged they must be inserted
into the basic weight or the cover as follows.
! Danger
When working with liquid nitrogen protect
your face and wear gloves.
Do not place any unintended parts into liquid
Fig. 46 nitrogen.
Observe the safety instructions for the han-
dling of liquid nitrogen.
! Caution
Close the bores on the short shaft with a
screw.
1. Cool the shaft down in liquid nitrogen.
2. Slide the cooled down shaft with the bores
aligned into the basic weight until it bottoms (Fig.
46).
3. Secure shaft 1 (Fig. 47) with dowel pins (2 and 3).
! Caution
Assemble the dowel pins with the grooves
offset by 180° to each other, but in line with
the axis of the shaft.
i Note
Unscrew the screw from the shaft.
Fig. 47
! Caution
Close the bores on the short shaft with a
screw.
4. Cool the shaft down in liquid nitrogen.
5. Slide the cooled down shaft with the bores
aligned into the basic weight until it bottoms (Fig.
48).
Fig. 48
! Caution
Assemble the dowel pins with the grooves
offset by 180° to each other, but in line with
the axis of the shaft.
i Note
Unscrew the screw from the shaft.
Fig. 49
7. Insert the fitting key into the keyway in the respec-
tive shaft (Fig. 50).
Fig. 50
8. Insert the circlip into the groove in the basic
weight and on the cover (Fig. 51).
Fig. 51
! Danger
Danger of burning!
Wear safety gloves.
9. Heat the inner bearing race up to approx. 100° C
and press it onto the basic weight against the
shoulder with the larger outer diameter forward
(Fig. 52).
Fig. 52
Danger of burning!
Wear safety gloves.
10. Heat the inner ring up to approx. 50° C and slide
it onto the short shaft against the shoulder with
the wider chamfer facing towards the outside
(Fig. 53).
Fig. 53
!Danger
Danger of burning!
Wear safety gloves.
11. Heat the inner bearing race up to approx. 100° C
and press it onto the cover against the shoulder
with the larger outer diameter forward (Fig. 54).
Fig. 54
!Danger
Danger of burning!
Wear safety gloves.
12. Heat the inner ring up to approx. 50° C and slide
it onto the longer shaft against the shoulder with
the wider chamfer facing towards the outside
(Fig. 55).
Fig. 55
13. Press cylinder roller bearing 1 (Fig. 56) with
pressing plate (2) into the flanged housing until it
bottoms.
Fig. 56
Fig. 57
15. Fit the new radial seal with some grease into the
groove in the flanged housing (Fig. 58).
16. Fill approx. 1.2 l oil SAE-15W/40 into the flanged
housing.
Fig. 58
!Caution
Danger of squashing!
Do not stand or step under suspended loads.
17. Insert the exciter unit with the longer shaft for-
ward into the flanged housing (Fig. 59).
Fig. 59
18. Press cylinder roller bearing 1 (Fig. 60) with
pressing plate (2) into the flanged hub until it bot-
toms.
Fig. 60
Fig. 61
20. Attach the flanged hub to the flanged housing
(Fig. 62).
! Caution
Fitting and contact surfaces must be abso-
lutely dry and free of grease, paint and con-
serving agents.
21. Unscrew eye bolts (1) and replace them with
short screws.
22. Turn short screws (2) into the tapped bores in the
flanged housing (four screws) and tighten them.
Fig. 62
23. Apply some grease to the sealing lip of radial seal
1 (Fig. 63).
24. Insert the radial seal into the flanged hub with the
sealing lip facing down and press it down against
the stop with pressing bushing (2).
Fig. 63 !Danger
Danger of burning!
Wear protective gloves.
25. Heat the coupling hub up to approx. 80 °C and
slide it onto the shaft against the stop (Fig. 64).
Fig. 64
Fig. 65
28. Cover the thread of screw 1 (Fig. 66) with a screw
retention agent (e.g. Loctite CVX strong, blue,
582).
29. Slide on the new U-seal ring (2), turn in and tight-
en the screws.
Fig. 66 ! Danger
Danger of burning!
Wear safety gloves.
30. Heat coupling hub 1 (Fig. 67) with marking letter
“L“ up t approx. 80° C and slide it over the shaft
against the shoulder.
31. Turn in and tighten clamping screw (2).
Fig. 67
Fig. 68
3. Insert the circlip into the groove in the side plate
(Fig. 69).
Fig. 69
4. Apply a thick coat of grease to the spacer ring on
both sides and insert it into the side plate (Fig.
70).
Fig. 70
i Note
Grease the other side after installing the exciter
unit.
Fig. 71
7. Insert the oiled loop-ring into the mechanical seal
(Fig. 72).
8. Clean the sliding surfaces of the mechanical seal
and cover them with oil.
Fig. 72
9. Lay one half of the radial seal on the flanged hub
with the sliding surface pointing up (Fig. 73).
Fig. 73
10. Lay the second half of the mechanical seal down
with the sliding face pointing down (Fig. 74).
Fig. 74
Fig. 75 ! Caution
Danger of squashing! Do not stand or step
under suspended loads.
12. Lay the side plate on the flanged hub (Fig. 76).
Fig. 76
13. Attach bushing 2 (Fig. 77) of the assembly device
and turn on nut (1).
Fig. 77
14. Pull the side plate with the assembly device onto
the flanged hub.
! Caution
During assembly make sure that the mechan-
ical seal slides correctly into the side plate
and the loop rings are not damaged (Fig. 78).
Fig. 78
Fig. 79
! Caution
Ensure strict cleanliness.
1. Cool the shaft down in liquid nitrogen.
Fig. 80
2. Slide the cooled down shaft with the bores
aligned into the basic weight until it bottoms (Fig.
80).
3. Secure shaft 1 (Fig. 81) with dowel pins (2 and 3).
! Caution
Assemble the dowel pins with the grooves
offset by 180° to each other, but in line with
the axis of the shaft.
Fig. 81
Fig. 82
! Danger
Danger of burning!
Wear safety gloves.
5. Heat the inner bearing race up to approx. 100° C
and press it onto the basic weight against the
shoulder with the larger outer diameter forward
(Fig. 83).
Fig. 83
! Danger
Danger of burning!
Wear safety gloves.
6. Heat the inner ring up to approx. 50° C and slide
it onto the shaft against the shoulder with the wid-
er chamfer facing towards the outside (Fig. 84).
Fig. 84 ! Danger
Danger of burning!
Wear safety gloves.
7. Heat the inner bearing race up to approx. 100° C
and press it onto the cover against the shoulder
with the larger outer diameter forward (Fig. 85).
Fig. 85
Fig. 86
9. Insert the circlip into the groove in the flanged
housing (Fig. 87).
Fig. 87
10. Fit the new radial seal with some grease into the
groove in the flanged housing (Fig. 88).
11. Fill approx. 1.2 l oil SAE-15W/40 into the flanged
housing.
Fig. 88 ! Caution
Danger of squashing! Do not stand or step
under suspended loads.
12. Insert the exciter unit into the flanged housing
(Fig. 89).
Fig. 89
Fig. 90
14. Insert the circlip into the groove in the flange (Fig.
91).
Fig. 91
15. Lift the flange onto the flanged housing and align
it the bores (Fig. 92).
! Caution
Fitting and contact surfaces must be abso-
lutely dry and free of grease, paint and con-
serving agents.
Fig. 92
16. Turn the screws into the tapped bores of the
flanged housing and tighten them (Fig. 93).
Fig. 93
Fig. 94
19. Cover the thread of screw 1 (Fig. 95) with a screw
retention agent (e.g. Loctite CVX strong, blue,
582).
20. Slide on the new U-seal ring (2), turn in and tight-
en the screws.
Fig. 95
21. Insert the fitting key into the keyway of the shaft
(Fig. 96).
Fig. 96 !Danger
Danger of burning!
Wear safety gloves.
22. Slide the fan with assembly disc over the shaft.
23. Heat coupling hub 1 (Fig. 97) with marking letter
“R“ up to approx. 80° C and slide it over the shaft
against the shoulder.
24. Turn in and tighten clamping screw (2).
25. Assemble the fan to the coupling hub.
Fig. 97
! Caution
Fitting and contact surface of the connection
between exciter unit and drum must be abso-
lutely dry and free of grease, oil, paint and
conserving agent.
3. Fasten the lifting device to the exciter unit.
Fig. 98 ! Caution
Danger of squashing! Do not stand or step
under suspended loads.
4. Insert the vibrator unit into the drum (Fig. 99).
Fig. 99
i Note
Insert the exciter unit so that oil filler plug 1 (Fig.
100) is in line with bore (2) in the drum.
Fig. 100
Fig. 101
7. Cover the thread of screws (Fig. 102) with a
screw retention agent (e.g. Loctite green 270).
8. Slide on the new U-seal ring, turn in and tighten
the screws.
Fig. 102
Danger of squashing!
Do not stand or step under suspended loads.
1. Fasten the lifting tackle to the travel motor and at-
tach the motor to the drive disc (Fig. 103).
Fig. 103
2. Turn in and tighten the fastening screws (Fig.
104).
Fig. 104
Fig. 105
! Danger
Danger of squashing!
Do not stand or step under suspended loads.
4. Attach the drive disc with the assembled travel
motor to the rubber buffers. Turn on and tighten
the nuts (Fig. 106).
Fig. 106
! Caution
Fitting and contact surface of the connection
between exciter unit and drum must be abso-
lutely dry and free of grease, oil, paint and
conserving agent.
! Danger
Danger of squashing! Do not stand or step
under suspended loads.
1. Fasten the lifting gear to the exciter unit and insert
it into the drum (Fig. 107).
Fig. 107
! Caution
Ensure correct engagement of coupling and
alignment of shaft (Fig. 108).
If the shafts are not correctly in line determine
the cause, if necessary measure the drum.
Fig. 108
2. Turn in and tighten screws 1 (Fig. 109).
3. Remove the lifting gear.
4. Fit cover (2) to the drum.
Fig. 109
5. Check the end float of the exciter shafts (Fig.
110).
Fig. 110
6. Attach disc 1 (Fig. 111), turn in and tighten the
fastening screws (2).
Fig. 111
Fig. 112
9. Check coupling element, replace if necessary.
10. Insert the coupling element into the coupling hub
(Fig. 113).
Fig. 113
11. Fasten the vibration motor to the cover so that
sockets 1 (Fig. 114) and ventilation bore (2) are
opposite each other.
Fig. 114
12. Slide on coupling half 2 (Fig. 115) and secure with
clamping screw (1).
Fig. 115
Fig. 116
14. Install rectangular rubber buffers 2 (Fig. 117) with
attached spacer block (3) and screws (1) to the
side plate.
i Note
Assemble both rectangular rubber buffers.
Fig. 117
Fig. 1
2. Force the cover with forcing screws (Fig. 4) off the
basic weight.
Environment
Environmental hazard!
Catch running out oil and dispose of environ-
mentally.
Fig. 2
3. Take the change-over weight out of the basic
weight (Fig. 5).
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
2. Place the change-over weight into the basic
weight (Fig. 6).
Fig. 6
3. Fill aprox 2,5 litres of silicone oil 47 V 1000 cst (up
to the upper edge of the change-over weight) into
the basic weight (Fig. 10).
Fig. 7
iNote
The shaft must have clearance.
Fig. 8
Fig. 1
3. Turn one screw each into the welded nuts (Fig. 2)
on the spacer blocks.
Fig. 2
4. Remove the compensation shims 1 (Fig. 3).
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Changing the rubber buffers
6. Unscrew nut 1 (Fig. 3) and remove the washer.
7. Unscrew screws (2).
8. Take off rubber buffer (3).
9. Attach the new rubber buffer to the drive disc and
align the bores to the tapped bores in the drum.
10. Turn in and tighten the fastening screws.
11. Assemble the washer, turn on and tighten the nut.
Fig. 5
Adjusting the pre-load
12. Measure distance „X“ between spacer piece and
side plate (Fig. 6).
13. Calculate the thickness of the compensation
plates.
Nominal value:
Distance „X“ + 2 mm
Fig. 6
14. Turn in screws into each welded nut and provide
sufficient space to insert the compensation plates
(Fig. 7).
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
16. Unscrew the screws (Fig. 9) from the welded
nuts.
Fig. 9
17. Tighten the fastening screws (Fig. 10).
18. Lower the frame again.
Fig. 10
Fig. 1
2. Pressing bushing for outer rocker bearing race
Fig. 2
3. Pressing bushing for inner rocker bearing race
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
5. Clamping device
Fig. 5
6. Disassembly device
Fig. 6
1 Housing 12 Cover
2 Seal ring 13 Cover
3 Cover 14 Intermediate ring
4 Self-aligning bearing 15 Self-aligning bearing
5 Bolt 16 Intermediate ring
6 Shim/supporting disc 17 Self-aligning bearing
7 Belleville springs 18 Carrier
8 Self-aligning bearing 19 Friction bearing
9 Console 20 V-ring
10 Belleville springs 21 Seal ring
11 Shim/supporting disc
Fig. 1
2. Support the rear frame near the oscillating articu-
lated joint (Fig. 2) on both sides safely with tres-
tles or wooden blocks.
Fig. 2
3. Fasten the lifting tackle to the front frame near the
oscillating articulated joint (Fig. 3).
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
!Danger
Danger of accident!
7. Support the oscillating articulated joint in the mid-
dle with a suitable jack or a similar device.
8. Unscrew fastening screws 1 (Fig. 5) and take off
with disc (2).
Fig. 5
9. Unscrew nuts 3 (Fig. 6) and take off the clamping
washers (2).
10. Pull out the fastening screws (1).
11. Slightly raise the front frame and lower the oscil-
lating articulated joint to the ground.
12. Pull out the oscillating articulated joint.
Fig. 6
Note on assembly
13. Insert the bolt for the steering cylinder so that
groove (2) is in line with tapped bores (1).
Fig. 7
Fig. 1
3. Take off the cover with Belleville springs, shim
and backing disc (Fig. 2).
4. Disassemble also the cover from the opposite
side.
i Note
No Belleville springs, shim and backing disc are
under this cover.
Fig. 2
5. Drive the console with a plastic hammer to one
side against the end stop (Fig. 3).
i Note
The outer race of the rocker bearing is thereby
stripped off.
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
9. Unscrew fastening screws 1 (Fig. 5).
10. Press bolt (3) out of the console with forcing
screws (2).
i Note
Remove the bolt on the opposite side in the same
way.
Fig. 5
11. Lift console 1 (Fig. 6) off housing (2).
Fig. 6
12. Take the seal rings out of the console (Fig. 7).
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
15. Unscrew bolts 1 (Fig. 9) and take off cover (2).
Fig. 9
16. Take the intermediate ring out of the housing
(Fig. 10).
Fig. 10
17. Place the plate 1 (Fig. 11) on the beam.
18. Attach the puller (2) to the housing (3) and sepa-
rate the carrier from the rocker bearings.
Fig. 11
Fig. 12
20. Drive the outer race of the friction bearing out of
the housing (Fig. 13).
Fig. 13
21. Drive the friction bearing out of the housing (Fig.
14).
Fig. 14
22. Take seal ring 1 (Fig. 15) and V-ring (2) off the
beam.
Fig. 15
Fig. 16
i Note
Apply sliding lacquer OKS 571 to mating surfaces
to ease assembly
! Caution
Do not use any grease.
Fig. 1
2. Slide the new V-ring on the beam against the stop
with the lip facing up (Fig. 2).
Fig. 2
3. Lay the seal ring into the beam (Fig. 3).
4. Fill the space between V-ring and seal ring with
multi-purpose grease.
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
6. Slide the housing over the beam (Fig. 5).
i Note
The journal on the housing must be centrally in
the recess of the beam.
Fig. 5
7. Press the seal ring carefully towards the inside,
until it sits in the recess of the housing (Fig. 6).
Fig. 6
8. Spray the sliding surface of the outer rocker bear-
ing race with sliding agent OKS 571.
! Caution
Do not use any grease.
9. Press the outer rocker bearing race 1 (Fig. 7) in
until it bottoms with the wider outer rim forward
using pressing sleeve (2).
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
11. Insert the intermediate ring (Fig. 9).
Fig. 9
12. Press inner rocker bearing race 1 (Fig. 10) in until
it bottoms, using pressing sleeve (2).
Fig. 10
i Note
Apply sliding lacquer OKS 571 to mating surfaces
to ease assembly
! Caution
Do not use any grease.
13. Press the outer rocker bearing race 1 (Fig. 11) in
until it bottoms with the wider outer rim pointing
up, using pressing sleeve (2).
Fig. 11
Fig. 12
Determining the shim thickness
17. Determine the shim thickness, for this purpose
stand the cross-member on a wooden board with
an ∅ 18 mm bore.
! Caution
Check the measurement with an axial pre-
load of 40kN. With threaded rod M12-8.8 tight-
ening torque 77Nm. With threaded rod M16-
8.8 tightening torque 90Nm.
18. Slide the rod of the tensioning device in from un-
derneath, attach the plate, screw on the nut and
Fig. 13 tighten.
19. Measure the distance from housing edge to inter-
mediate ring (Fig. 13) and write it down, e.g. 4,7
mm.
i Note
From this measured value of 4.7 mm subtract the
fixed value of 4.0 mm to determine the shim thick-
ness.
Calculation example:
4,7 mm - 4,0 mm = 0,7 mm
measured value: 4,7 mm
fixed value: 4,0 mm
Shim thickness: 0,7 mm
20. Remove the tensioning device.
Fig. 14
22. Lay the Belleville springs into the cover with the
curvature pointing down (Fig. 15).
Fig. 15
23. Assemble cover 2 (Fig. 16) with Belleville springs,
shim and backing disc.
24. Turn in screws (1) and tighten crosswise.
Fig. 16
25. Press the new sealing rings into the respective
groove in the console (Fig. 17).
Fig. 17
Fig. 18
27. Turn four guide pins into the housing bores (Fig.
19).
Fig. 19
i Note
Perform the following eight work steps on both
sides.
28. Slide the bolt over the guide pins (Fig. 20) and
drive in until it bottoms.
Fig. 20
! Caution
When driving in the bolt make sure that the
seal ring is not pressed out through the back
of the console (Fig. 21).
Fig. 21
Fig. 22
31. Slide the backing discs over the bolt (Fig. 23).
Fig. 23
32. Drive the inner rocker bearing race on against the
end stop with the wider outer rim forward (Fig.
24).
Fig. 24
33. Spray the sliding surface of the outer rocker bear-
ing race with sliding agent OKS 571.
! Caution
Do not use any grease.
34. Attach the outer rocker bearing race with the wid-
er outer rim facing towards the outside (Fig. 25)
and drive it in until it bottoms.
Fig. 25
Fig. 26
Determining the shim thickness
37. Determine the shim thickness, for this purpose in-
sert rod 1 (Fig. 27) of the tensioning device from
underneath. Attach plate (2), screw on nut (3) and
tighten.
! Caution
Check the measurement with an axial pre-
load of 40kN. With threaded rod M12-8.8 tight-
ening torque 77Nm. With threaded rod M16-
8.8 tightening torque 90Nm.
Fig. 27
38. Measure the distance from outer rocker bearing
race to console surface (Fig. 28) and write it
down, e.g. 3.4 mm.
i Note
From this measured value of 3.4 mm subtract the
fixed value of 2.2 mm to determine the shim thick-
ness.
Calculation example:
3.4 mm - 2.2 mm = 1.2 mm
measured value: 3,4 mm
Fig. 28 fixed value: 2,2 mm
Shim thickness: 1.2 mm
39. Remove the tensioning device.
Fig. 29
41. Lay the Belleville springs into the cover with the
curvature pointing down (Fig. 30).
Fig. 30
42. Assemble cover 1 (Fig. 31) with Belleville springs,
shims and supporting discs.
43. Turn in screws (2) and tighten crosswise.
Fig. 31
44. Insert hexagon screw 1 (Fig. 32) so that the screw
head rests on the upper side of the console.
Fig. 32
Fig. 33
Bild 34
Series 90
Axial Piston
Pumps and Motors
Service Manual
Series 90 Introduction
Introduction
This manual includes information for the normal opera- Since dirt and contamination are the greatest enemies of
tion, maintenance, and servicing of the Series 90 family any type of hydraulic equipment, cleanliness require-
of hydrostatic pumps and motors. ments must be strictly adhered to. This is especially
important when changing the system filter and during
The manual also includes the description of the units and adjustment and repair activities.
their individual components, troubleshooting informa-
tion, adjustment instructions, and minor repair proce- For further information refer to Series 90 Technical
dures. Unit warranty obligations should not be affected if Information. For information about fluid requirements
maintenance, adjustment, and minor repairs are per- refer to SAUER-SUNDSTRAND BLN 9887 or SDF (Id No.
formed according to the procedures described in this 697581).
manual.
A worldwide network of SAUER-SUNDSTRAND Autho-
Many service and adjustment activities can be performed rized Service Centers is available should repairs be
without removing the unit from the vehicle or machine. needed. Contact any SAUER-SUNDSTRAND Autho-
However, adequate access to the unit must be available, rized Service Center for details. A list of all Service
and the unit must be thoroughly cleaned before beginning Centers can be found in bulletin BLN-2-400527, or in
maintenance, adjustment, or repair activities. brochure SAW (Ident. No. 698266).
Safety Precautions
Observe the following safety precautions when using and servicing hydrostatic products.
WARNING WARNING
The loss of hydrostatic drive line power in any Use caution when dealing with hydraulic fluid
mode of operation (e.g., forward, reverse, or "neu- under pressure. Escaping hydraulic fluid under
tral" mode) may cause the loss of hydrostatic pressure can have sufficient force to penetrate
braking capacity. A braking system, redundant to your skin causing serious injury. This fluid may
the hydrostatic transmission must, therefore, be also be hot enough to burn. Serious infection or
provided which is adequate to stop and hold the reactions can develop if proper medical treat-
system should the condition develop. ment is not administered immediately.
S000 001E S000 003E
WARNING WARNING
Certain service procedures may require the ve- Some cleaning solvents are flammable. To avoid
hicle/machine to be disabled (wheels raised off possible fire, do not use cleaning solvents in an
the ground, work function disconnected, etc.) area where a source of ignition may be present.
while performing them in order to prevent injury S000 004E
Series 90 Contents
Contents
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
Use of this Manual ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2
Safety Precautions ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2
Functional Description ....................................................................................................................................................... 5
General Description and Cross Sectional Views ......................................................................................................................................... 5
Variable Displacement Pumps ................................................................................................................................................................ 5
Fixed Displacement Motor ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5
Variable Displacement Motor .................................................................................................................................................................. 6
The System Circuit ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
The Basic Closed Circuit ........................................................................................................................................................................ 7
Case Drain and Heat Exchanger ........................................................................................................................................................... 7
Common Features of Pumps and Motors .................................................................................................................................................... 8
End Caps and Shafts ............................................................................................................................................................................. 8
Speed Sensors ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Pump Features ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 9
Charge Pump .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
Charge Relief Valve ................................................................................................................................................................................. 9
Multi-Function Valves .............................................................................................................................................................................. 9
Pressure Limiter and High Pressure Relief Valves ....................................................................................................................... 10
System Check Valves .................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Bypass Valves ................................................................................................................................................................................ 10
Displacement Limiters .......................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Auxiliary Mounting Pads ....................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Filtration Options ................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Pressure Override (POR) - 180 Frame Size Only ............................................................................................................................. 12
Pump Control Options .......................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Manual Displacement Control (MDC) ........................................................................................................................................... 13
Hydraulic Displacement Control (HDC) ........................................................................................................................................ 13
Electric Displacement Control (EDC) ............................................................................................................................................ 14
Automotive Control (FBA II B) ....................................................................................................................................................... 14
3-Position (FNR) Electric Control .................................................................................................................................................. 14
Motor Features ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Motor Loop Flushing Valve and Charge Relief Valve ........................................................................................................................... 15
Variable Motor Displacement Limiters .................................................................................................................................................. 15
Variable Motor Controls ........................................................................................................................................................................ 16
Hydraulic 2-Position Control .......................................................................................................................................................... 16
Electric 2-Position Control .............................................................................................................................................................. 16
Technical Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 17
General Specifications ................................................................................................................................................................................ 17
Circuit Diagrams ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 17
Hydraulic Parameters ................................................................................................................................................................................. 18
Size Specific Data ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
Pressure Measurement ................................................................................................................................................... 20
Required Tools ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 20
Port Locations and Pressure Gauge Installation ....................................................................................................................................... 20
Variable Pump ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
Fixed Motor ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 23
Variable Motor ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 24
Initial Start-Up Procedure ................................................................................................................................................ 25
Fluid and Filter Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................... 26
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................................................ 27
"NEUTRAL" Difficult or Impossible to Find ................................................................................................................................................. 27
System Operating Hot ................................................................................................................................................................................ 27
Transmission Operates Normally in One Direction Only .......................................................................................................................... 28
System Will Not Operate in Either Direction .............................................................................................................................................. 28
Low Motor Output Torque ........................................................................................................................................................................... 29
Improper Motor Output Speed .................................................................................................................................................................... 29
Excessive Noise and/or Vibration .............................................................................................................................................................. 30
System Response is Sluggish .................................................................................................................................................................... 30
Series 90 Contents
Inspections and Adjustments ......................................................................................................................................... 31
Pump Adjustments ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 31
Charge Pressure Relief Valve Adjustment ........................................................................................................................................... 31
Multi-Function Valve Pressure Adjustment .......................................................................................................................................... 33
Engaging the Bypass Function ............................................................................................................................................................ 35
Pressure Override (POR) Valve Pressure Adjustment (Option for 180 Frame Size) ....................................................................... 36
Displacement Limiter Adjustment ......................................................................................................................................................... 37
Pump Control Adjustments ......................................................................................................................................................................... 38
Standard Manual Displacement Control (MDC) Adjustment .............................................................................................................. 38
Non-Linear Manual Displacement Control (MDC) .............................................................................................................................. 39
MDC Neutral Start Switch (NSS) Adjustments .................................................................................................................................... 40
Hydraulic Displacement Control (HDC) and Electric Displacement Control (EDC) Adjustment ....................................................... 46
Motor Adjustments ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 48
Charge Relief Valve Adjustment ........................................................................................................................................................... 48
Displacement Limiter Adjustment (MV) ................................................................................................................................................ 49
Displacement Control Adjustments ...................................................................................................................................................... 49
Speed Sensor Adjustment .......................................................................................................................................................................... 50
Minor Repair Instructions ................................................................................................................................................ 51
Pump and Motor Minor Repair .................................................................................................................................................................... 53
Pump / Fitting Torques .......................................................................................................................................................................... 53
Shaft Seal and Shaft Replacement ...................................................................................................................................................... 54
Pump Minor Repairs ................................................................................................................................................................................... 56
Multi-Function Valve Cartridges ........................................................................................................................................................... 56
Pressure Override Valve (Option for 180 Frame Size) ....................................................................................................................... 57
Charge Relief Valve ............................................................................................................................................................................... 57
Charge Pump - Remove ...................................................................................................................................................................... 58
Installing the Charge Pump .................................................................................................................................................................. 60
Auxiliary Pad Installation ....................................................................................................................................................................... 62
Auxiliary Pad Conversion ..................................................................................................................................................................... 63
Filtration Options ................................................................................................................................................................................... 64
Pump controls ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 65
Cover Plate ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 65
Manual Displacement Control (MDC) ........................................................................................................................................... 66
Solenoid Override Valve for MDC .................................................................................................................................................. 67
Solenoid Override Valve for MDC with Pressure Released Brake .............................................................................................. 67
Hydraulic and Electric Displacement Controls ............................................................................................................................. 68
Pressure Control Pilot (PCP) for Electric Displacement Control .................................................................................................. 68
3-Position (FNR) Electric Control .................................................................................................................................................. 69
Displacement Control Components ............................................................................................................................................... 69
Minor Repair - Motor ................................................................................................................................................................................... 71
Loop Flushing and Charge Relief Valves ............................................................................................................................................. 71
Variable Motor Displacement Limiters .................................................................................................................................................. 73
Variable Motor Controls ............................................................................................................................................................................... 74
Electrohydraulic 2-Position Control (Types NA, NB, NC, and ND) ..................................................................................................... 74
Hydraulic 2-Position Control (Type PT) ............................................................................................................................................... 74
Control Plugs ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 74
Variable Motor Control Orifices ............................................................................................................................................................ 75
Speed Sensor .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 77
Exploded View Parts Drawings / Parts Lists .................................................................................................................. 78
Variable Pumps ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 78
Minor Repair Parts ................................................................................................................................................................................ 78
Parts List ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 79
Variable Pump Controls ........................................................................................................................................................................ 80
Control Parts List .................................................................................................................................................................................. 81
Filter and Options ................................................................................................................................................................................. 82
Parts List Filter and Options ................................................................................................................................................................. 83
Name Plates ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 83
Fixed Motor ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 84
Minor Repair Parts ................................................................................................................................................................................ 84
Parts List ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 85
Name Plates ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 85
Variable Motor .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 86
Minor Repair Parts ................................................................................................................................................................................ 86
Parts List ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 87
Name Plate ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 87
Slider Block
Servo Arm
Servo Valve
Cradle Hold Down
Servo Piston
Feed Back
Cradle Bearing
Cradle
Cradle Leveler
Cradle Guide
Charge Pump
P001 413E
Series 90 PV Cross Section
Output Shaft
Fixed Swashplate
End Cap Cylinder Block
90000190E
Series 90 MF Cross Section
90000348
Series 90 Variable Displacement Motor (MV)
Minimum Angle
Valve Plate Piston Control Piston
End Cap
Roller Bearing
Cradle Swashplate
Output Shaft
Cradle Swashplate
Cylinder Block
Electric 2-Position Control (optional) Maximum Angle
Control Piston
90000234E
Series 90 MV Cross Section
Orificed Reservoir
Control fluid
Check Valve
Vacuum Gauge
Suction line
Heat Exchanger
to Pump
Case
Servo Pres.
Relief Valve
Charge Pump
Input
Output Shaft
Shaft
Multi-Function Valve Motor Swashplate
Pump Swashplate Servo Control
Cylinder Loop Flushing Valve
The pump and motor require case drain lines to remove Reservoir
hot fluid from the system. The motor should be drained
from its topmost drain port to ensure the case remains full Input Output
PV MF
of fluid. The motor case drain can then be connected to
the lower drain port on the pump housing and out the top
most port. A heat exchanger, with a bypass valve, is
required to cool the case drain fluid before it returns to the
reservoir.
Flow (Bi-directional)
Speed Sensors
90000810
Speed Sensor
Charge Pump
Tank
90000804E
Pump Charge System
Multi-Function Valves
in a replaceable cartridge.
Multi-Function Valve The bypass valves are built into the multi-function valves.
90000801E
Circuit Diagram showing Pressure
Control Mechanism
10
90000244
Auxiliary Mounting Pads PV with Displacement Limiters
90000242
Filtration Options PV with Auxillary Mounting Pad
Suction Filtration
90000246 90000247
PV with Integral Charge PV with Remote Charge
Pump Pump
11
Shuttle
The pressure override consists of a three-way normally
Valve open valve which operates in series with the pump
Port "B" displacement control. Control supply pressure is nor-
mally ported through the pressure override valve to the
displacement control valve for controlling the pump's
displacement. If the system demands a pressure above
the override setting, the POR valve will override the
Multi-Function Valve Charge Pressure
Relief Valve control by reducing the control pressure supplied to the
displacement control. As the control pressure reduces,
the internal forces tending to rotate the swashplate
90000802E overcome the force of the servo pistons and allow the
POR-Valve (180 Frame Size only) pump's displacement to decrease.
12
The manual displacement control converts a mechanical input signal to a hydraulic signal using a spring- centered four-
way servo valve. This valve ports hydraulic pressure to either side of a dual-acting servo piston. The servo piston rotates
the cradle swashplate through an angular rotation of ±17°, thus varying the pump’s displacement from full displacement
in one direction to full displacement in the opposite direction.
The MDC is designed so the angular position of the pump swashplate is proportional to the rotation of the control input
shaft.
Non-Linear MDC
90000239
PV with Manual Displacement Control and
Hydraulic Displacement Control (HDC) Neutral Start Switch
90000240
PV with Hydraulic Displacement Control
13
90000354
PV with 3-Position (FNR) Electric Control
14
The motor charge relief valve regulates the charge pres- Top of Motor Charge Relief Valve
sure level only when there is a pressure differential in the
main loop. The shuttle valve is spring centered to the
closed position so that no high pressure fluid is lost from
the circuit when reversing pressures.
90000238E
055 MV 075 MV
15
90000350
MV with Hydraulic 2-Position Control
90000351
MV with Electric 2-Position Control
16
General Specifications
Type of Mounting (per SAE J744) Clockwise or counterclockwise (motors are bi-directional)
Circuit Diagrams
L2 M3
A M1
M3
Vg max
X5
A
M1
M5
M4
B M2
L1
M2
B
MV with Electrohydraulic 2-Position
Control
L1 S L2
A M1
B M2
L1
90000811
MF 90000812
90000813
17
Hydraulic Parameters
Temperature Range1)
System Pressure Range bar psi
°C [°F]
Minimum -40 [-40] intermittent, cold start
Rated Pressure 420 6000
Rated 104 [220]
Maximum 115 [240] intermittent
Maximum Pressure 480 6960
T002 006E
1)
T002 252E At the hottest point, normally the case
drain port.
T002 253E
18
Minimum Speed min-1 (rpm) 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
Rated Speed min-1 (rpm) 4200 4200 3900 3600 3300 3100 2600 2300
Maximum Speed min-1 (rpm) 4600 4600 4250 3950 3650 3400 2850 2500
19
Required Tools
The service procedures described in this manual for Pressure gauges should be calibrated frequently to en-
Series 90 pumps and motors can be performed using sure accuracy. Snubbers are recommended to protect
common mechanic's tools. Special tools, if required are pressure gauges.
shown.
The following sections list the ports for each type of Outline drawings showing port locations follow the tables
hydraulic unit. The recommended pressure gauge and below.
fitting are also specified.
Variable Pump
20
Servo / Displacement
Cylinder Pressure
Gauge Port M4
Case Drain
Port L1
System Pressure
Port B
Servo / Displacement
Cylinder Pressure
Gauge Port M5
Top View
90000814E
System Pressure
Port B External Control Pressure
System Pressure Supply Port X3
Gauge Port M2 Speed Sensor
System Pressure
Gauge Port M1
Carge Pump
Inlet Port S System Pressure Case Drain Port L2 Charge Pressure
Port A Gauge Port M3
90000815E
90000816E
21
Servo / Displacement
Cylinder Pressure
System Pressure Gauge Port M4
Case Drain
Gauge Port M2 Port L1
System Pressure
Port B
System Pressure
Port A
System Pressure Servo / Displacement
Gauge Port M1 Cylinder Pressure
Case Drain Port L2 Gauge Port M5
Top View
Left Side View
90000819E
90000820E
Charge Pressure
Gauge Port M6
(before the filter)
Port E
(from filter)
Port D
(to filter)
Charge Pressure
Gauge Port M3
Charge Pressure
(after the filter)
Gauge Port M3
(after the filter)
Rear View Rear View
90000817E
90000818E
PV with Side Port End Cap and Remote Pressure Filtration PV with Side Port End Cap and Integral Pressure Filtration
22
System Pressure
Gauge Port M1
Charge Pressure System Pressure
Gauge Port M3 Gauge Port M2 Case Drain Port L1
System Pressure
Gauge Port M1
Charge Pressure System Pressure Case Drain Port L1
Gauge Port M3 Gauge Port M2
Speed Sensor
System Pressure Port B
System Pressure Port A Case Drain Port L2
90000821E
23
Displacement Control
Cylinder Pressure
Gauge Port M4
System Pressure Min. Displacement
Gauge Port M2
Control Pressure Displacement Control
Port X1 Cylinder Pressure
(Hydraulic 2-Position Control) Gauge Port M5
Max. Displacement
(Earlier Production -
Not available as gauge
port with servo orifices)
MV with Cartridge Flange and Hydraulic 2-Position Control (SAE Flange Version Similar)
charge Pressure
Gauge Port M3
(Same position as in MF)
Speed Sensor
90000823E
24
The following start-up procedure should always be fol- connections for EDC) be disconnected at the pump
lowed when starting-up a new Series 90 installation or control until after initial start-up. This will ensure that the
when restarting an installation in which either the pump or pump remains in its neutral position.
motor had been removed.
WARNING WARNING
The following procedure may require the vehicle/ Do not start prime mover unless pump is in neutral
machine to be disabled (wheels raised off the ground, position (0° swashplate angle). Take precautions to
work function disconnected, etc.) while performing prevent machine movement in case pump is actuated
the procedure in order to prevent injury to the during initial start up.
technician and bystanders. Take necessary safety S000 008E
25
Hydraulic fluid reservoir Check the reservoir daily for proper fluid level, the pres-
ence of water (noted by a cloudy to milky appearance, or
Filter free water in bottom of reservoir), and rancid fluid odor
(indicating excessive heat). If either of these conditions
Charge pump
occur, change the fluid and filter immediately.
26
Series 90 Toubleshooting
Troubleshooting
This section provides general steps to follow if certain undesirable system conditions are observed. Follow the steps in
a section until the problem is solved. Some of the items will be system specific. For areas covered in this manual, a section
is referenced. Always observe the safety precautions listed in the section "Introduction" and related to your
specific equipment.
1. Input to pump control. Input to control module is operating Check control input and repair or re-
improperly. place as necessary.
2. Pump displacement control. Control linkages are not secure, control Adjust, repair, or replace control mod-
orifices are blocked, etc. ule as necessary.
2. Heat exchanger. Heat exchanger not sufficiently cooling Check air flow and input air tempera-
the system. ture for heat exchanger. Clean, repair
or replace heat exchanger.
3. Charge pressure. Low charge pressure will overwork sys- Measure charge pressure. Inspect and
tem. adjust or replace charge relief valve. Or
repair leaky charge pump.
4. Charge pump inlet vacuum. High inlet vacuum will overwork sys- Check charge inlet vacuum. If high,
tem. A dirty filter will increase the inlet inspect inlet filter and replace as neces-
vacuum. Inadequate line size will re- sary. Check for adequate line size,
strict flow. length or other restrictions.
5. System relief pressure settings. If the system relief settings are too low, Verify settings of pressure limiters and
the relief valves will be overworked. high pressure relief valves and adjust
or replace multi-function valves as nec-
essary.
6. For internal leakage in motor.
Leakage will reduce low side system Monitor motor case flow without loop
pressure and overwork the system. flushing in the circuit (use defeat spool).
If flow is excessive, replace motor.
7. System pressure. High system pressure will overheat Measure system pressure. If pressure
system. is high reduce loads.
27
Series 90 Toubleshooting
Transmission Operates Normally in One Direction Only
2. Pump displacement control. Control linkages are not secure, control Repair or replace control module as
orifices are blocked, etc. necessary.
3. Interchange system pressure limit- Interchanging the multi-function valves Interchange multi-function valves. If the
ers, high pressure relief valves, and will show if the problem is related to the problem changes direction, repair or
system check valves. valve functions contained in the multi- replace the valve on the side that does
function valves. not operate.
4. Charge pressure. If charge pressure decays in one direc- Measure charge pressure in forward
tion the loop flushing valve may be and reverse. If pressure decays in one
“sticking” in one direction. direction, inspect and repair the motor
loop flushing valve.
If the above actions do not remedy the problem
contact a SAUER-SUNDSTRAND Authorized Service Center.
2. Input to pump control. Input to control module is operating Check control input and repair or re-
improperly. place as necessary.
3. Pump displacement control. Control linkages are not secure, control Repair or replace control module as
orifices are blocked, etc. necessary.
4. Ensure bypass valve(s) are closed. If bypass valve(s) is open, the system Close bypass valves. Replace multi-
loop will be depressurized. function valve if defective.
5. Charge pressure with pump in neu- Low charge pressure insufficient to re- Measure charge pressure with the pump
tral. charge system loop. in neutral. If pressure is low, go to step
6; otherwise continue with step 5.
6. Charge pressure with pump in Low charge pressure with the pump in Measure charge pressure with pump in
stroke. stroke indicates a motor charge relief stroke. If pressure is low, adjust or
valve or system pressure relief valve replace motor charge relief valve, oth-
may be improperly set. erwise go to step 9.
7. Pump charge relief valve. A pump charge relief valve that is leaky Adjust or replace pump charge relief
or set too low will depressurize the valve as necessary.
system.
8. Charge pump inlet filter. A clogged filter will undersupply system Inspect filter and replace if necessary.
loop.
9. Charge pump. A malfunctioning charge pump will pro- Repair or replace the charge pump. If
vide insufficient charge flow. OK go to last step.
28
Series 90 Toubleshooting
10. Pump displacement control. Control linkages are not secure, control Repair or replace control module as
orifices are blocked, etc. necessary.
11. System pressure. Low system pressure will not provide Measure system pressure. Continue
power necessary to move load. with next step.
12. System multi-function valves. Defective multi-function valves will Repair or replace multi-function valve(s).
cause system pressure to be low.
1. System pressure at motor. Low system pressure at the motor will Measure system pressure at motor. If
reduce torque. pressure limiter setting is low, increase
setting.
2. Variable motor stuck at minimum Minimum motor displacement yields low Check control supply pressure or re-
displacement. output torque. pair displacement control. Check mo-
tor control orifices.
3. For internal leakage. Internal leakage will reduce system Check for leakage in O-rings, gaskets,
pressure. and other fittings. Repair unit as re-
quired, or replace leaky unit.
1. Oil level in reservoir. Insufficient hydraulic fluid will reduce Fill oil to proper level.
motor speed.
2. Pump output flow. Incorrect outflow will affect output Measure pump output and check for
speed. Incorrect output flow indicates proper pump speed and see that the
the swashplate is out of position. pump is in full stroke.
3. Variable motor displacement con- If variable motor displacement control See if variable motor displacement con-
trol. is not functioning correctly, variable trol is responding. If not, repair or re-
motor swashplate may be in wrong place control.
position.
4. For internal leakage. Internal leakage will reduce system Check for leakage in O-rings, gaskets,
pressure. and other fittings. Repair unit as re-
quired, or replace leaky unit.
29
Series 90 Toubleshooting
Excessive Noise and/or Vibration
2. Air in system. Air bubbles will lead to cavitation. Look for foam in reservoir. Check for
leaks on inlet side of system loop. After-
wards, let reservoir settle until bubbles
are gone. Run system at low speed to
move system fluid to reservoir. Repeat.
3. Pump inlet vacuum. High inlet vacuum will create noise. A Inspect and replace filter as necessary.
dirty filter will increase the inlet vacuum. Check for proper suction line size.
4. Shaft couplings. A loose shaft coupling will cause exces- Replace loose shaft coupling in charge
sive noise. pump or replace pump or motor.
2. Multi-function valves’ pressure set- Incorrect pressure settings will affect Adjust or replace multi-function valves.
tings. system reaction time.
3. Pump inlet vacuum. High pump inlet vacuum will reduce Measure charge inlet vacuum. If high
system pressure. replace inlet filter.
4. Prime mover speed. Low engine speed will reduce system Adjust engine speed.
performance.
5. Charge and control pressures. Incorrect charge or control pressures Measure charge and control pressures
will affect system performance. and correct if necessary.
6. System internal leakage. Internal leakage will reduce system Check for leakage in O-rings, gaskets,
pressure. and other fittings.
30
Pump Adjustments
Charge Pressure Relief Valve Adjustment
WARNING
The following procedure may require the vehicle/
machine to be disabled (wheels raised off the ground,
work function disconnected, etc.) while performing
the procedure in order to prevent injury to the
technician and bystanders. Take necessary safety
precautions before moving the vehicle/machine.
S000 007E
90000243
Charge Pressure Gauge Port (Reducer fitting shown - if
filtration device attached)
1. To measure pump charge pressure, install a pres-
sure gauge in the pump charge pressure gauge port
(M3). Also install a gauge to measure case pressure
(tee into L1 or L2 or use servo gauge port). Operate
the system with the pump in “neutral” (zero displace-
ment) when measuring pump charge pressure. Nominal
90L055 EA 1 N Charge Pressure
2. The table shows the acceptable pump charge pres- 6 S 3 C6 C 03
sure range for some nominal charge relief valve HNN 35 35 24
settings (see sample model code at right). These
pressures assume 1500 pump rpm and a reservoir Model Code on Unit Name Plate (“24 bar”)
temperature of 50°C (120°F ), and are referenced to
case pressure (see footnote on next page). Smaller
displacement charge pumps will produce charge
pressure readings in the lower portion of the range, Model Code Measured Charge Pressure *
while larger displacement charge pumps will produce 18.1 bis 21.7 bar
readings in the higher portion of the range. 20
(262 to 315 psi)
22.0 bis 26.9 bar
24
(319 to 390 psi)
25.8 bis 30.7 bar
28
(374 to 445 psi)
T002 266E
* This is the actual charge pressure port gauge reading minus the
case pressure port gauge reading.
31
32
WARNING
Take necessary precautions that the motor shaft
remains stationary during the adjustment procedure.
S000 010E
90000258
Multi-Function Valves on PV
33
Do not overtorque.
90000261 9. Shut down the prime mover, remove the gauges and
Tighten Lock Nut install the gauge port plugs. Replace the plastic dust
plugs (if used).
34
1. Using a
the vehicle or otherwise causing the motor shaft to Multi-Function Valve with Bypass Function Engaged
turn, move the control handle of the manual displace-
ment control on the pump to the maximum full
forward position. Hold the handle in this position
during bypass valve operation.
Caution
"Tow" at extremely low speeds and for short
distances only.
S000 011E
35
36
Caution
Care should be taken in adjusting displacement
limiters to avoid undesirable flow or speed conditions.
The seal lock nut must be retorqued after every
adjustment to prevent an unexpected change in
operating conditions and to prevent external leakage
during unit operation.
S000 012E
90000268
Rotate Adjusting Screw
3. After establishing the desired maximum displace-
ment setting, tighten the lock nut on the adjusting
screw as follows.
37
90000237
Variable Displacement Pump with Standard Manual
Displacement Control
38
2. Loosen the lock nut on the neutral adjusting screw 90000357 90000358
with a 13 mm hex wrench. Rotate Neutral Adjusting Tighten Neutral Adjusting
Screw Screw Lock Nut
3. Using a 4 mm internal hex wrench, rotate the neutral
adjusting screw clockwise until the pressure increases
on one of the pressure gauges. Note the angular
position of the wrench.
39
Switch Lock Nut When the control input shaft is in its “neutral” position, the
inner end of the switch pin moves into a slot on the
Neutral Start Switch
eccentric cam attached to the control shaft. This allows
Eccentric Plug the spring loaded NSS to close, completing the electrical
Switch Pin starting circuit for the prime mover.
Special Lock Nut
for Eccentric Plug
When the control input shaft is NOT in its “neutral”
MDC with Neutral Start switch position, the eccentric cam moves the switch pin out of
the slot. This forces the NSS to open, breaking the
electrical starting circuit for the prime mover.
Turning the NSS clockwise (CW) into the special nut will
move the NSS closer to the switch cam on the control
Orifice Check Valve Seat shaft, and will narrow the NSS deadband. Turning the
Control Spool Assembly
Control Link Assembly
NSS counterclockwise (CCW) out of the special nut will
move the NSS farther from the switch cam on the control
View at Section A-A shaft, and will widen the NSS deadband.
90000830E
The switch pin is located in an eccentric plug which is
Components of the Standard Manual Displacement Control turned to move the center of the NSS deadband.
with Neutral Start Switch
(continued)
40
41
90000870
Checking Continuity of NSS (System Pressure Gauges
installed on far side)
42
WARNING Switch
Lock Nut
Do not start the prime mover while the neutral start Eccentric Plug
switch is removed from the control. Case pressure X
Switch Pin
will force the pin out of the eccentric plug, causing Special Lock Nut
oil loss. for Eccentric Plug Neutral Start Switch
S000 032E
MDC with Neutral Start Switch
View in Direction X
(Switch and lock nut removed)
90000833E
NSS with Eccentric Plug
(continued)
90000256 90000257
Loosen Eccentric Lock Nut NSS Removed
43
90000256
Adjust the Eccentric Plug
Caution
Do not turn the eccentric plug into or out of the
housing beyond specifications.
S000 014E
(continued)
44
WARNING
The following procedure may require the vehicle/
machine to be disabled (wheels raised off the ground,
work function disconnected, etc.) while performing
the procedure in order to prevent injury to the
technician and bystanders. Take necessary safety
precautions before moving the vehicle/machine.
S000 007E
45
WARNING
The following procedure may require the vehicle/
machine to be disabled (wheels raised off the ground,
work function disconnected, etc.) while performing
the procedure in order to prevent injury to the
technician and bystanders. Take necessary safety
precautions before moving the vehicle/machine.
S000 007E
90000241
PV with Electric Displacement Control
90000249
Install Gauges in Displacement Control Cylinder Gauge
Ports
46
90000355 90000356
Rotate Neutral Adjusting Tighten Neutral Adjusting
Shaft Shaft Lock Nut
(Current production HDC) (Current production HDC)
47
90000263 90000343
Shim Adjustable Charge Screw Adjustable Charge
Pressure Relief Valve Pressure Relief Valve
(Motor) (Motor)
48
Caution
The displacement limiters act as travel stops for the
swashplate. Do not turn the limiter screws
counterclockwise beyond the point of contact with
the swashplate for either the maximum or minimum
displacement position.
S000 015E
Caution
Care should be taken in adjusting displacement
limiters to avoid undesirable flow or speed
conditions. See corresponding section for speed
and pressure limits.
49
Speed Sensor 1. Loosen the sensor lock nut with an 1-1/16 inch hex
Magnetic Speed Ring wrench.
90000838E
Cross Section View of Speed Sensor in Variable Pump 2. Turn the sensor clockwise (CW) by hand until it
contacts the speed ring.
Gap
3. Turn the sensor counterclockwise (CCW) 1/2 turn
(180°) to establish the nominal gap of 0.71 mm
(0.028 inch).
90000840E
Cross Section View of Speed Sensor in Variable Motor
Shaft Centerline
1/2 in. Wrench Flats
22˚ 22˚
Shaft Centerline
1/2 in. Wrench Flats
22˚ 22˚
90000841E
Positioning Speed Sensor relative to Pump or Motor Shaft
50
Minor repairs may be performed, following the proce- items must be kept free of foreign materials and chemi-
dures in this section, without voiding the unit warranty. cals.
Although specific models are shown, these procedures
apply to all series and types of units in the Series 90 Protect all exposed sealing surfaces and open cavities
Family. from damage and foreign material.
Cleanliness is a primary means of ensuring satisfactory It is recommended that all gaskets and O-rings be
transmission life, on either new or repaired units. Clean- replaced when servicing. All gasket sealing surfaces
ing parts by using a solvent wash and air drying is must be cleaned prior to installing new gaskets. Lightly
adequate, providing clean solvent is used. As with any lubricate all O-rings with clean petroleum jelly prior to
precision equipment, the internal mechanism and related assembly.
51
Charge Pressure
Relief Valve
SAE-Flange PV
Loop Flushing
Valve
Loop Flushing
Valve
Shaft Shaft
Seal Seal
(Speed Sensor) (Speed Sensor)
Left Side View Left Side View
90000844E
SAE Flange MF Cartridge Flange MF
Control Orifices
Maximum Angle Control Orifices
Charge Pressure Displacement Limiter
Relief Valve Charge Pressure Maximum Angle
Relief Valve Displacement Limiter
Loop Flushing Loop Flushing
Valve Valve
Shaft Shaft
Seal Seal
Control Control
Minimum Angle
Minimum Angle Displacement Limiter
Displacement Limiter
52
If any plugs or fittings are removed from the pump or 7/16-20 O-ring 20 Nm
motor during servicing, they should be torqued as indi- 9/16 inch Hex Wrench (15 lbf ft)
cated in the accompanying table. 7/16-20 O-ring 12 Nm
3/16 inch Internal Hex Wrench (9 lbf ft)
Always install new O-rings before reinstalling the plugs or 9/16-18 O-ring 37 Nm
fittings. 11/16 inch Hex Wrench (27 lbf ft)
9/16-18 O-ring 23 Nm
1/4 inch Internal Hex Wrench (17 lbf ft)
3/4-16 O-ring 68 Nm
7/8 inch Hex Wrench (50 lbf ft)
3/4-16 O-ring 68 Nm
5/16 inch Internal Hex Wrench (50 lbf ft)
7/8-14 O-ring 95 Nm
Caution 1 inch Hex Wrench (70 lbf ft)
Plugs or fittings installed into aluminum housings 7/8-14 O-ring 68 Nm
should always be torqued to the lower values 3/8 inch Internal Hex Wrench (50 lbf ft)
specified for internal hex plugs of the same size. 1-1/16-12 O-ring 163 Nm
S000 017E 1 1/4 inch Hex Wrench (120 lbf ft)
1-1/16-12 O-ring 115 Nm
9/16 inch Internal Hex Wrench (85 lbf ft)
1-5/16-12 O-ring 190 Nm
1-1/2 inch Hex Wrench (140 lbf ft)
1-5/16-12 O-ring 129 Nm
5/8 inch Internal Hex Wrench (95 lbf ft)
1-5/8-12 O-ring 224 Nm
1-7/8 inch Hex Wrench (165 lbf ft)
T002 281E
53
90000846E
Series 90 Shaft Seal Components
54
Roller Bearing
8. Inspect the sealing area on the shaft for rust, wear, Assembly Retaining Ring
or contamination. Tapered
Shaft
If the shaft is not being replaced proceed to step Splined OR Roller Bearing
Shaft
12.
OR
9. Remove shaft and roller bearing assembly from
OR
pump or motor. The bearing assembly can be trans- Straight Key
ferred to the new shaft. Shaft
90000866E
10. Remove the retaining ring that secures roller bearing Fixed Motor Shaft Configuration
assembly with a snap ring pliers. Remove the roller
bearing assembly. Roller Bearing
Assembly Retaining Ring
11. Place roller bearing assembly on new shaft and Rollen Bearing
Splined OR
secure with the retaining ring. Shaft
Tapered
12. Wrap spline or key end of shaft with plastic film to Shaft
prevent damage to the sealing lip on the seal during OR
installation.
OR
13. Prior to assembly, lubricate the O-ring on the O.D. of
Straigt Key
the seal carrier and the I.D. of the seal with clean Shaft
petroleum jelly.
90000867E
14. Assemble the seal carrier and seal over the shaft and Variable Pump Shaft Configuration
into the housing bore. Install the retainer plate (if
used).
Roller Bearing
Assembly Retaining
15. Install the screws and torque like the tables. Ring
Splined
Pumps
Shaft
Frame Size Torque Pumps
OR
030 - 042 12 Nm (9 lbf ft) Tapered
055 - 100 16 Nm (12 lbf ft) Shaft
130 - 250 32 Nm (24 lbf ft)
T002 282E 90000868E
Variable Motor Shaft Configuration
Motors
90000274 90000275
Install Seal Carrier Torque Retainer Screw
55
Caution
The pressure settings must be readjusted after
disassembling the pressure limiter housing of the
multi-function valve cartridge.
Valve Seat S000 018E
Pressure Limiter Spring
Pressure Limiter Valve Poppet
Adjustment Screw Pressure Limiter 7. Install cartridge in multi-function valve cavity and torque.
Valve Poppet
Bypass
Frame Size Torque
Actuator
030 - 100 89 Nm (66 lbf ft)
90000869E
Multi-Function Valve Cartridge Sectional View 130 - 250 210 Nm (155 lbf ft)
T002 285E
56
Screws
Pressure Override Valve (Option for 180 Frame
Size) Pressure Override
Valve
1. Remove the four screws attaching the pressure
override valve to the pump end cap with a 5 mm O-rings
internal hex wrench. Remove the O-rings.
90000870E
1. Remove the shim adjustable charge relief valve plug
Pressure Override Valve Components
with a 1 inch hex wrench.
3. Inspect the poppet and mating seat in the end cap for
damage or foreign material.
57
90000281 90000303
Remove Auxiliary Pad Remove Auxiliary Pad
Adapter Screws Adapter
Caution
Do not allow the force of the cylinder block spring
and swashplate leveler springs to separate the end
cap from the pump housing. Gasket damage and
external leakage may result.
S000 019E
90000871E
Orienting Alignment Pin
58
Alignment Pin
Journal Bearing
Cover Retainer
Retainer Screw
90000873E
Charge Pump Components (Intermediate Production)
Alignment Pin
Charge Pump Assembly
Key
Shaft Port Plate
O-ring Eccentric Ring
Cover Gerotor Assembly
Journal Bearing
Cover Retainer
Retainer Screw
90000874E
Charge Pump Components (Late Production)
Spacer
Shaft
O-ring
Cover
Plug
Journal Bearing
Cover Retainer
Retainer Screw
90000875E
"No Charge Pump" Components
59
90000871E
Do not mix charge pump piece parts from differ-
Orienting Alignment Pin ent production periods. Always install as a com-
plete assembly.
90000285 90000286 5. Install the outer port plate (early production and
Install Inner Port Plate Install Gerotor Assembly intermediate production pumps only).
Outer Ring
6. Install the spacer plate, if present (intermediate
production pumps).
90000287 90000288
Install Alignment Pin Install Gerotor Assembly
90000289 90000290
Install Outer Port Plate Install Spacer Plate
(Early and intermediate (Intermediate production
production only) only)
60
Caution
In order to avoid loss of charge pressure in pumps
with an auxiliary mounting pad, always install the
charge pump cover with the pad drain hole located
on the same side of the end cap as the charge inlet
port. Refer to the section Auxiliary Pad Installation“ 90000293 90000294
for details. Alignment Pin Installed in Install Charge Pump Cover
S000 020E Cover
12. Install the charge pump cover retainer and the six hex
screws and torque the screws.
61
Cover Caution
Assembly
Coupling Do not allow the force of the cylinder block spring
Special Washer (Typical) and swashplate leveler springs to separate the end
Journal Bearing
End Cap cap from the pump housing. Gasket damage and
Screw O-ring external leakage may result.
S000 019E
auxiliary Pad
(Typical)
O-ring Cover Retainer
Retainer Screw
Auxiliary Pad Kit
Pad Cover 4. Take care to assure the surfaces are clean and free
Screw
of any foreign material or paint prior to installing the
auxiliary pad.
90000876E
Auxiliary Pad Components (Typical) 5. Install the auxiliary drive coupling onto the pump
drive shaft spline (auxiliary drive spline must be
toward the rear of the pump).
62
Caution
In order to avoid loss of charge pressure in pumps
with an auxiliary mounting pad, always install the
charge pump cover with the pad drain hole lo-
cated on the same side of the end cap as the
charge inlet port. Refer to the section "Auxiliary
Pad Installation" for details.
S000 020E 90000297 90000298
Install Drive Coupling Install Alignment Pin in
Cover (CCW rotation shown)
7. Install the charge pump cover retainer and the six hex
screws and torque the screws.
63
Caution
Failure to install the filter manifold or filter head to a
sufficient depth in the end cap will result in insufficient
engagement of the tube in the end cap bore. This may
allow unfiltered oil to bypass the filter and enter the
90000312 90000315 charge system.
Install Remote Pressure Install Integral Pressure S000 021E
Filter Manifold Filter Head
90000313 90000316
Tighten Remote Pressure Tighten Integral Pressure 5. After installing the integral pressure filter head as-
Filter Manifold Lock Nut Filter Head Lock Nut sembly, install the filter canister per the instructions
on the filter canister.
64
Cover Plate
Caution
Protect exposed surfaces and cavities from damage
and foreign material.
S000 022E 90000361
Pump with Cover Plate
NOTE
A sealing washer must be installed under the head of
any mounting screws that are installed into "thru"
holes in the housing.
S000 023E
65
Caution
Protect exposed surfaces and cavities from damage
and foreign material.
S000 022E
90000319 90000320
Remove Mounting Screws Remove Control 3. In preparation for installing the control, place a new
gasket on the housing. Inspect to assure that the
control orifice check valve and spring are in their
proper position in the control.
NOTE
A sealing washer must be installed under the head of
any mounting screws that are installed into "thru"
holes in the housing.
S000 023E
WARNING
The neutral start switch "neutral" must be read-
justed after reassembling the MDC module.
S000 024E
66
67
Caution
Protect exposed surfaces and cavities from damage
and foreign material.
S000 022E
68
Caution 90000362
Protect exposed surfaces and cavities from damage 3-Position Electric Control Components
and foreign material.
S000 022E
NOTE
A sealing washer must be installed under the head of
any mounting screws that are installed into thru“
holes in the housing.
S000 023E
3. Assemble the control onto the pump. Refer to the Orifice Plugs
instructions for the specific control.
Orifice Check Valve
90000849E
Underside of an HDC/EDC Module Showing Orifice
Locations
69
90000847
Displacement Control Adapter Plate (Early production
130cc Pumps only)
70
3. Inspect the poppet and mating seat in the end cap for
damage or foreign material. When inspecting shim 90000342 90000343
adjustable valves, do not alter the shims or inter- Remove Shim Charge Relief Remove Screw Charge Relief
change parts with another valve. Valve Valve
71
90000344 90000345
Shim Adjustable Charge Screw Adjustable Charge
Relief Valve Relief Valve
Spring
Plug with O-ring
(defeat)
Shoulder Washer
Shoulder Washer
Spring
O-ring
Plug
90000850E
Motor charge Relief Valve and Loop Flushing Valve Parts
72
Minimum Displacement
Caution Limiter Screw
Care should be taken in adjusting displacement Seal Lock Nut
limiters to avoid undesirable speed conditions. The
Tamper-Resistant Cap
seal lock nut must be retorqued after every
adjustment to prevent an unexpected change in SAE Flange Version shown
(cartridge Version similar)
operating conditions and to prevent external leakage
during unit operation.
S000 026E
90000851E
One full turn of the displacement limiter adjustment MV Displacement Limiters
screw will change the displacement as follows:
73
9. Install the solenoid onto the valve and torque the hex
90000852E nut to 5 Nm (44 lbf in). Do not overtorque the nut.
MV Control components
10. If previously removed, reinstall the orifice check
valve. Reconnect the external signal connection.
Control Plugs
90000853E
MV Control Plugs
74
Caution
Screen
Do not interchange the control supply orifice with the (pressed in)
minimum displacement orifice (next section).
S000 027E Orifice Body
O-ring
Cross-section View of
Control Supply Orifice Assembly
90000854E
MV Control Supply Orifice
O-ring O-ring
Orifice Seat
(Spot welded)
Cross-Section View of Cross-Section View of
Orifice Assembly Orifice / Check Valve
Assembly
90000855E
MV Minimum Displacement Orifice
75
1. Remove the seal lock nut with a 3/4 inch hex wrench.
Housing Plug Remove the maximum displacement cylinder orifice
check valve from the motor housing with a 1/4 inch
Seal Lock Nut
(seal toward housing) end wrench. Remove the O-ring. The check ball in
the valve must be free.
O-ring
2. Reinstall the check valve and torque to 15 Nm
Orifice / Check Valve Assembly
(11 lbf ft). Install a new O-ring. Install the seal lock
nut with the seal toward the motor housing.
Seal Lock Nut
(seal toward housing)
Hold the check valve from turning while torquing
the seal lock nut to 34 Nm (25 lbf•ft).
O-ring
3. If no orifice check valve is installed, the housing plug
Orifice Body may be removed with a 9/16 inch hex wrench. Always
install a new O-ring. Reinstall the plug and torque to
Check Ball
20 Nm (15 lbf ft).
Spring Pin
Cross-Section View of
Orifice / Check Valve
Assembly
90000856E
MV Maximum Displacement Orifice
76
2. Always install a new O-ring before installing the 1-1/16 in. hex wrench
Torque: 13 Nm (10 lbf ft)
sensor. After adjustment!
or
90000858E
Typical Location of Speed Sensor - MF
or
Speed Sensor
Housing Plug
1-1/16 in. hex wrench
Torque: 37 Nm (27 lbf ft)
90000859E
77
Variable Pumps
K90 L35
B70 K10 K018 (Early Production
bis 075 Frame Size) (L70)
B83 G532 K50 K042
OR G536 K70
B83 (L40) L60 L70
G542 K80
G546 (B80)
L40
B82 (B90) L30
P2B_
(B70)
B90
P30 P06
P13
L50
P30
B71
P2A_ P06
P13 G512
G516
G502
G506
G172
G522 G176
G526
B80
(G502
G506) (G502
G506)
(G63)
G63
(CODE 61 OPTION)
(G64)
G64
(CODE 61 OPTION) (K018
BOTH SIDES THRU
K042)
G531
G501
G538
G508
G511
G518
OR
G541
G548
G63
(CODE 61 OPTION)
G521
G528
(G63)
(G501
G508) (G64)
G64
(G501
(CODE 61 OPTION)
G508)
90000860E
78
79
M0DC
M90D M1DC M0DD
M1DD
OR
M11D
M0MA M0ME
M0MB M0MF
M0MC M0MG
M0MD M0M9 M0CA
M9ME M76M M74M M90C
M78M M1CA M87C
M92M M11C
M97M M77M
M95M M98M M75M
M96M S40
M72M
M90M
M71M
M1MA M880 OR
M1MB M7MA
T201
M1MC M7MB
THRU
T001 M1MD M7MC
T209, M0EA
THRU M1ME M7MD
T222 M0EF M91E
T009, M1MF M7ME
T250 M0EP
T022 M1MG M7MF
T050 T301 M7MG
THRU T401
M87M M11M M9EA M98E
T309, THRU
M9EP
T322 T409, M90E M95E
T422 M97E
T350
T450 M1EA M880
M1EF
M870
M1EP M96E
M860
M11E
M850
M840 M87E
M840 M810
REF
M830 M840
M820
REF
(Early Production
130 cc Frame Size)
OR
M1HA, M1HC
OR
M1HF, M1HG
M90H
M1HH, M1HJ
M880
M1HK, M1HL M87H
M1HM, M1HN
90000861E
80
M0CA ........... Cover plate kit ......................................... 1 M71M ........... Washer .................................................... 1
M1CA ........... Cover plate .............................................. 1 M72M ........... Nut ........................................................... 1
M11C ........... Control gasket ......................................... 1 M80 .............. Control gasket ......................................... 1
M11D ........... Control gasket ......................................... 1 M87M ........... Washer, seal (042) ................................. 1
M87C ........... Washer, seal (042) ................................. 1 M90M ........... Screw ...................................................... 6
M90C ........... Screw ...................................................... 6 S40 ............... Neutral start switch kit ............................. 1
M0DC ........... Control kit, 3-position FNR 12V .............. 1 M0MC .......... Control MDC w/ sol. valve ...................... 1
M0DD ........... Control kit, 3-position FNR 24V .............. 1 M7M ............. Control handle ......................................... 1
M1DC ........... Control, 3-position FNR 12V ................... 1 M71M ........... Washer .................................................... 1
M1DD ........... Control, 3-position FNR 24V ................... 1 M72M ........... Nut ........................................................... 1
M80 .............. Control gasket ......................................... 1 M74M ........... Solenoid valve ......................................... 1
M87D ........... Washer, seal (042) ................................. 1 M75M ........... Control manifold ...................................... 1
M90D ........... Screw ...................................................... 6 M77M ........... Manifold gasket ....................................... 1
M78M ........... Screw ...................................................... 2
M0EA ........... Control kit, EDC with M80 .............. Control gasket ......................................... 1
MS connector .......................................... 1 M87M ........... Washer, seal (042) ................................. 1
M0EP ........... Control kit, EDC with M90M ........... Screw ...................................................... 6
Packard connector .................................. 1
M1EA ........... Control, EDC with M0MD .......... Control MDC w/ sol. valve and
MS-connector .......................................... 1 neutral start switch .................................. 1
M1EP ........... Control, EDC with M7M ............. Control handle ......................................... 1
Packard-connector .................................. 1 M71M ........... Washer .................................................... 1
M9EA ........... PCP type 3 oil filled (MS) ........................ 1 M72M ........... Nut ........................................................... 1
M9EA ........... PCP type 3 oil filled (Packard) ................ 1 M75M ........... Control manifold ...................................... 1
M80 .............. Control gasket ......................................... 1 M76M ........... Solenoid valve ......................................... 1
M87E ............ Washer, seal (042) ................................. 1 M77M ........... Manifold gasket ....................................... 1
M90E ............ Screw ...................................................... 6 M78M ........... Screw ...................................................... 2
M91E ............ Plastic cap (MS) ...................................... 1 M80 .............. Control gasket ......................................... 1
M95E ............ O-ring ...................................................... 2 M87M ........... Washer, seal (042) ................................. 1
M96E ............ O-ring ...................................................... 1 M90M ........... Screw ...................................................... 6
M97E ............ O-ring ...................................................... 1 S40 ............... Neutral start switch ................................. 1
M98E ............ Screw ...................................................... 4
M1MA ........... Servovalve kit .......................................... 1 M810 ............ Adapter plate - Control (130 cc) ............. 1
M820 ............ O-ring (130 cc) ........................................ 1
M0HA ........... Control kit, hydraulic, HDC ..................... 1 M830 ............ O-ring (130 cc) ........................................ 1
M0HC ........... Control kit, hydraulic, HDC ..................... 1 M840 ............ O-ring (130 cc) ........................................ 2
M1HA ........... Control, hydraulic, HDC .......................... 1 M850 ............ Plug (130 cc) ........................................... 1
M1HC ........... Control, hydraulic, HDC .......................... 1 M860 ............ Screw (130 cc) ........................................ 6
M11H ........... Control gasket ......................................... 1 M870 ............ Plug (130 cc) ........................................... 1
M80 .............. Control gasket ......................................... 1
M87H ........... Washer, seal (042) ................................. 1 M9ME ........... 4/2 Way valve ......................................... 1
M90H ........... Screw ...................................................... 6 M92M ........... Screw ...................................................... 4
M95M ........... O-ring ...................................................... 1
M0MA ........... Control MDC M96M ........... O-ring ...................................................... 1
w/o neutral start switch ........................... 1 M97M ........... O-ring ...................................................... 1
M7M ............. Control handle ......................................... 1 M98M ........... Screw ...................................................... 4
M71M ........... Washer .................................................... 1
M72M ........... Nut ........................................................... 1 T001-9 .......... Control orifice kit ..................................... 1
M80 .............. Control gasket ......................................... 1 T201-9 .......... Orificed check valve ................................ 1
M87M ........... Washer, seal (042) ................................. 1 T301-9 .......... Spring ...................................................... 1
M90M ........... Screw ...................................................... 6 T401-9 .......... Spring retainer ......................................... 1
N40P
N40L
N00M
N00S
N35M
REF N35S
N10M
N10S
N30R N35M N25M Or
N00R
N20M
N10R N15M
N31R
N20R OR
N15R
N35R N25R
90000862E
H50L
H50
H40
OR H05
H30
H60
H50
H40
H30
OR H05
(H30)
J80N
H40
H60 H05
H50 OR
H60
H50
H90L
J40N
J15N
H70 J15_
J30 J10_
J30
H80 J70_
H70
OR
J80_ J50_
J60_
J90_ H80
J00_
J92_
J95_
90000863E
82
H05B-H ........ Kit - Charge pump ................................... 1 J80A-V ......... Screw ...................................................... 4
H50L ............ Spacer (No charge pump) ...................... 1 J80N ............. Screw ...................................................... 4
H30 .............. Port plate ................................................. 2 J90A-V ......... O-ring ...................................................... 1
H40 .............. Pin ........................................................... 1 J92A-V ......... Cover plate .............................................. 1
H50 .............. Charge pump shaft ................................. 1 J95A-V ......... Screw ................................................... 2/4
H60 .............. Key .......................................................... 1
H70 .............. Retaining plate ........................................ 1 N00M ........... Filtration manifold kit (Int) ....................... 1
H80 .............. Screw ...................................................... 6 N10M ........... Manifold ................................................... 1
H90L ............ Plug ......................................................... 1 N15M ........... O-ring ...................................................... 2
N20M ........... Nut ........................................................... 1
J00A ............. Aux. mtg. SAE A flange .......................... 1 N25M ........... Tube ........................................................ 1
J00B ............. Aux. mtg. SAE B flange .......................... 1 N35M ........... Plug ......................................................... 2
J00C ............. Aux. mtg. SAE C flange .......................... 1 N40L ............ Filter ........................................................ 1
J00D ............. Aux. mtg. SAE D flange .......................... 1 N40P ............ Filter ........................................................ 1
J00T ............. Aux. mtg. SAE A flange (11 T) ............... 1
J00V ............. Aux. mtg. SAE B-B flange ....................... 1 N00R ............ Filtration manifold kit (Rmt) ..................... 1
J00N ............. Aux. mtg. flange - none .......................... 1 N10R ............ Manifold ................................................... 1
J10A-V ......... Coupling .................................................. 1 N15R ............ O-ring ...................................................... 1
J15 ............... Charge pump cover assembly ................ 1 N20R ............ Nut ........................................................... 1
J15N ............. Charge pump cover assembly ................ 1 N25R ............ Tube ........................................................ 1
J30 ............... Bushing ................................................... 1 N30R ............ Plastic plug .............................................. 2
J50A-V ......... O-ring ...................................................... 1 N35R ............ Plug ......................................................... 1
J60A/T .......... Flange adaptor SAE A ............................ 1
J60B/V ......... Flange adaptor SAE B ............................ 1 N00S ............ Filtration kit (Suction Flt) ......................... 1
J60C ............. Flange adaptor SAE C ............................ 1 N10S ............ Reducer fitting (Suction Flt) .................... 1
J60D ............. Flange adaptor SAE D ............................ 1 N35S ............ Plug ......................................................... 1
J70A-V ......... Washer .................................................... 4
Name Plates
Ames, Iowa, U.S.A. Neumünster, Germany Ames, Iowa, U.S.A. Neumünster, Germany
Model Code Typ Model Code Typ
90L055 EA 1 N 90L055 EA 1 N
Model Model
6 S 3 C6 C 03 6 S 3 C6 C 03 Code
Code
Model No. Ident Nr Model No. Ident Nr
Model Number Model Number 687459
94 – 2029
Serial Number Serial Number
Serial No. Fabr Nr Serial No. Fabr Nr
MADE IN U.S.A. MADE IN GERMANY
83
H68W
H60W L35
(Early Production
H62W 075 Frame Size) (L70)
H64W
(L40) L60 L70
H66W
H60N L30
L40
(H50N) (B80)
(G50)
(H50W) (H30W)
L50
(H40W)
(H20W)
G50
G70
H10N (B80)
H50N
H20W
(G63)
B80 H10W H40W
G63
H30W
(CODE 61 OPTION)
H50W
(G64) G64
(CODE 61 OPTION)
B83 B83 OR
B80
G63
(CODE 61 OPTION)
(G63)
G64
(CODE 61 OPTION) (B83)
(G64) (B83)
90000864E
84
Name Plates
Ames, Iowa, U.S.A. Neumünster, Germany Ames, Iowa, U.S.A. Neumünster, Germany
Model Code Typ Model Code Typ
90M055 NC 0 N 90M055 NC 0 N
8 N 0 C6 W 00 Model Model
8 N 0 C6 W 00
Code Code
NNN 00 00 24 NNN 00 00 24
Model No. Ident Nr Model No. Ident Nr
Model Number 94 – 2029 Model Number 312918
Serial Number A – 91 – 26 – 67890 Serial Number N – 91 – 26 – 67890
Serial No. Fabr Nr Serial No. Fabr Nr
MADE IN U.S.A. MADE IN GERMANY
85
Y100 Y102
Y101
L35
Y40 (Early Production
075 Frame Size) (L70)
Y50
Y60 L70
E15 L60
E35 E26 (Y50) (L40)
L30
L40
B83
(B74)
B80
B83 L50
B76
H68W T100
T101
T30
H60W T40
(B74) T50
H62W T60
H64W (T50)
H10W
H20W
H30W
(G63) H40W H50W
G63
(G64) (CODE 61 OPTION)
P800
G64
(CODE 61 OPTION)
90000865E
86
H10N ............ Loop flushing spool - defeat .................... 1 T30 ............... Filter screen ............................................ 1
H50N ............ Plug ......................................................... 2 T40 ............... O-ring ...................................................... 1
H60N ............ Plug ......................................................... 1 T50 ............... Backup ring ............................................. 2
T60 ............... O-ring ...................................................... 1
H10W ........... Shuttle valve spool .................................. 1 T100 ............. Orifice plug .............................................. 1
H20W ........... Spring guide ............................................ 2
H30W ........... Spring ...................................................... 2 Y40 ............... O-ring ...................................................... 1
H40W ........... O-ring ...................................................... 2 Y50 ............... Backup ring ............................................. 2
H50W ........... Plug ......................................................... 2 Y60 ............... O-ring ...................................................... 1
H60W ........... Charge relief valve plug .......................... 1 Y70 ............... Orifice check valve .................................. 1
H62W ........... O-ring ...................................................... 1 Y71 ............... Nut - Seal Lock ....................................... 1
H64W ........... Spring ...................................................... 1 Y72 ............... O-ring ...................................................... 1
H66W ........... Charge relief poppet ............................... 1 Y80 ............... Plug ......................................................... 1
H68W ........... Lock nut ................................................... 1 Y100 ............. Orifice plug .............................................. 1
Y102 ............. Orifice check valve .................................. 1
L8 ................. Key .......................................................... 1
L9 ................. Slotted nut ............................................... 1
Name Plate
90S055 NB 2 0
8 N 4 S1 W 01 Model Code
NNN 01 00 24
Model No. Ident Nr
Model Number 94 – 4002
Serial Number A – 91 – 26 – 67890
Serial No. Fabr Nr
MADE IN U.S.A.
Place of Manufacture
Name Plate (U.S.A. Production)
87
Heavy Duty Axial Piston Heavy Duty Bent Axis Cartridge Motors/
Pumps and Motors Variable Motors Compact Wheel Drives
F000 685 F000 688 F000 690 F000 684
Open Circuit Axial Piston Pumps Gear Pumps and Motors Genuine Service Parts
Original
Ersatzteile http://www.sauer-danfoss.com
Genuine Parts
Series 42
Axial Piston
Pumps
Service Instructions
Series 42 Introduction
1. Introduction
WARNING WARNING
When Series 42 units are used in vehicular Use caution when dealing with hydraulic fluid
hydrostatic drive systems, the loss of hydro- under pressure. Escaping hydraulic fluid un-
static drive line power in any mode of opera- der pressure can have sufficient force to pen-
tion (e.g. acceleration, deceleration or “neu- etrate your skin causing serious injury. This
tral” mode) may cause a loss of hydrostatic fluid may also be hot enough to burn. Serious
braking capacity. A braking system which is infection or reactions can develop if proper
independent of the hydrostatic transmission medical treatment is not administered immedi-
must, therefore, be provided which is adequate ately.
to stop and hold the system should the con-
dition develop. Flammable Cleaning Solvents
Series 42 Introduction
Contents
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 2
1.1 Using This Manual................................................................................................................................. 2
1.2 Safety Precautions ................................................................................................................................ 2
2. Model Code
Refer to the model code exhibited on the unit's name plate for information regarding the configuration of the unit.
A B C D E F G H J K L M N P
1 2 1234 123 12 34
A Series 42 x1 = Fast
E Control Response Time x2 = Medium
L = CCW
B 1 Rotation x3 = Slow
R = CW
F 1 Port Style A,J,P = SAE Threaded O-Ring Boss
28 = 28 cm3 (1.71 in3)
2 Displacement
41 = 41 cm3 (2.50 in3) N = None
2 Loop Flushing/Cooling
2,3 = Loop Flushing/Cooling Shuttle
C = 13T 16/32P Spline
D = 15T 16/32P Spline N = None (Ext. Charge Supply)
C Input Shaft Configurations E = 19T 16/32P Spline A = Suction (No Adapter Plate)
3 Filtration
G = 1.000 in. O.D. Straight Keyed C = Remote Pressure (Partial Flow)
K = 1.000 in. O.D. Tapered (1.5 in/ft) G = Suction (Adapter Plate)
N = None N = None
G 1 Charge Pump
A = MDC, Linear, Low Force 2 = 11 cm3/rev (0.67 in3/rev)
C = MDC, Non-Linear, Low Force C = 14 bar (205 psi)
D 1 Control Type 2 Charge Relief Setting
E = EDC (Electric Displacmt Contrl) F = 20 bar (280 psi)
F = FNR (3-Pos Forwrd-Neut-Revrs)
G = NFP (Non-Feedback Proport'l) N = None
3 Special Drive Features
1 = NFP
N = None or Not Applicable
1 = NSS / Weatherpack for MDC, N = None
or PCP Style for EDC A = SAE-A, 9 Tooth
4 Rear Auxilliary Mounting Pad
NSS for MDC or 12V Electric for NFP B = SAE-B, 13 Tooth
or PCP for EDC 2 = 12 V DIN for FNR T = SAE-A Special, 11 Tooth
2
or Connector for FNR 3 = NSS+BAS / CW Handle Rot. NN = Check Valve only, No HPRV
or Style for NFP / Weatherpack for MDC 14 = 140 bar (2030 psi)
or Hydraulic for NFP High Pressure Relief Setting - 17 = 175 bar (2450 psi)
H
5 = NSS+BAS / CCW Handle Rot. Port "A" 19 = 190 bar (2755 psi)
/ Weatherpack for MDC 21 = 210 bar (3045 psi)
N = None or Not Applicable 23 = 230 bar (3330 psi)
A = 12V Override / Weather Pack, 25 = 250 bar (3625 psi)
Solenoid Override with MDC 28 = 280 bar (4060 psi)
or EDC Input = 14-85 mA High Pressure Relief Setting -
3 or EDC Input J 30 = 300 bar (4350 psi)
or 400 - 1200 mA or 5-20 bar Port "B"
or Inching/Braking for NFP 34 = 345 bar (5000 psi)
for NFP
E = 12V Override / Brake Port 00 = No HPRV, No Check Valves
N = None or Not Applicable N = None
K Loop Bypass Valve
1,6 = Standard Handle fpr MDC B = Yes
Handle for MDC
or M/S Connector for EDC L Displacement Limiters - Side 1 N, 0 = None
4 or Connector for EDC
or Amp Connector for NFP A, 1 = Yes, Set at Max Disp
or Connector for NFP M Displacement Limiters - Side 2
2,5 = Clevis Handle for MDC
or Weather Pack for EDC N Special Hardware Features NNN = None
P Special Non-Hardware Features NNN = None
Filtration Options
Auxiliary (No Filtration Adapter Shown Here) Charge Relief Valve
Mounting Pad (Loop Flushing
Valve)
Left Side View (Side "2") Right Side View (Side "1")
P100101 E
Auxiliary
Mounting Filtration Options
Pad Charge Relief Valve (No Filtration Adapter
(Loop Flushing Valve)
Shown Here)
Left Side View (Side "2") Right Side View (Side "1")
P100102 E
Proper servicing of pumps and motors requires that ments. The following outlines show the locations of
pressure be measured and monitored at various the various gauge ports. The tables show the recom-
points in the hydraulic circuit. The Series 42 pump mended gauge size and the fitting size for each port.
has several locations at which to take these measure- Refer to this page when installing pressure gauges.
Left Side View (Side "2") Right Side View (Side "1")
P100103 E
System
Pressure
Port A
Case Drain Charge Pump
Port L1 Inlet Port S
System Pressure
Gauge Port M1
Left Side View (Side "2") Right Side View (Side "1") P100104 E
To Filter, Port D
(Pressure Filtration)
Charge Pressure
Gauge Port M3
(Full Flow Pressure Filtration)
Charge Pressure
Gauge Port M3
(Suction Filtration)
P100105 E
Servo Gage
Port M4
11/16 in Hex
27-47 Nm
(20-35 ft lbf)
11/16 in Hex
System Ports 27-47 Nm
A and B (20-35 ft lbf)
115 Nm (85 ft lbf)
E100001 E
WARNING
The following procedure requires the vehicle /
machine to be disabled (wheels raised off the
Pump "Neutral"
ground, work function disconnected, etc.) while Adjustment Screw
performing the procedure in order to prevent
injury to the technician and bystanders.
IMPORTANT
If the pump is equipped with an MDC or EDC,
the CONTROL "neutral" adjustment MUST also
be performed before putting the pump into
service (see next section).
WARNING
The following procedure requires the vehicle /
machine to be disabled (wheels raised off the
ground, work function disconnected, etc.) while
performing the procedure in order to prevent
injury to the technician and bystanders.
3. Start the prime mover and operate at normal Control Neutral Adjustment Screw
speed. (EDC Control Shown)
4. Loosen the CONTROL "neutral" adjustment seal
lock nut (see drawing) [17 mm Hex] . Turn the
control "neutral" adjustment screw [5 mm Int.
Hex] until the servo piston pressure gauge read-
ings are as close to equal as possible.
5. Turn the adjustment screw clockwise until one of
the gauges registers an increase in pressure on
the servo piston. Note the position of the adjust-
ment screw.
Turn the screw counterclockwise until the other
gauge registers an increase in pressure on the
servo piston. Note the position of the adjustment
screw.
6. Turn the adjustment screw clockwise to a posi-
tion halfway between the positions noted above.
The servo piston pressure gauges should indi-
cate nearly equal pressures.
7. While holding the adjustment screw in position,
torque the seal lock nut [14-24 Nm (10-18 ft lbf)].
8. Stop the prime mover and remove the pressure
gauges installed in gauge ports M4 and M5.
Reinstall the plugs in the gauge ports.
9. Reconnect the external control linkage (for MDC)
or control signal input (for EDC) to the pump.
Reconnect the work function.
10
CAUTION E100004 E
The control orifices are part of the control
gasket. Refer to the appropriate Service Parts MDC Control Module Assembly
List to determine the correct gasket.
WARNING
Failure to properly engage the link pin with the
control cam will result in incorrect control
operation, which may lead to loss of control of
the vehicle / machine.
F100201
Link Pin Into Cam Slot
11
CAUTION
The control orifices are part of the control
Control Retaining
gasket. Refer to the appropriate Service Parts Screws (note different sizes)
List to determine the correct gasket.
WARNING
Failure to properly engage the link pin with
control piston fork will result in incorrect con- E100006 E
trol operation, which may lead to loss of con-
trol of the vehicle / machine. EDC Control Module Assembly
12
4. Install and torque the control spool bore plug [41- Fork on summing link
must engage flats on
94 Nm (30-70 ft lbf)]. Or install the control spool
Slot in "neutral" adjust link control spool
cover (with a new gasket) or plug, and torque the must engage groove in
screws [15-17 Nm (11-13 ft lbf)]. adjusting screw E100008 E
5. Install the summing link. Hold the control spool in Servo Piston Linkage and Control Spool
position while engaging the fork on the summing (Internal Parts Shown with Housing Removed)
link with the flats on the spool. If necessary, rotate
the spool to engage the summing link.
6. Install a new control gasket. Hold the summing
link and control spool in position while reinstalling
the MDC or EDC (see section 4.4 or 4.5). Perform
Control Neutral Adjustment (section 4.3).
13
The Neutral Start Switch (NSS) prevents the engine NSS Cover
and pump from being started when the pump is out of NSS Control Nut
neutral. The NSS should be wired in series with the
NSS Cam
engine starting circuit. The switch contact is closed at
the control handle's neutral position and opens when
the control handle is rotated 1.5 to 2° from neutral.
The Backup Alarm Switch (BUA) outputs an elec- NSS Cavity
tronic signal when the control handle is in a reverse
position. This switch is normally wired in series with
an audio output. The switch contact is open until the NSS with
control handle is rotated 2.6 to 3.75° in the reverse Weatherpack
direction.
CAUTION
The control handle's neutral position must
NSS with Screw
agree with the pump's neutral position for the Terminals
NSS/BUA to work effectively (see section 4.3).
E100009 E
The Neutral Start / Backup Alarm Switch assembly
can be configured for three different settings. NSS Assembly on MDC
i. A Neutral Start Switch only.
ii. A Neutral Start Switch with Backup Alarm for
units where clockwise (CW) handle rotation re-
sults in "reverse" motion.
iii. A Neutral Start Switch with Backup Alarm for Control
units where counterclockwise (CCW) handle ro- Yolk Cam
tation results in "reverse" motion.
The setting must be in accordance with the configu-
ration of the unit. See the model code (section 2) if
NSS only NSS with BUA NSS with BUA
uncertain of the type of NSS you have.
(CW = Reverse) (CCW = Reverse)
Alignment of the NSS requires a special alignment P100107 E
tool. Dimensions are given at right. Top View of NSS Showing Cam Positions
35.0
1.250
.306 .354
2.000
14
15
Installation
Washer
1. Replace O-ring. Retaining Ring
2. Place spring and plunger inside of solenoid.
Solenoid
3. Attach spool (male notch) to plunger (female
notch).
O-Ring
4. Insert solenoid/spool assembly in solenoid over- Spring
ride bore. Plunger
5. Snap retaining ring over base of solenoid.
Spool
6. Place washer at base of solenoid.
7. Install housing and retaining nut [2-4 Nm (1.5-3.5
ft lbf)].
E100011 E
16
the NFPH are located in the NFPH ports. Orifice Position of NFPH Ports
plugs may be cleaned or replaced.
Note: Future models may contain orifice plate
Control Solenoid
between module and pump housing.
Control Module
Removal and Installation of FNR and NFPE
Modules
1. Clean pump and module housings.
2. Remove four (4) screws retaining module to
housing [4 mm Int. Hex], and remove module Control Ports
from pump housing. Locator Pin
E100014 E
17
CAUTION
The relief valves are factory set and should not
be tampered with, except for replacing the
entire valve.
CAUTION
The conical springs MUST be correctly posi-
tioned on the check poppets or relief valves
after installation for proper pump operation. E100015 E
18
19
20
21
6. Inspect the seal carrier and the new seal for Shaft Seal Components
damage. Inspect the sealing area on the shaft for
rust, wear, or contamination. Polish the sealing
area on the shaft if necessary. O-Ring
Press Seal
to bottom of Seal Carrier
E100020 E
22
E100021 E
Shaft Components
23
24
25
26
Geroter
Cavity
Outlet Plug
(Charge Charge
Pump Defeat) Inlet
Charge Pump
Charge Pump Inlet Plug Inlet Plug
Charge Inlet
(For Wrench Sizes
and Torquing
See Filtration Section)
E100024 E
27
4.16 Filtration
Filtration of foreign matter from the hydraulic fluid is M3 Gauge Partial Flow
of primary importance. Dirt and foreign fluids within Port Plug Pressure
Filtration
the hydraulic circuit will greatly reduce the life of the
Full Flow
hydraulic equipment. Pressure
Filtration
Filter-Related Pump Hardware Filtration Plate
Retaining Screws
Filtration mechanisms for the Series 42 pump may
be before (suction filtration) or after (charge pressure Suction
Filtration
filtration) the charge pump. Sauer-Sundstrand pro-
vides a filtration adapter to provide for each type of
filtration configuration. If filtration is provided for
elsewhere in the hydraulic circuit, the pump will not
have a filtration adapter.
Pumps equipped with housings without filtration
adapters have an additional construction bore next to
the charge relief valve which is unused and plugged
[5/8 in Hex, 21-33 Nm (15-25 ft lbf)]. When these
pumps are equipped with suction filtration, the exter-
nal charge inlet is plugged [5/16 in Int. Hex, 41-94 Nm
(30-70 ft lbf)].
Pumps equipped with housings that include filtration
adapters have the appropriate adapter and gasket
fastened to the housing with screws [Torx T30, 16
Nm (12 ft lbf)]. The position of the M3 gauge port [11/ Housing with
16 in Hex, 11-13 Nm (8-10 ft lbf)] will vary depending Filtration Adapter
on filtration type.
Filter Specifications
Charge Inlet
The selection of a filter depends on a number of
Plug
factors including the contaminant ingression rate,
the generation of contaminants in the system, the Plug
Construction
required fluid cleanliness, and the desired mainte- Bore Plug
nance interval. A filter capable of controlling the fluid
cleanliness to ISO 4406 Class 18/13 or better is
recommended and may be located either on the inlet
(suction filtration) or discharge (charge pressure
filtration) side of the charge pump. E100025 E
Housing without
Filter capacity depends on desired maintenance Filtration Adapter (Suction Filtration Only)
levels. As a rough guide, a capacity in grams equal
to twice the charge flow in gpm or 1/2 charge flow in
l/min has been found to be satisfactory for many Filtration Type β-ratio
closed circuit systems. Closed Circuit Suction Filtration or
β10 ≥ 2
Open Circuit Return Line Filtration
Filter efficiency as measured by a "Beta" (β) ratio* Systems Sharing a Reservoir with
should be as in the table at right. β10 ≥ 10
Other Gears, Clutches, or Cylinders
See Sauer-Sundstrand publication BLN-9887 or Charge Pressure Filtration β10 ≥ 10
697581 and ATI-E 9201 for more information on
* Filter ßx-ratio is a measure of filter efficiency defined by ISO
filtration. 4572. It is defined as the ratio of the number of particles greater
than a given size (x) upstream of the filter to number of particles
greater than the same size downstream of the filter. The ßx-ratio
applies to a specific particle size, measured in microns.
28
CAUTION
Performance of the above procedure may ad-
just the position of the displacement limiter
somewhat.
29
WARNING
Care should be taken in adjusting displace-
ment limiters to avoid undesirable speed con-
ditions. The limiter screw must have full thread
engagement in the servo piston cover, and the
seal lock nut must be retorqued after every
adjustment to prevent unexpected changes in
operating conditions and external leakage dur-
ing unit operation.
Displacement Limiter – Right Side (Side "1")
1. Mount pump on test stand. (Exploded View, No Need to Remove Limiter or Nut)
2. Loosen displacement limiter seal lock nut [13 mm
Hex]. Do not remove.
Displacement Limiter
3. Adjust displacement limiter [4 mm Int. Hex]. Seal Lock Nut
Tighten the seal lock nut every time the pump
Displacement
is to be tested [20-26 Nm (15-19 ft lbf)].
Limiter
One full turn of the displacement limiter adjust-
ment screw will change the displacement of the Servo Piston
Cover
pump approximately as follows.
30
F096
C020
C017
C018
C015
C005
C002
C003
C001
C015 F001
OR
C001
OR
C001
E100028
31
(F086)
(F086A)
(F043)
(F043A)
(F040)
(F042)
(F043)
(F043A)
(F040) OR
(F042)
F043
F043A OR K001
F040 OR K001
F042
K005
F091 K001A
K002
F091A K001B
F030 K001C K006
F030A K007
G043
F041
G042
G040 K008
G040A G043 K009
G041 G042 K010
G041
G040A
G040
OR
J005
J002
045A F062
G045 F061 J003
F063 H005
F060A
F060 H002
H003
OR F051 F0511
(F060A)
(F060) F0512
F0513
F0514
F0515
F050A
F050 (F091A)
F093
(F091)
OR F093A
F093
(F051)
(F050A) F093A
(F050) N002A
N002
E100029
32
L010
L010A
F020
F020A
G005
G010
(G075)
G015
G002 G020
(G021)
G022
G065
G075
G030 G023
F009
G001
M001
OR
(M001)
OR
(G001)
M005
M010A
G036
M010
(M005) OR
(M010A)
(M010) (G080)
G085
M020
M025
(G090)
(G036) (G080)
(G085)
E100030
33
D038 D039
D037
D081
D003
D003A
(D017)
D080 D082 D019
D016
D002 OR
OR
D056 D017
D040
D010
F035 D012
F035
F034 D081
D081
OR
D060
(F010)
F010
D090
D014
D015
D032A
E100031
D032
34
35
Heavy Duty Axial Piston Heavy Duty Bent Axis Cartridge Motors/
Pumps and Motors Variable Motors Compact Wheel Drives
Open Circuit Axial Piston Pumps Gear Pumps and Motors Genuine Service Parts
http://www.sauer-danfoss.com
02 05 08 11 18
MS
MSE
Störungsbeseitigung
Trouble Shooting
Wartungsarbeiten
Maintenance
Reparaturen
Repairs
5767
Ersatzteile
Spare Parts
5763 5765
0549 5766 0545
5764
0550 0547
General information.
Allgemeine Information.
POCLAIN HYDRAULICS kann nicht für Vorfälle haftbar gemacht wer- POCLAIN HYDRAULICS designs products that are integrated by its
den, die auf die Anwendung der in diesem Dokument empfohlenen Ver- customers in the machines they design.
fahren zurückgehen.
POCLAIN HYDRAULICS ist nicht verantwortlich für die Konstruktion Subsequently POCLAIN HYDRAULICS disclaims liability for conse-
und die Betriebsbedingungen der Maschinen und Systeme, die mit PH- quences of improper integration of its products and of improper set-up
Produkten ausgestattet sind. Ebenso ist POCLAIN HYDRAULICS we- of adjustable devices. In the same way, POCLAIN HYDRAULICS may
der für die Folgen eines falschen Einbaus der Produkte noch für ein fal- not be liable for incomplete or improper operating and maintenance in-
sches Parametrieren einstellbarer Werte, noch für ungültige oder unvoll- structions provided to the end user by the machine manufacturer nor for
ständige Gebrauchs- und Wartungsanweisungen, die den Endverbrau- failures resulting from operations performed by any person using these
chern von den Maschinenherstellern zur Verfügung gestellt worden sind, suggested procedures.
verantwortlich. A re-certification of the machine may be required for every change in
Jegliche Änderung einstellbarer Parameter der PH Produkte kann eine set-up of adjustable devices.
Neuzulassung der Maschinen erforderlich machen.
Mit dem Ziel, den besten Service zu bieten, empfiehlt POCLAIN HY- In order to offer the best quality service, POCLAIN HYDRAULICS rec-
DRAULICS seinen Kunden, jede Anwendung von POCLAIN HY- ommends to its customers to have applications approved by POCLAIN
DRAULICS prüfen und freigeben zu lassen. HYDRAULICS.
Das Öffnen der Produkte führt zum Garantieverlust. Verwenden Sie nur Opening of products voids the warranty contract.
Original-Ersatzteile von POCLAIN HYDRAULICS. Die Montage von Use only POCLAIN HYDRAULICS genuine spare parts. Using parts
Teilen anderen Ursprungs könnte den Betrieb des Bauteils und des Sy- from different sources could reduce the performance of the product and
stems sowie die Sicherheit beeinträchtigen. pose a safety hazard..
Stets um die Verbesserung seiner Erzeugnisse bemüht, behält sich In accordance with its policy of continuous improvement, POCLAIN
POCLAIN HYDRAULICS das Recht vor, ohne vorherige Ankündigung HYDRAULICS reserves the right to modify the specifications of all
alle Änderungen vorzunehmen, die als nützlich für die in diesem Doku- products described herein without prior notice.
ment beschriebenen Produkte bewertet werden.
Dieses Dokument enthält Abschnitte auf deutsch und kursiv gedruckte Ab- This document contains sections written in German and sections
schnitte, die Übersetzung in englischer Sprache darstellen. printed in italics composing the English translation of the French sec-
Im Zweifelsfall ist die französische Version ausschlaggebend. tions. The French sections will be the reference in case of dispute.
Die Maße sind in metrischen Einheiten angegeben. Die Entsprechungen All measures are expressed in metric units. Converted values to other
in anderen Meßsystemen (vor allem angelsächsisch) werden zur Unter- systems (notably US and UK) are given for reference only.
richtung angegeben.
Die Abbildungen haben unverbindlichen Charakter. The illustrations for information only.
Inhaltsverzeichnis Contents
INHALTSVERZEICHNIS ............................................. 3 CONTENTS................................................................. 3
MS18-2-D11-F19-2A10-K000
B D
000143896J
C 40712
001
0349
Der Motor wird nicht ver- Den Antrieb der Pumpe und ih-
sorgt re Versorgung überprüfen
Kein Druckanstieg im Hochdruck-Begrenzungsventile
MOTOR DREHT SICH Kreis kontrollieren (Regler)
NICHT Zylinderblock und Ölverteiler
Interne Lecks zu groß
ersetzen
Die Bremse bleibt angezo- Den Steuerkreis der Bremse
gen kontrollieren
Trouble shooting
DAMAGE → IRON PARTICLES → DETECTION BY FILTERS → PREVENTION……
Einbau Installation
Die zum Ausbau angegebenen Arbeitsgänge in umge- Execute the removal operations in the reverse order.
kehrter Reihenfolge ausführen.
Für weitere Informationen beziehen Sie sich bitte auf Please refer to the following documentation brochures:
folgende Dokumente:
• INSTALLATION MS D/GB (ref: 800078173V) • INSTALLATION MS F/GB (ref: 677777844K)
• INSTALLATION CIRCUITS D/GB (ref: 677777853U) • INSTALLATION CIRCUITS F/GB (ref: . 677777831V)
• Stopfen (142) aus der Schutz- • Extract and release the plug 142
kappe (141) herausziehen. (142) from the brake cover (141).
6499
6556
• Mutter so weit anziehen, bis die • And tighten the nut until the
Welle frei dreht. motor shaft turns freely.
6555
Entsprechendes
Bremsen Brakes Kraft N Force [lbf] Equivalent torque [lbf.ft] Mutter Nut
Drehmoment Nm
F02-F04 18000 [4.000] 42 [30.9] M12
F05-F07 20000 [4.500] 47 [34.6] M12
F08 34000 [7.600] 110 [81.1] M16
F11 45000 [10.000] 140 [103] M16
F12 45000 [10.000] 140 [103] M16
F19 45000 [10.000] 140 [103] M16
Nach Bremslösung, einen neuen Stopfen After brake release, mount a new plug
! (142) einbauen. ! (142).
Bei fahrbaren Maschinen den Test auf ebenem For a rolling machine, make the test on a hori-
! Grund durchführen. ! zontal ground.
Bremssteuerdruck: mini 12 bar Pilot brake pressure : minimum 12 bar [174 PSI]
Maxi 30 bar. Maximum 30 bar [435 PSI]
• Sich vergewissern, daß der Bremsversorgungs- Make sure that the brake supply pressure is zero,
druck gleich Null ist,
• Die Bremse über die höchstgelegene Schraube • Purge the brake using the screw (112) located at
(112) entlüften, the highest level,
• Den Motor mit Maximaldruck beaufschlagen, • Supply the motor up to the setting pressure.
• Die Motorwelle darf sich nicht drehen, da andern- • The motor shaft must not turn, otherwise it is nec-
falls die Bremse ausgetauscht werden muß : essary to replace the brake :
Reparaturen. Repairs.
6500
6501
• Mit Hilfe des Dorns und Ab- • Using a mandrel and an ex-
ziehers (siehe Werkzeug Seite tractor (see tools page 36)
36) (fig 6502) (fig 6502)
• Mit Hilfe des Dorns und einer • Using a mandrel and a
Schraube Klasse 12.9 (siehe screw class 12.9 (see tools 6502
Werkzeug Seite 36) page 36)
• Mit Hilfe des Dorns und einer • Using a mandrel and a press
Presse (fig 6503). Die Kraft F (fig 6503). Respect the force F
beibehalten (siehe Schaubild (see table page 9)
Seite 9)
6503
!
se das Lagerteil nicht auf
den Gewindebolzen ab- ! not place the bearing
support on the studs.
stützen.
108
6508
6513
6511
Wiedereinbau. Reassembly.
Vor dem Wiedereinbau ist unbedingt Before reassembling, it is neces-
sicherzustellen, daß alle Teile, Nuten sary to ensure that all parts, the
und Dichtungs-Auflageflächen sauber surface condition of the piston seal
sind. contact surface and the grooves are
clean.
Es dürfen keine Rost-,
! Schmutz- oder Wasser-
All traces of rust, mud,
spuren vorhanden sein
! water must be removed.
6512
6509
6513
• Mit Hilfe des Dorns und Ab- • Using a mandrel and an ex-
ziehers (siehe Werkzeug Seite tractor (see tools page 36)
36) (fig 6502) (fig 6502)
• Mit Hilfe des Dorns und einer • Using a mandrel and a press
Presse (fig 6503). Die Kraft F (fig 6503). Respect the force F
einbehalten (siehe Schaubild (see table page 9) 6502
Seite 9)
Bei Verwendung der If you use the press do
!
Presse das Lagerteil
nicht auf den Gewinde- ! not place the bearing
support on the studs.
bolzen abstützen.
6503
• Sicherungsring (109) mit Hilfe • Install the snap ring (109) using
einer Zange für Innenringe gemäß internal snap ring pliers in line with
der bei der Demontage ange- the mark made during disassembly
brachten Kennzeichnung montie- . (see tools page 36)
ren: (siehe Werkzeuge Seite 36) 6504 6505
• Abzieher und Zange (fig • Extractor and pliers (fig 6504
6504 und 6505) and 6505)
• Presse und Zange (fig 6506 • Press and pliers (fig 6506
und 6507) and 6507)
6506 6507
6515
6516
!
der Außenrand des
Schutzkappe in die Nut ! edge of the cover is en-
gaged in the groove.
eingreift ist.
6517
6518
040
6519
042
6520
6521
6524
041
6525
071
6522
071
6523
041
6525
Den Nockenring anhand von zwei Center the cam using two screws 6526
einander gegenüberliegenden (042) diametrically opposite.
Schrauben (042) zentrieren.
6521
6527
042
6520
2055
Demontage Disassembly
154.a
6529
6530
154.b
2
6531
6532
154.c
6533
154.1
6534
6535
6536
Wiedereinbau Reassembly
154.2
6536
6535
6537
6538
6539
6532
154.c
6533
6532
154.b
2 6531
154.a
6530
Durchmesser D diameter
6529
Trommeldurchmesser (mm)
Bremsen Drum diameter [in] Total Spiel (mm)
Brake Total clearance [in]
nominal maximum
250 x 60 250 [9.84] 252 [9.92] 0.55 [0.02]
270 x 60 270 [10.63] 272 [10.70] 0.80 [0.03]
325 x 80 325 [12.79] 327 [12.87] 0.80 [0.03]
350 x 60 350 [13.78] 352 [13.85] 0.80 [0.03]
6528
Demontage Disassembly
Dazu die im Kapitel « Auswechseln Do operations described in chapter
des Lagerteils » unter « Demontage » "replacement of the bearing sup-
beschriebenen Arbeiten ausführen, port" section "disassembly" page 16
Seite 16
Wiedereinbau Reassembly
Dazu die im Kapitel « Auswechseln Do operations described in chapter
des Lagerteils » unter " Wiederein- "replacement of the bearing sup-
bau " beschriebenen Arbeiten ausfüh- port" section "reassembly" page 18.
ren, Seite 18. The angular position of the cam
Allerdings muß bei Motoren mit 2 must be respected on dual dis-
Schluckvolumen mit einem placement motors with a displace-
Schluckvolumenverhältnis über ment ratio different from 2.
oder unter 2 die Winkelposition be-
rücksichtigt werden. Example : Motor MS18 with dis-
Beispiel: Motor MS18, Schluckvolu- placement 1747-1049-698.
3
men 1747-1049-698 Small displacement : 698 cm
3
Kleines Schluckvolumen: 698 cm [42.59 cu.in] letter P
Buchstabe P 3
3
Medium displacement : 1049 cm
Mittleres Schluckvolumen: 1 049 cm [64.01 cu.in] letter M.
Buchstabe M The letter P or M must be located in
Die Buchstaben P oder M müssen the axis and towards the displace-
sich in der Achse befinden und in ment change spool, with the blind
Richtung des Schiebers für das hole towards the fixing of the cam
Wechseln des Schluckvolumens on the bearing support.
zeigen, auf der der Nockenring auf
dem Lagerteil befestigt ist.
M P
M P
MS08
MSE08
A R A R
MS18
MSE18
P M
M P
A R A
MS11
MSE11
P M 2035
Demontage Disassembly
6541
Wiedereinbau Reassembly
6542
6541
• Den Verteiler (047) durch An- • Separate the valving (047) from
heben an den Ausrichtungszapfen the cover (041) by levering at the
oder am Flansch vom Verteilerdek- indexing pins or at the flange.
kel (041) abmontieren.
2031
Wiedereinbau Reassembly
1135
• Die Federn (052) in ihr zuvor • Place the springs (052) in their
mit Fett gefülltes Gehäuse einset- housings, previously filled with
zen. grease.
• Die Dichtungsauflageflächen • Lubricate the faces of the seals
des Verteilers (047) fetten. of the valving (047).
• Den Verteiler(047) in den Ver- • Press the valving (047) into the
cover (041).
teilerdeckel (041) drücken
041
047 2031
041
R 047
L
053
6758
R A
053
3 2 2 7
047
R L 041
6757
R A
053
3 2 2 8
SE02 Motor :
SE02 motor : G/L Links D/R Rechts
G/L Left D/R Right
6 9 5 9
6959
S05 Motor :
S05 motor
G/L Links D/R Rechts
G/L Left D/R Right
053
6 9 4 8
6948
Demontage Disassembly
•
• Motor auf Lagerteil stellen • Place the motor on the bearing
(Muttern sind zum Schutz der Ge- support (fitted with nuts for studs
windebolzen aufgesetzt) protection)
• Schrauben (066) herausneh- • Remove the screws (066)
066
men.
6543
6544
6545
6546
Wiedereinbau Reassembly
6547
6548
6544
6543
6550
6551
• Sensor (161) mit dem Träger • Extract the sensor (161) with its
166
(166) abziehen support (166)
161
6552
Wiedereinbau Reassembly
6552
• Sensor (041) in die Bohrung • Push the sensor into the valving
des Verteilerdeckels bis zum Kon- cover (041) until it comes in contact
takt mit dem Zylinderblock (011) with the cylinders block (011),
schieben.
2064
1 5 ° m a x i
6558
6551
6550
6553
• Sechskantschlüssel für
Hex head wrench 13 17 19 22 24
Innensechskantschraube
• Drehmoment-Schlüssel FACOM J 250 A Torque wrench 6 à 30 N.m [4.4 to 22.1 lbf.ft]
• Drehmoment-Schlüssel FACOM S 250 A Torque wrench 50 à 240 N.m [35 to 175 lbf.ft]
• Drehmoment-Schlüssel FACOM K 250 A Torque wrench 160 à 800 N.m [120 à 600 lbf.ft]
Ø A
Ø B
• Montagewerkzeug
zum Anheben der • Mandrel for reassembling the
Schutzkappe oder zum brake cover or to compress the
F
E
G
Komprimieren der Tel- spring washer.
lerfeder.
Ø C
Ø D
0759
ØA ØB ØC ØD E F G
mm [inch] mm [inch] mm [inch] mm [inch] mm [inch] mm [inch] mm [inch]
F02
110 [4.3] 100 [4.0] 125 [4.9] 135 [5.3]
F03
F04 M12 50 [1.96] 10 [0.39] 20 [0.78]
F05 125 [4.92] 115 [4.52] 151 [5.94] 159 [6.25]
F07
F08
125 [4.92] 115 [4.52] 151 [5.94] 159 [6.25] 50 [1.96] 10 [0.39] 20 [0.78]
F09
F11
50 [1.96] 20 [0.78]
F12 M16
F18 190 [7.48] 180 [7.08] 205 [8.07] 215 [8.46] 10 [0.39]
F19 70 [2.75] 30 [1.18]
F21
Tube to immobi-
Ø 2 5
Ø 1 6
5 5
[2 .1 6 " ]
7 0 0
[2 7 .5 5 " ]
M 1 2 x 1 2 0 M 1 6 x 1 2 0
c l. 1 0 .9
H M 1 2 H M 1 6
Z 1 2 N
A = 2 0 0 A = 2 8 0 A
• Werkzeuge zur me- Tools for me-
F 0 2 F 1 1
chanischen Bremslö- chanical brake F 0 3 F 1 2
sung. release F 0 4 F 1 8
F 0 5 F 1 9 Ø 1 6 .5
F 0 7 F 2 1 [0 .6 4 ]
F 0 8
F 0 9
6 0 x 3 0 5 0 x 5
0987
Dichtungssatz
Seal kit 0988
0990
Dichtungssatz
Seal kit
0989
France
Deutschland Japan
POCLAIN HYDRAULICS GMBH POCLAIN HYDRAULICS KK
Bergstrasse 106 5-4-6 Kugenumashinme
64319 PFUNGSTADT FUJISAWA 251
DEUTSCHLAND JAPAN
Tel.: 49 6157 9474 0 Tel: 81 466 50 4400
Fax: 49 6157 9474 74 Fax: 81 466 50 4422
e-mail: info-deutschland@poclain-hydraulics.com e-mail: info-japan@poclain-hydraulics.com
Nederland USA
POCLAIN HYDRAULICS BENELUX BV POCLAIN HYDRAULICS INC.
Penningweg 32C 7900 Durand Avenue
4879 AM ETTEN-LEUR P.O. BOX 801
NEDERLAND STURTEVANT, WI 53177
USA
Tel.: 31 76 5021152 Tel.: 1 262 554 6739
Fax: 31 76 5012279 Fax: 1 262 554 4860
e-mail: info-netherlands@poclain-hydraulics.com e-mail: info-america@poclain-hydraulics.com
A10FM
A10FE
RDE92172-01-R/08.01
ersetzt / replaces 06.99
HINWEIS NOTICE
Bezeichnungen, Beschreibungen und Darstellungen Specifications, descriptions and illustrative material shown
entsprechen dem Informationsstand zum Zeitpunkt der herein were as accurate as known at the time this
Drucklegung dieser Unterlage. publication was approved for printing.
Änderungen können den Service am Produkt beein- BRUENINGHAUS HYDROMATIK reserves the right to
flussen, Verpflichtungen entstehen uns daraus nicht. discontinue models or options at any time or to change
Methoden und Vorrichtungen sind Empfehlungen, für specifications, materials, or design without notice and
deren Resultat wir keine Haftung übernehmen können. without incurring obligation.
BRUENINGHAUS HYDROMATIK- Baugruppen, mit Anga- Optional equipment and accessories may add cost to the
be der Fabrik-Nr. bestellt, sind die Basis guter Reparatu- basic unit, and some options are available only in
ren. combination with certain models or other options.
Einstell- und Prüfarbeiten sind bei Betriebstemperatur auf For the available combinations refer to the relevant data
dem Teststand vorzunehmen. sheet for the basic unit and the desired option.
Schutz von Personen und Eigentum ist durch Vor- Adjustment and tests have to be carried out on the test
kehrungen sicherzustellen. bench under operating temperatures.
Sachkenntnis, die Voraussetzung für jede Service-arbeit, Protection of personnel and property has to be guar-
vermitteln wir in unseren Schulungskursen. anteed by appropriate measures.
Expert knowledge, the precondition of any service work,
can be obtained in our training courses.
2 Brueninghaus Hydromatik
708 BOMAG 008 911 63
RDE 92172-01-R/08.01
Vibration motor
Schnittbild
17.4
Reparaturanleitung A10FM / A10 FE
Sectional view Repair Instructions A10FM / A10FE
A10FM
A10FE
Optional Option
Ausführung mit Spülventil Unit with flushing valve
für geschlossenen Kreislauf for closed circuit application
Achtung!
Nachfolgend Hinweise bei allen Reparaturarbeiten
an Hydraulikaggregaten beachten!
Attention!
Observe the following guidelines when carrying out repairs
on hydraulic units!
4 Brueninghaus Hydromatik
710 BOMAG 008 911 63
RDE 92172-01-R/08.01
Vibration motor
Triebwelle abdichten
17.4
Reparaturanleitung A10FM / A10 FE
Sealing the drive shaft Repair Instructions A10FM / A10FE
2
1
2 1. Sicherungsring, 2. Wellendichtring
1
1. Circlip, 2. Shaft seal
Change the shaft seal and check its sliding surface (drive shaft)
and housing, grease the sealing ring.
Use a suitable pipe to mount the shaft seal ring, but don't
push it too deap. If the shaft ring touches the bearing ring
you will damage the seal ring.
7 Sicherungsring einsetzen.
6 Brueninghaus Hydromatik
712 BOMAG 008 911 63
RDE 92172-01-R/08.01
Vibration motor
Triebwelle abdichten
17.4
Reparaturanleitung A10FM / A10 FE
Sealing the drive shaft Repair Instructions A10FM / A10FE
Hinweis! Note!
Die hier beschriebene Möglichkeit zum Wechsel der This discription showes how th change the drive shaft
Antriebswellen - Abdichtung stellt nicht die serienmäßi- sealing ring but it isn't the way of serial assembly.
ge Montage dar. Für sicheres Dichtungsverhalten ist eine The sealing ring is assembled together with the taper
Montage des Dichtringes zusammen mit dem Kegel- roller bearing from inside the motor housing normally to
rollenlager von innen her durch das Montagegehäuse get a secure sealing condition. If you decide to repair the
durchzuführen. Soll aus Gründen der Vereinfachung im motor in the shown way be very careful while handling
Reparaturfall die vorgehend beschriebene Vorgehens- so that the drive shaft wouldn't be damaged during
weise durchgeführt werden, so ist beim Ausbau der disassembly of the shaft sealing ring.
Dichtung besonders darauf zu achten, daß die Antriebs-
welle nicht beschädigt wird.
A10FM
8 Brueninghaus Hydromatik
714 BOMAG 008 911 63
RDE 92172-01-R/08.01
Vibration motor
Motor demontieren
17.4
Reparaturanleitung A10FM / A10 FE
Disassemble the motor Repair Instructions A10FM / A10FE
A10FE
10
11 Demontageposition
Lage der Anschlußplatte zum
Gehäuse kennzeichnen.
Disassembly position
Mark the location of the connection plate
on the housing.
13 Anschlußplatte abheben.
Verteilerplatte
kann herunterfallen - festhalten.
Verteilerplatte abheben.
10 Brueninghaus Hydromatik
716 BOMAG 008 911 63
RDE 92172-01-R/08.01
Vibration motor
Motor demontieren
17.4
Reparaturanleitung A10FM / A10 FE
Disassemble the motor Repair Instructions A10FM / A10FE
14 Verteilerplatte abheben.
12 Brueninghaus Hydromatik
718 BOMAG 008 911 63
RDE 92172-01-R/08.01
Vibration motor
Motor demontieren
17.4
Reparaturanleitung A10FM / A10 FE
Disassemble the motor Repair Instructions A10FM / A10FE
23 Sicherungsring entfernen.
26 Sicherungsring demontieren.
Feder und Druckstifte ausbauen.
Remove circlip.
Remove spring and pressure pins.
27
14 Brueninghaus Hydromatik
720 BOMAG 008 911 63
RDE 92172-01-R/08.01
Vibration motor
Überprüfungshinweise
17.4
Reparaturanleitung A10FM / A10 FE
Inspection hints Repair Instructions A10FM / A10FE
28 Kontrolle!
Lauffläche (1) keine Kratzer, keine Metalleinlagerungen,
kein Axialspiel (2), (Kolben nur satzweise tauschen).
Check!
Check to see that there are no scratches or metal deposits
on the sliding surface (1), and that there is no axial play (2),
(pistons must only be replaced as a set).
29 Kontrolle!
Zylinderbohrungen (1), Verzahnungen (2).
Check!
Cylinder bores (1), splines (2).
31 Kontrolle!
Zylindergleitfläche riefenfrei, nicht eingelaufen, keine
Einlagerungen, Steuerplatte nicht riefig (nur satzweise
austauschen).
Check!
Cylinder sliding surface free of grooves, no wear, no
embedded foreign particles. That there are no scratches
on the control plate. (Only replace them as a set).
32 Kontrolle!
Auflagefläche - Steuerplatte ohne Beschädigung.
Check!
Mounting surface - control plate undamaged
16 Brueninghaus Hydromatik
722 BOMAG 008 911 63
RDE 92172-01-R/08.01
Vibration motor
Motor montieren
17.4
Reparaturanleitung A10FM / A10 FE
Motor assembly Repair Instructions A10FM / A10FE
37 Hubscheibe montieren.
40
42 Rotationsgruppe montieren!
Montagehilfe:
Mit O-Ring Kolben festhalten.
Assembly aid:
Hold the pistons by using an O-ring.
Assembly:
Hold the components in place with grease.
18 Brueninghaus Hydromatik
724 BOMAG 008 911 63
RDE 92172-01-R/08.01
Vibration motor
Motor montieren
17.4
Reparaturanleitung A10FM / A10 FE
Motor assembly Repair Instructions A10FM / A10FE
44 Verteilerplatte montieren.
Montagehilfe: Fett
A10FM A10FE
46
1
2
2
1
20 Brueninghaus Hydromatik
726 BOMAG 008 911 63
RDE 92172-01-R/08.01
Vibration motor
Abstimmung- Lagerung / Hinweise
17.4
Reparaturanleitung A10FM / A10 FE
Bearing adjustment / Note Repair Instructions A10FM / A10FE
AA10FM Baureihe 50
AA10FM Series 50
0 .... 0,05 mm
Pos. 12
Achtung: Falsch eingestellte Qmin Anschläge können zu Attention: Wrong adjustments of stopper Qmin
überhöhten Drehzahlen bis hin zum Ausfall der Bauteile displacement increases the speed of the motor up to a
führen. possible failure of parts of the unit.
49 Plastikhammer
Soft hammer
50 Schleuder
...
Anziehdrehmomente /
Tightening torques
8,8 2,3 5,0 8,5 21 41 72 115 176 240 350 600 1220
Ma 10,9 3,2 7,2 12 29 58 100 165 250 350 490 840 1670
12,9 4,1 8,5 14,5 35 70 121 195 300 410 590 990 2000
22 Brueninghaus Hydromatik
728 BOMAG 008 911 63
17.5 Axle drive motor
saue
Series 51
Bent Axis
Variable Motors
Service Manual
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
General Description
Series 51 Variable Displacement Motors are bent Motors equipped with controls normally start at maxi-
axis design units, incorporating spherical pistons. mum displacement. This provides maximum starting
torque (high acceleration).
These motors are designed primarily to be combined
with other products in closed circuit systems to trans- The controls may utilize externally or internally sup-
fer and control hydraulic power. plied servo pressure. They may be overridden by a
pressure compensator which functions when the
Series 51 Motors have a large maximum / minimum motor is operating in motor and pump modes. A
displacement ratio (5 to 1) and high output speed defeat option is available to disable the pressure
capabilities. SAE flange and cartridge motor configu- compensator override when the motor is running in
rations are available. pump mode.
● Compact, Lightweight
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................................4
Basic Hydraulic Circuits ...................................................................................................................................4
General Description of the Series 51 Variable Displacement Motors ..............................................................5
Functional Description ......................................................................................................................................6
Technical Specifications and Data - Variable Displacement Motors .............................................................. 20
Safety Precautions .........................................................................................................................................21
Gauge Installation ..........................................................................................................................................23
Start-Up Procedure and Maintenance ............................................................................................................25
Component Inspection and Adjustment .........................................................................................................27
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................. 37
Exploded View of the Series 51 Variable Motor .............................................................................................41
Minor Repair and Replacement - Variable Motor ........................................................................................... 51
General .....................................................................................................................................................51
Shaft Seal (SAE Flange Configuration) ....................................................................................................52
Shaft Seal (Cartridge Configuration) .........................................................................................................53
Loop Flushing Shuttle Valve (Option)........................................................................................................54
Charge Pressure Relief Valve ...................................................................................................................55
Minimum Angle Servo Cover .................................................................................................................... 55
Hydraulic 2-Position Control (Type N2) .....................................................................................................56
Electrohydraulic 2-Position Controls (Types E1•E2 and F1•F2) ...............................................................57
Electric 2-Position Controls (Type S1) ......................................................................................................58
Hydraulic Proportional Control (Type HZ) .................................................................................................59
Hydraulic Proportional Control (Type HS) .................................................................................................60
Hydraulic Proportional Control with Maximum Angle Over-ride (Types H1•H2 or K1•K2) ........................61
Two Connection Hydraulic Proportional Control (Type HP) ......................................................................62
Two Connection Hydraulic Proportional Control for “Dual Path” Vehicles (Type HC) ...............................64
Electrohydraulic Proportional Control (Types EP and EQ)........................................................................68
Pressure Control Pilot (PCP) Valve for Electrohydraulic Proportional Control (Types EP and EQ) .......... 70
Multi-function Block ...................................................................................................................................71
Pressure Compensator Regulator (Type PC) ........................................................................................... 76
Control Orifices .........................................................................................................................................77
Plug / Fitting Torques ................................................................................................................................77
0-1 3
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Introduction
The purpose of this manual is to provide information Dirt or contamination is the greatest enemy of any
necessary for the normal servicing of the Series 51 type of hydraulic equipment. The greatest possible
family of variable displacement hydrostatic motors. cleanliness is necessary when starting up the sys-
tem, changing filters, or performing any other service
This manual includes unit and component descrip- procedure.
tion, troubleshooting, adjustments, and minor repair
procedures. By following the procedures in this For Technical Information on Series 51 motors, refer
manual, inspections and minor repairs may be per- to publication BLN-10042 or 368753.
formed without affecting the unit warranty.
For Fluid Quality Requirements, refer to publication
A Series 51 motor does occasionally require servic- BLN-9987 or 697581.
ing, and these units are designed to meet this require-
ment. Sauer-Sundstrand provides a complete repair serv-
ice for its products. Contact any Sauer-Sundstrand
Many repairs or adjustments can be completed with- Authorized Service Center for details. Sauer-Sund-
out removing the unit from the vehicle or machine, strand Authorized Service Center locations are listed
provided the unit is accessible and can be thoroughly in publication BLN-2-40527 or 698266.
cleaned before beginning any procedures.
4 0-2
At maximum displacement, the motor will provide a For all controls except the N2 and PC, servo pressure
certain maximum output shaft torque and minimum oil is supplied to a four (4) way spool valve in the motor
speed corresponding to the pressure and flow sup- end cap. When a combination of pilot pressure (or
plied to the motor. Under the same input conditions force) from an external control assembly and internal
but at minimum displacement, the shaft speed will be spring force shifts this valve, servo pressure is routed
approximately five (5) times faster while the available to move the servo piston and change the motor’s
output torque will decrease to approximately one-fifth displacement.
(1/5) the full displacement value. The displacement
is changed by a servo piston which is connected to A synchronizing shaft, with spherical rollers, synchro-
the valve segment. nizes the rotation of the output shaft and the cylinder
block. The ball end of each piston runs in a socket
bushing, pressed into the output shaft. There are no
other parts used to connect the pistons to the shaft.
Two tapered roller bearings support the output shaft.
Minimum
Displacement Limiter
Hydraulic Pressure Compensator
Proportional Override
Control Valve Segment
Control
Pressure Bearing Plate
Port
Synchronizing
Piston Shaft
Servo Piston
Cylinder
Charge Pressure
Relief Valve
P001 196
Fig. 10-1 - Sectional view of Series 51 variable displacement motor (SAE Flange
Configuration) with Hydraulic Proportional Control
10 - 1 5
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Functional Description
Loop Flushing
Series 51 motors used in closed circuit applications
incorporate an integral loop flushing valve as stan-
dard equipment. Installations that require additional
fluid to be removed from the main hydraulic circuit
because of fluid cooling requirements, or circuits
requiring the removal of excessive contamination
from the high pressure circuit, can benefit from loop
flushing. Series 51 motors used in open circuit appli-
51000003 51000004
Fig. 10-2 - Loop Fig. 10-3 - Loop cations may have the optional loop flushing defeat
components installed.
Flushing Flushing Defeat
Components Components Series 51 motors equipped with an integral loop
flushing valve also include a charge pressure relief
valve. The setting of the motor charge relief valve
affects the function of the flushing circuit. Higher
motor charge relief settings reduce the loop flushing
flow and increase the flow over the pump charge
pressure relief valve when the circuit is operating.
Lower motor charge relief settings increase the loop
flushing flow and may increase the motor case pres-
sure when the circuit is operating.
6 10 - 2
51000005
Fig. 10-4 - Minimum Displacement Limiter
with Tamper Resistant Cap (Cartridge
Motor Configuration Shown)
51000006
Fig. 10-5 - Maximum Displacement Limiter
Screw
Controls - General
A wide range of control options is available for the
Series 51 motors. These include pilot operated
Electrohydraulic 2-Position Controls, Hydraulic Pro-
portional Controls (single or two [2] connection), and
Electrohydraulic Proportional Controls. A directly op-
erated Hydraulic 2-Position Control and a Pressure
Compensator regulator are also available.
when equipped with N2 control or the PC regulator) Fig. 10-6 - Internal Servo Pressure Supply
may be operated either by servo pressure oil supplied Screen with Multi-function Block and/or
internally from the main ports of the motor, or by servo Control Removed (Plug for External
pressure oil supplied from an external source. (The Supply)
N2 control uses servo pressure supplied by an exter-
nal control valve. The PC regulator obtains servo
pressure from the main ports of the motor.)
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Functional Description (Continued)
Hydraulic 2-Position Control (Type N2)
This is a two (2) position (maximum - minimum
displacement) control, consisting of a cover plate
mounted on the end cap. An external control valve
supplies servo pressure from an external source
directly to the servo piston. PCOR is not available
with the N2 control.
51000010
Fig. 10-9 - N2 Control Components
L2 M6 (M4) Y1 Y2 (M3)
A
M1
max.
disp.
U4 (opt.)
M2
B
L1
51000011
Fig. 10-10 - N2 Control Schematic
8 10 - 4
L2 M6 M4 M3
A
M1
A1
max.
disp.
U4 (opt.) T3
T2
E1•E2
B1
U5
(plug for T7,
ext. servo T8 M9
T1
press.) X3 (M5)
Servo press,
external
M2
Servo B
Pressure
internal
L1
M8 M7
F1•F2
51000014
Fig. 10-13 - E1•E2 and F1•F2 Control
Schematic
10 - 5 9
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Functional Description (Continued)
Electric 2-Position Control (Type S1)
A 12 VDC solenoid valve, mounted on the multi-
function block, directly operates the control valve
spool in the end cap. The control valve in the end cap
is biased by a threshold spring, and controls oil flow
to the ends of the servo piston. Servo pressure may
be supplied from an external source or internally by
the shuttle spool in the multi-function block. PCOR is
available with this control.
51000162
Fig. 10-14 - Series 51 Motor with S1 Control With the S1 control, energizing the solenoid causes
the motor to shift to maximum displacement. When
the solenoid is not energized, the motor is held at
minimum displacement.
51000163
Fig. 10-15 - S1 Control Components
L2 M6 M4 M3
A
M1
A1
max.
disp.
U4 (opt.) T3
T2
S1
B1
U5
(plug for T7,
ext. servo T8 M9
T1
press.) X3 (M5)
Servo press,
external
M2
Servo B
Pressure
internal
L1
51000085
Fig. 10-16 - S1 Control Schematic
10 10 - 6
provide a force on the end of the control spool. The Fig. 10-17 - Series 51 Motor with HZ
force of the threshold spring is externally adjustable Control
with an adjusting screw. The feedback spring is
positioned between the control spool and a feedback
lug attached to the servo piston. The force of the
feedback spring increases as the motor’s displace-
ment decreases.
L2 M6 M4 M3
A
M1
max.
disp.
U4 (opt.) T3
T2
T7,
U5 (plug for T8 M9
ext. servo press.) T1
X3 (M5)
Servo press,
external
M2
B
Servo
Pressure
internal L1
X1 M7
51000017
Fig. 10-19 - HZ Control Schematic
10 - 7 11
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Functional Description (Continued)
Hydraulic Proportional Control (Type HS)
The HS control consists of a cover plate (with a
hydraulic port) mounted on the multi-function block.
Servo pressure may be supplied from an external
source or internally by the shuttle spool in the multi-
function block. PCOR is available with this control.
51000019
Fig. 10-21 - HS Control Components
L2 M6 M4 M3
A
M1
A1
max.
disp.
U4 (opt.) T3
T2
B1
T7,
U5 (plug for T8 M9
ext. servo press.) T1
X3 (M5)
Servo press,
external
M2
Servo B
Pressure
internal
L1
M7 X1 HS
H1•H2
M7 X1
K1•K2
M7 X1
51000022
Fig. 10-22 - HS, H1•H2, and K1•K2 Control
Schematic
12 10 - 8
and the end of the control spool is drained to the motor Fig. 10-23 - Series 51 Motor with H1•H2
case, causing the motor to shift to maximum displace- Control
ment.
51000167
Fig. 10-24 - Series 51 Motor with K1•K2
Control
51000021
Fig. 10-25 - H1•H2 and K1•K2 Control
Components
10 - 9 13
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
51000024
An increase in the difference between the pilot pres-
Fig. 10-27 - HP Control Components sures will result in a decrease in motor displacement,
while a decrease will result in an increase in displace-
ment.
L2 M6 M4 M3
A
M1
A1
max.
disp.
U4 (opt.) T3
T2
B1
T7,
U5 (plug for T8 M9
ext. servo press.) T1
X3 (M5)
Servo press,
external
M2
Servo B
Press,
internal
L1
X2 X1
51000025
Fig. 10-28 - HP Control Schematic
14 10 - 10
sures will result in a decrease in motor displacement, Fig. 10-30 - HC Control Components
while a decrease will result in an increase in displace-
ment. The feedback springs in the end cap have L2 M6 M4 M3
differing spring rates and operate in parallel (060,
A
080, and 110) or series (160 or 250) to provide a linear M1
relationship between motor displacement and pilot
pressure differential. max.
disp.
U4 (opt.) T3
T2
T7,
T8 M9
T1
M5
M2
B
L1
X2 X1
51000160
Fig. 10-31 - HC Control Schematic
10 - 11 15
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Functional Description (Continued)
Electrohydraulic Proportional Control
(Types EP and EQ)
This control consists of a valve block and PCP (Pres-
sure Control Pilot) valve mounted on the multi-func-
tion block. The valve block incorporates a pilot piston
with centering springs. A pin transmits force from the
pilot piston to the control spool in the end cap.
Feedback springs (single spring for 060, 080, and
110) and a threshold spring are installed in the end
51000026
cap. These springs function similar to the HS control.
Fig. 10-32 - Series 51 Motor with EP Control
Servo pressure may be supplied from an external
(EQ Similar) source or internally by the shuttle spool in the multi-
function block. PCOR is available with this control.
L2 M6 M4 M3
A
M1
A1
max.
disp.
U4 (opt.) T3
T2
B1
T7,
U5 (plug for T8 M9
ext. servo press.) T1
X3 (M5)
Servo press,
external
M2
Servo B
Pressure
internal
L1
M7 X1 M8
51000028
Fig. 10-34 - EP and EQ Control Schematic
16 10 - 12
51000029
Fig. 10-35 - Multi-function Block (Without
Control)
10 - 13 17
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Functional Description (Continued)
An optional “brake pressure defeat” spool may be
installed in the multi-function block. When used with
the PCOR, this spool assures that the PCOR does
not cause the motor displacement to increase during
deceleration (which could cause pump overspeed).
Pressure from a source such as the pump servos or
an external valve, shifts the defeat spool to block the
high pressure supply to the PCOR valve from the
“deceleration” side of the closed loop. Either bi-
51000032 directional or single direction PCOR operation can be
Fig. 10-38 - Multi-function Block with PCOR specified when PCOR defeat is installed.
Defeat Spool Components
A1 T4 A1
Rotation High pressure Control pressure
Defeat
Spool
port on port
CW A XB
T5
CCW B XA
U7 U7
U6 U6
B1 T6
B1
PCOR PCOR
Valve Valve
XA XB
18 10 - 14
51000035
Fig. 10-41 - PC Regulator Components
L2 M6 M4 M3
A
M1
max.
disp.
T5
U7
U4 (opt.)
U6 T7
T1
M9
M5
M2
B
L1
51000036
Fig. 10-42 - PC Regulator Schematic
10 - 15 19
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Technical Specifications and Data - Variable Displacement Motors
Design Hydraulic Fluid
Piston motor with variable displacement, bent axis Refer to Sauer-Sundstrand publication BLN-9887 or
construction. 697581.
Type of Mounting Temperature 1)
SAE four (4) bolt flange – SAE Flange Configuration. ϑ min = -40°C (-40°F), intermittent, cold start
Two (2) bolt flange – Cartridge Motor Configuration. ϑ nominal = 104°C (220°F), continuous
ϑ max = 115°C (240°F), intermittent
Pipe Connections
1)
at the hottest point, normally the case drain line.
Main pressure ports: SAE flange
Hydraulic fluid viscosity must be as shown below.
Remaining ports: SAE O-ring thread
Fluid Viscosity Limits
Direction of Rotation
ν min = 5 mm2/s (42 SUS) intermittent
Clockwise and counter-clockwise.
ν min = 6.4 mm2/s (47 SUS) min. continuous
Installation Position ν min = 13 mm2/s (70 SUS) optimum
ν max = 110 mm2/s (510 SUS) max. continuous
Installation position discretionary. The housing must ν max = 1600 mm2/s (7400 SUS) intermittent, cold start
always be filled with hydraulic fluid.
Filtration
System Pressure Range, Input
Acceptable contamination level: ISO Code 18/13 or
Max: 480 bar (6960 psi) better. Refer to Sauer-Sundstrand publication BLN-9887
Min: 10 bar (145 psi) or 697581.
Case Pressure
Max. Continuous: 3 bar (44 psi)
Intermittent (Cold start): 5 bar (73 psi)
Frame Size
Dimension 060 080 110 160 250
Displacement maximum cm3 60.0 80.7 109.9 160.9 250.0
in3 3.66 4.92 6.71 9.82 15.26
minimum cm3 12.0 16.1 22.0 32.2 50.0
in3 0.73 0.98 1.34 1.96 3.05
Continuous speed at max disp min-1 (rpm) 3600 3100 2800 2500 2200
at min disp min-1 (rpm) 5600 5000 4500 4000 3400
Max. speed at max disp min-1 (rpm) 4400 4000 3600 3200 2700
at min disp min-1 (rpm) 7000 6250 5600 5000 4250
Theoretical at max disp Nm / bar 0.95 1.28 1.75 2.56 3.98
torque lbf•in / 1000 psi 583 784 1067 1563 2428
at min disp Nm / bar 0.19 0.26 0.35 0.51 0.80
lbf•in / 1000 psi 117 156 214 313 486
Max. continuous Q max L / min 216 250 308 402 550
flow gal / min 57 66 81 106 145
Max. corner power Pcorner max kW 336 403 492 644 850
hp 450 540 660 864 1140
Mass moment J kg • m2 0.0046 0.0071 0.0128 0.0234 0.0480
of inertia lbf • ft2 0.1092 0.1685 0.3037 0.5553 1.1580
Weight m kg 28 32 44 56 86
(with control N2) lb 62 71 97 123 190
20 10 - 16
● When Series 51 units are used in vehicular ● Use caution when dealing with hydraulic
hydrostatic drive systems, the loss of hy- fluid under pressure. Escaping hydraulic
drostatic drive line power in any mode of fluid under pressure can have sufficient
operation may cause a loss of hydrostatic force to penetrate your skin causing seri-
braking capacity. A braking system, redun- ous injury. This fluid may also be hot enough
dant to the hydrostatic transmission must, to burn. Serious infection or reactions can
therefore, be provided which is adequate to develop if proper medical treatment is not
stop and hold the system should the condi- administered immediately.
tion develop.
● Some cleaning solvents are flammable. To
● Certain service procedures may require the avoid possible fire, do not use cleaning
vehicle/machine to be disabled (wheels solvents in an area where a source of igni-
raised off the ground, work function discon- tion may be present.
nected, etc.) while performing them in order
to prevent injury to the technician and by-
standers.
20 - 1 21
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Notes
22 20 - 2
Fig. 30-2- Gauge Ports, Motor with E1•E2, F1•F2, H1•H2, and K1•K2 Controls
Port X3:
servo press., external
Gauge port M5:
servo press., internal Control • E1/E2 • F1/F2
XA
Control • E1/E2•F1/F2 Control • H1/H2 • K1/K2
Gauge port M8 Gauge port M7
Control • H1/H2 control pressure
Control pressure port X1 View"T"
Control • K1/K2
Control pressure port X1
XA
XB XB
"T" 51000038
Port X3:
servo press., ext.
Gauge port M5: Gauge port M7:
servo press., int. Control pressure
XA
Gauge port M7:
Control pressure
View"U" View"U"
(HS) (HZ)
XA XB
Control pressure Control pressure
XB
port X1 port X1
"U" 51000039
30 - 1 23
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Gauge Installation (Continued)
Fig. 30-4 - Gauge Ports, Motor with HP Control
Port X3:
servo press., ext.
Gauge port M5:
servo press., int. XA
View"V"
XA XB
Port X3:
servo press., ext.
Gauge port M5:
servo press., int. XA
View"W"
XA XB
XB
MS-Connector (MS3102C) Packard
7/8 — 20 UNEF Connector
Manual override
Port X1:
External PCP
"W" supply pressure 51000041
Gauge Information
System 600 bar or 10,000 psi Gauge Motor 60 bar or 1000 psi Gauge
M1 Pressure M6 Charge
Port “A” 9/16 — 18 O-Ring Fitting Pressure 9/16 — 18 O-Ring Fitting
System 600 bar or 10,000 psi Gauge M7 Control 60 bar or 1000 psi Gauge
M2 Pressure M8 Test Port 9/16 — 18 O-Ring Fitting
Port “B” 9/16 — 18 O-Ring Fitting L1 Case 60 bar or 1000 psi Gauge
Servo 600 bar or 10,000 psi Gauge L2 Pressure 060, 080, 110:
M3 Pressure 1-1/16 — 12 O-Ring Fitting
(Min. Angle) 9/16 — 18 O-Ring Fitting 160, 250:
Servo 600 bar or 10,000 psi Gauge 1-5/16 — 12 O-Ring Fitting
M4 Pressure X1 Control 60 bar or 1000 psi Gauge
(Max. Angle) 9/16 — 18 O-Ring Fitting X2 Pressure 9/16 — 18 O-Ring Fitting
Servo 600 bar or 10,000 psi Gauge X3
M5 Supply 9/16 — 18 O-Ring Fitting or XA Defeat 60 bar or 1000 psi Gauge
(M9) Pressure Tee into Control Pressure Line XB Pressure Tee into Defeat Pressure
Line(s)
24 30 - 2
30 - 3 25
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Start-Up Procedure and Maintenance (Continued)
Maintenance Changing the Fluid and Filter
Cleanliness
To insure optimum service life on Series 51 products,
The reservoir breather air filter (if equipped) must be regular maintenance of the fluid and filter must be
kept clean. Clean the area around the filler cap before performed.
opening the reservoir. The hydraulic fluid should be
The fluid and filter must be changed per the vehicle/
filtered before it enters the reservoir.
machine manufacturer’s recommendations. In the
Follow the guidelines presented in Sauer-Sundstrand absence of such recommendations, the following
publication BLN-9887 or 697581 for required fluid intervals may be used:
cleanliness levels during machine operation.
• System with a sealed type reservoir - 2000 hrs.
Recommended Fluids • System with a breathing type reservoir - 500 hrs.
Hydraulic fluids used with Sauer-Sundstrand prod- It may be necessary to change the fluid more fre-
ucts should be carefully selected with assistance quently if the fluid becomes contaminated with for-
from a reputable supplier, following the guidelines eign matter (dirt, water, grease, etc.) or if the fluid has
presented in Sauer-Sundstrand publication BLN-9887 been operating at temperature levels greater than the
or 697581. maximum recommended. Never reuse fluid.
Checking for Leaks The filter should be changed when changing the fluid,
or whenever the filter indicator shows that it is neces-
Check the system components for leakage at regular sary to change the filter.
intervals. Tighten any leaking connections while the
system is not under pressure. Replace any defective
seals and gaskets.
26 30 - 4
WARNING
pressure gauge port. Install a gauge to measure case Fig. 30-6 - Adjusting Charge Pressure
pressure. Operate the system with the prime mover Relief Valve
at normal operating speed and the pump at half
stroke (forward or reverse) when measuring motor
charge pressure.
30 - 5 27
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Component Adjustment (Continued)
Minimum Displacement Limiter Adjustment
The minimum displacement is set at the factory, and
the adjustment screw is covered with a tamper-
resistant cap
WARNING
Care should be taken in adjusting displace-
ment limiters to avoid undesirable speed con-
510000434
ditions. The sealing lock nut must be retorqued
Fig. 30-8 - Loosen Minimum Displacement after every adjustment to prevent an unex-
Limiter Lock Nut pected change in operating conditions and to
prevent external leakage during unit operation.
NOTE: Changes in motor displacement can be de-
tected by providing a constant flow of fluid to
the motor, while maintaining the motor at
minimum displacement and monitoring the
motor output shaft speed. An increase in
displacement will result in a decrease in shaft
speed, while a decrease in displacement will
result in an increase in shaft speed.
28 30 - 6
WARNING
Care should be taken in adjusting displace-
ment limiters to avoid undesirable speed con-
ditions. The stop screw must be retorqued
after adjustment to prevent an unexpected
change in operating conditions.
NOTE: Changes in motor displacement can be de-
tected by providing a constant flow of fluid to
the motor, while maintaining the motor at 51000046
maximum displacement and monitoring the Fig. 30-10 - Remove Minimum Angle Servo
motor output shaft speed. An increase in Cover Screws
displacement will result in a decrease in shaft
speed, while a decrease in displacement will
result in an increase in shaft speed. Approximate Change in
Frame Maximum Displacement
To adjust the maximum displacement, first remove Size with Change in Spacer Thickness
the screws retaining the minimum angle servo cover cc/mm (in3/.1 in)
to the end cap with an 8 mm internal hex wrench (060,
080, 110, and 160 units), or a 10 mm internal hex 060 0.98 (.15)
wrench (250 units). Remove the minimum angle 080 1.14 (.18)
servo cover and O-rings. Remove the displacement 110 1.48 (.23)
limiter screw with an 8 mm internal hex wrench. 160 1.93 (.30)
Installing a thicker spacer on the end of the setting 250 2.63 (.41)
piston will reduce the maximum displacement of the
motor. Installing a thinner spacer will increase the
maximum displacement. The displacement will
change according to the accompanying chart.
30 - 7 29
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Component Adjustment (Continued)
Displacement Control Adjustments
NOTE: A change in motor displacement can be de-
tected by providing a constant flow of fluid to
the motor and monitoring the motor output
shaft speed while adjusting the control. An
increase in displacement will result in a de-
crease in shaft speed, while a decrease in
displacement will result in an increase in shaft
speed.
CAUTION
30 30 - 8
30 - 9 31
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Component Adjustment (Continued)
Two Line Hydraulic Proportional Control
(Type HP)
The differential control start pressure for this control
may be adjusted with the adjusting screw on the end
cap (opposite the control block). Control start is that
differential pilot pressure at which the motor displace-
ment starts to decrease.
32 30 - 10
connected to ports X1 and X2), and the minimum Fig. 30-21 - Two Line Hydraulic
angle servo pressure (port M3). Proportional Control, Type HC
same no matter which pilot pressure is higher. Differ- Fig. 30-22 - Adjusting Control Threshold
ences in control operation when the pilot pressure (Type HC)
differential is reversed indicate a problem with the
shuttle spool in the control block.
30 - 11 33
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Component Adjustment (Continued)
Electrohydraulic Proportional Control
(Types EP and EQ)
The control start current for the EP and EQ controls
may be adjusted with the adjusting screw on the end
cap (opposite the control block). Control start is that
current supplied to the PCP (Pressure Control Pilot)
valve at which the motor displacement starts to de-
crease.
51000026 To check the threshold setting, install instruments to
Fig. 30-23 - Electrohydraulic Proportional monitor the PCP current, and the minimum angle
Control, Type EP (EQ Similar) servo pressure (port M3).
34 30 - 12
working pressure. This can accomplished by apply- Fig. 30-25 - PCOR Block on Multi-Function
ing the vehicle’s brakes or by loading the work func- Block (K1•K2 Control Shown)
tion.
WARNING
30 - 13 35
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Component Adjustment (Continued)
Allow the pump to return to its neutral position.
Repeat the procedure for the other side of the closed
circuit if so configured. The PCOR or PC regulator
must operate at the same start pressure as noted
previously. Any noticeable difference in operation
from side to side may indicate a problem with the
pressure supply shuttle spool or brake pressure de-
feat spool in the multi-function block.
NOTE: Some motors may be configured for the
PCOR or PC regulator to function on only
one (1) side of the closed loop. Refer to the
nomenclature on the motor nameplate.
In order for the PCOR or PC regulator to function
properly on motors equipped with a brake pressure
defeat spool, the defeat spool must be positioned
correctly. The control pressure for the defeat spool
should be applied to the appropriate port (XA or XB)
as shown in the following table to shift the defeat
spool and permit PCOR or PC regulator operation.
Maximum pressure across the brake pressure defeat
ports XA and XB is 50 bar (725 psi).
51000049 Pressure Compensator Override Defeat Operation
Fig. 30-28 - Loosen PCOR/PC Lock Nut Rotation High system Control
pressure port pressure on port
CW A XB
CCW B XA
The PCOR or PC regulator valve is screw adjustable.
To adjust, loosen the locknut with a 1-1/16" hex
wrench. Turn the adjusting screw with a large screw-
driver until the desired pressure setting is estab-
lished. Clockwise rotation of the adjustment screw
will increase the pressure setting at a rate of approxi-
mately 70 bar (1000 psi) per turn.
51000050
Fig. 30-29 - Rotate PCOR/PC Adjusting CAUTION
Screw A stop pin is installed in the adjusting screw to
prevent “overtravel” of the PCOR/PC valve
spool. The stop pin must protrude (distance
"X" “X”) 19 mm (.75 in.) from the spring seat for
settings of 270 to 370 bar (3900 to 5350 psi), or
24 mm (.94 in.) for settings of 110 to 260 bar
(1600 to 3750 psi). Refer to the appropriate
Service Parts Manual for further information.
While holding the adjusting screw from turning, torque
the lock nut to 52 Nm (38 ft•lbsf). Recheck the PCOR
or PC regulator setting.
51000051
Shut down the prime mover. Remove the gauges and
Fig. 30-30 - PCOR/PC Adjusting Screw Stop install the gauge port plugs. Return the pump and
Pin motor controls to their normal operation.
36 30 - 14
Check Oil Level Check System Check Pump Check Prime Mover
OK OK OK Speed
in Reservoir Relief Valve Inlet Pressure
Pressure Low
Low Low OK
Settings
Check Oil Air in System OK Check Pump Inspect Shaft Inspect Shaft
Level in
OK Inlet Pressure
OK Couplings
OK Alignment
Reservoir
Loose Fitting Low Defective Defective
Low
Fill to Proper Purge Air and Inspect Inlet Filter Repair or Align Shafts
Level Tighten and Replace if Replace
Fittings Necessary
Check Oil Level Inspect Heat Check Charge Check Pump Inlet
in Reservoir
OK Exchanger
OK Pressure
OK Pressure
Low Defective Incorrect Low OK
30 - 15 37
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Troubleshooting (Continued)
Fault-Logic Diagrams • Closed Circuit (Continued)
Repair or Replace
Motor
IMPROPER MOTOR OUTPUT SPEED
38 30 - 16
30 - 17 39
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Notes
40 30 - 18
W10 OPTION
WNNT L40
W50
L50
B71
W25 B80
B71A B80
L70 L80
L75
L40
L50
B70
B70A
B70A
Y10
B70
Y20
W25
Y30
Y20
W50
Y10 Y10
W10 B70A
OPTION Y20
WNNS B70
Y30
Name Plate
saue
Ames, Iowa, U.S.A. Neumünster, Germany
Model Code Typ
51V160 RF1N
E1A2 ANE1 NNN Model Code
050AA210322
Model No. Ident Nr
Model Number
516-40104 786673
Serial Number N 91 25 67890
Serial No. Fabr Nr
MADE IN GERMANY
Place of Manufacture
Name Plate (German Production)
40 - 1 41
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Exploded View of the Series 51 Variable Motor (Continued)
End Cap
(....) = Applies to the indicated
G30 frame size(s).
G24
G30A
J70
G26
J60 G38
J50 G36
M16/M96 F20A–G
K90
K50
J40
K10
OR
K16 K70 OR
(250) K90N
G20
G20A K80
Q40 K90A
K14
K16 G50
(060—160)
G12 G50A G12
G12A G30 G30A K18N
(250) (250)
G80
(060, 080) G12A OR
G80A K16
G30 K18
(060, 080) (060—160) K16
(250)
G30A (250)
G30
(250) G30A K14
G20A
M11/T3A1-A9
T3B0-B6 G20
G12 T3C2-C7
G12A S20 OR
G12A
G12 S10
M11/T1A1-A9
T1B0-B6 (060, 080,
T1C2-C7 G30A 110)
G18 (250) OR S10
G90 (160, 250)
G12A G30
Y40 G12 (250)
N1U5 J30
T8A1-A9
Y50 T8B0-B6 J10A-D
T8C2-C7
J20/S70
G30A
G30 T7A1-A9
G42
G36 T7B0-B6
T7C2-C7
M11/T2A1-A9 G44
T2B0-B6
T2C2-C7 G38
F33
G38
G38
G42 F32
42 40 - 2
N52 OR
N32 N34
N34A
N72 N46/T5
N66 N72A N52/T4
N66A
N34
N34A N84
N30
N34
N34A OR
N52/T6
N34A N84A
N34
N34
N34A
N1A1-A6 N28
OR N28A
N90A
N66A
N90 OR N66
N26A
N26
N34
N34A
N58
N24
N82
N11
N29
N16
N18
N27A
N27 N29
N23
N27A
N23A
N27
Q60
40 - 3 43
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Exploded View of the Series 51 Variable Motor (Continued)
Controls
M28
M30
M24
M38
M36
M10 M30
M18
M28
M32A M32 M26 M14
M32
M24
M26
M30 M28
M1HS
M1HP
M16 M18
M16
M20 M22
M1EP•EQ
M14 M18 M16 M16
M12 M14
M12
EP•EQ M10 HS M18
M10
M36
HP
M16 M1S1
M10
M20 M14
M22
M1E1•E2•E5 M22A S1
M1F1•F2
M1H1•H2
M1K1•K2 M18A
M14
M18
M2E5
44 40 - 4
S70
M44 M32
M34
M34A
M14
M40 M1HC
M1N2 M16
M38 M47
M16A M14 M46
N2
M18
M50A
M18A
M50
M10 M34A M48A
M18 M12 M11 M34
M18A M48
(060, 080, 110) M26
M18A M34A
M22 M10
M18 M16A J10 M34
M1HZ M16 M25
HZ
M24
M22
M20
M14
M12
M28 M18
M16
HC
40 - 5 45
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Exploded View of the Series 51 Variable Motor (Continued)
PC Regulator
T7
F33
F32
M84
M28
M84A
M28A
M52
M34
M34A
M72 T5
M66 T4
M66A M72A
M34
M34A
M30
M34
M34A
T6 M84
M34A M84A
M34
M34 M34A
M10 M28
M28A
M90A
M90 M28A
M26 M28
M26A
M34A
M34
M58
M16
M18
M27A
M27 M29
M23
M27A
M23A
M27
Q60
46 40 - 6
40 - 7 47
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Exploded View of the Series 51 Variable Motor (Continued)
Item Description Quantity Item Description Quantity
M0HC CONTROL- HYD PRPNL 2LN, DUAL PATH M0HS CONTROL- HYD PRP, 1 LN
F32 BUSHING- VALVE ASSY 1 F32 BUSHING-VALVE ASSY 1
M1HC HOUSING- HYD PRPNL (2LN),DUAL 1 M1HS HOUSING- VALVE, HYD PRPRNL 1 LN 1
M10 SCREW-SOC HD 4 M10 SCREW-SOC HD 4
M11 WASHER, FLAT (060, 080, 110) 4 M12 O-RING 1
M12 COVER 1 M14 PLUG-STR THD HEX 1
M14 GASKET 1 M16 PLUG-PLASTIC 1
M16 NUT-SEAL LOCK 1 N90 PLUG-STR THD HEX 1
M18 SCREW-SET, FL PT 1
M20 GUIDE- SPRING 1 M0HZ CONTROL- HYD PRP, 1 LN, CMPCT
M22 SPRING-HELICAL COMPRESSION 1 F32 BUSHING- VALVE ASSY 1
M24 PISTON- DELTA P 1 M1HZ HOUSING- VALVE, HYD PRP, 1 LN, CPT 1
M25 SEAT- SPRING 1 M10 VALVE ASSY- DBL CHECK 1
M26 PIN 1 M12 SCREW- SOC- DRILLED 1
M28 SCREW-SOC HD 4 M14 CONTROL SCREEN FILTER 2
M32 CONTROL SCREEN FILTER 2 M16 PLUG-STR THD HEX 2
M34 PLUG-SOC HD 4 M18 PLUG-STR THD HEX 3
M38 VALVE- BLEED 1
M40 NUT- SEAL LOCK 1 M0H1/H2 CONTROL- HYD PRP, 1 LN, MAX ANG
M44 VALVE, SHUTTLE- DELTA P 1 M0K1/K2 CONTROL- HYD PRP, 1 LN, MIN ANG
M46 SEAT- BALL CHECK 1 F32 BUSHING-VALVE ASSY 1
M47 BALL- SHUTTLE 1 M1H1 VALVE ASSY-SOLENOID,12V 1
M48 PLUG-STR THD HEX 1 M1H2 VALVE ASSY-SOLENOID,12V 1
M50 PLUG-STR THD HEX 1 M10 HSG-CONT,ELHYD, 2 POS 1
M12 PLUG-EXP 8
M0HP CONTROL- HYD PRPNL 2LN, W/BLD M14 SCREW-SOC HD 4
F32 BUSHING- VALVE ASSY 1 M16 O-RING 2
M1HP HOUSING- HYD PRPNL (2LN),W/BLD 1 M18 PLUG-STR THD HEX 1
M10 COVER 1 M20 O-RING 1
M12 GASKET 1 M22 PLUG-PLASTIC 1
M14 PISTON-SHUTTLE, DELTA P 1 N90 PLUG-STR THD,SOC HD 1
M16 SPRING-HELICAL COMPRESSION 1
M18 PIN 1 M0N2 CON-HYD, 2 POS, DIRECT
M24 O-RING 1 M1N2 COVER 1
M26 VALVE SHUTTLE,DELTA P 1 M10 PLUG 1
M28 PLUG-SEALING 1 M11 SCREW- SET,FLT PT 3
M30 O-RING 2 M12 O-RING 1
M32 PLUG-SEALING 1 M14 SCREW-SOC 4
M34 PLUG-EXP 6 M16 GASKET 1
M36 SCREW-SOC HD 4 M18 PLUG 1
N90 PLUG-STR THD HEX 1
48 40 - 8
40 - 9 49
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Exploded View of the Series 51 Variable Motor (Continued)
Item Description Quantity Item Description Quantity
S00D-G CONTROL RAMP- HP, HS, H1/H2, K1/K2 Y••• MINIMUM DISPLACEMENT
S10 GUIDE-SPRING (160-250) 1 Y10 SCREW- SET, FLT PT 1
S10D-G CONT RAMP SPRING (060-110) 1 Y20 NUT- HEX, SEAL LOCK 1
S10D-G CONT RAMP SPRING ASSY (160-250) 2 Y30 TAMPER RESISTANT CAP 1
S20 GUIDE-SPRING 1
S70 SEAT-SPRING 1 Z000 PRS COMP SET- NONE
50 40 - 10
Charge Pressure
Relief Valve
Loop Flushing
Valve
Shaft
Seal
Control
Orifices
Multi-function
Block
Control
Minimum Displacement
Limiter
51000052
Variable Displacement Motor (SAE Flange Configuration)
Fig. 50-1 - Minor Repairs
Minor Repairs may be performed, following the proce- Protect all exposed sealing surfaces and open cavi-
dures in this section, without voiding the unit war- ties from damage and foreign material.
ranty. Although specific products are illustrated,
these procedures apply to all units in the Series 51 It is recommended that all gaskets and O-rings be
family. replaced. All gasket sealing surfaces must be cleaned
prior to installing new gasket. Lightly lubricate all O-
General rings with clean petroleum jelly prior to assembly.
Cleanliness is a primary means of insuring satisfac-
tory transmission life, on either new or repaired units.
Cleaning parts by using a solvent wash and air drying
is adequate, providing clean solvent is used. As with
any precision equipment, the internal mechanism
and related items must be kept free of foreign mate-
rials and chemicals.
50 - 1 51
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Minor Repair and Replacement - Variable Motor (Continued)
Shaft Seal (SAE Flange Configuration)
Lip type shaft seals are used on the Series 51 motors.
Inspect the flange and the new seal for any damage
or nicks.
52 50 - 2
Assemble the flange and seal over the shaft and into
the housing bore. Install four (4) of the flange screws,
51000055 51000056
and tighten them evenly to pull the flange into posi- Fig. 50-6 - Install Fig. 50-7 - Torque
tion. Take care to not damage the O-ring or seal lip
Flange onto Housing Flange Screws (SAE)
during installation.
(SAE)
Install the flange screws and torque evenly to 32 Nm
(24 ft•lbsf) for 060 and 080 motors, 63 Nm (46 ft•lbsf)
for 110 motors, 110 Nm (81 ft•lbsf) for 160 motors,
and 174 Nm (128 ft•lbsf) for 250 motors.
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Minor Repair and Replacement - Variable Motor (Continued)
Install the carrier O-ring into the groove in the hous-
ing. Prior to assembly, lubricate the carrier O-ring and
the I.D. of the seal with petroleum jelly.
Assemble the carrier and seal over the shaft and into
the housing bore. Take care to not damage the O-ring
51000061 51000057
Fig. 50-12 - Install Fig. 50-13 - Install or seal lip during installation.
Seal Carrier Carrier Retaining Install the seal carrier retaining ring.
(Cartridge) Ring (Cartridge)
Loop Flushing Shuttle Valve (Option)
Using an 11/16" wrench, remove the hex plugs from
both sides of end cap.
Remove springs and spring seat washers. Note the
orientation of the washers.
NOTE The 250 frame size motors use thicker spring
seat washers.
51000062 51000063 Remove flushing valve spool.
Fig. 50-14 - Remove Fig. 50-15 - Remove
Shuttle Valve Plugs Valve Spool
51000066
Fig. 50-16 - Loop Flushing Shuttle Valve
Components
51000064 51000065
Fig. 50-17 - Install Fig. 50-18 - Install
Valve Spool and Plugs and Springs
Washers
54 50 - 4
51000069
Fig. 50-21 - Charge Relief Valve
Components
50 - 5 55
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Minor Repair and Replacement - Variable Motor (Continued)
Hydraulic 2-Position Control (Type N2)
Thoroughly clean external surfaces prior to removal
of cover plate.
51000071 51000072 Remove the solid plug from the valve sleeve bore in
Fig. 50-24 - Remove Fig. 50-25 - Remove the end cap. (An 8 mm threaded hole is provided in
Cover Plate Screws Cover Plate the plug for a puller screw.) Remove the O-ring from
the plug.
51000168
Fig. 50-26 - Remove Valve Sleeve Bore
Plug Install the cover plate onto the end cap and install the
screws. Torque the screws to 78 Nm (58 ft•lbsf) for
060, 080, or 110 units, or to 110 Nm (81 ft•lbsf) for 160
or 250 units.
51000073 51000074
Fig. 50-28 - Torque Fig. 50-29 - Torque
Cover Plate Screws Plug in End Cap
56 50 - 6
51000013
Fig. 50-32 - E1•E2 and F1•F2 Control
Components
51000077
Fig. 50-33 - Install E1•E2 or F1•F2 Control
Valve Housing
51000078 51000079
Fig. 50-34 - Install Fig. 50-35 - Install
Solenoid Valve Solenoid
50 - 7 57
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Minor Repair and Replacement - Variable Motor (Continued)
Electric 2-Position Controls (Type S1)
Thoroughly clean external surfaces prior to removing
the control.
51000163
Fig. 50-38 - S1 Control Components
51000086
Fig. 50-39 - Install S1 Control Solenoid Pin
51000165 51000166
Fig. 50-40 - Install Fig. 50-41 - Torque
Adapter Plate and Control Solenoid
Solenoid Screws
58 50 - 8
51000016
Fig. 50-44 - HZ Control Components
Units with external servo pressure supply have a plug 51000082 51000083
installed in the end cap passage leading to the valve Fig. 50-45 - HZ Fig. 50-46 - End Cap
spool sleeve. This plug may be removed with a 2.5 Control Housing O-Rings Installed
mm internal hex wrench. When installing this plug, Screens
torque to 2 Nm (18 in•lbsf).
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Minor Repair and Replacement - Variable Motor (Continued)
Hydraulic Proportional Control (Type HS)
Thoroughly clean external surfaces prior to removal
of control.
51000087
Fig. 50-49 - Remove HS Control Housing
Screws
51000019
Fig. 50-50 - HS Control Components
51000088
Fig. 50-51 - Torque HS Control Housing
Screws
60 50 - 10
51000089 51000090
Fig. 50-52 - Remove Fig. 50-53 - Remove
H1•H2 or K1•K2 Solenoid Valve
Control Solenoid
The solenoid valve may be removed from the control
valve housing with a 7/8" hex wrench.
51000021
Fig. 50-55 - H1•H2 and K1•K2 Control
Components
51000092 51000093
Fig. 50-56 - Install Fig. 50-57 - Install
Solenoid Valve Solenoid
50 - 11 61
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Minor Repair and Replacement - Variable Motor (Continued)
Two Connection Hydraulic Proportional
Control (Type HP)
Thoroughly clean external surfaces prior to removal
of control.
51000024
Fig. 50-62 - HP Control Components
62 50 - 12
Install the outer (thin) shuttle piston plug with the large
chamfer toward the shuttle valve bore. Install the
shuttle spool into its bore and install the inner (thick)
plug with the large chamfer toward the shuttle valve
bore.
51000097 51000098
Fig. 50-63 - Pilot Fig. 50-64 - Install
Piston Pin Installed Shuttle Spool and
Plugs
Position the valve housing (with O-ring) on the multi-
function block.
Install the pilot piston into the housing and over the
pin. The end of the piston with the cross drilled hole
should engage the pin.
51000099 51000100
Fig. 50-65 - Install Fig. 50-66 - Install
Control Housing Pilot Piston
51000101 51000102
Fig. 50-67 - Install Fig. 50-68 - Install
Spring Cover, Gasket, and
Screws
50 - 13 63
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Minor Repair and Replacement - Variable Motor (Continued)
Two Connection Hydraulic Proportional
Control for “Dual Path” Vehicles (Type HC)
Bleed Valve
51000176 51000104
Fig. 50-71 - Install Fig. 50-72 - Remove
HC Control Bleed Servo Pressure Ball
Valve Seal Nut Shuttle Valve
Install the servo pressure shuttle ball.
51000123 51000174
Fig. 50-73 - Install Fig. 50-74 - Torque
Servo Pressure Servo Pressure
Shuttle Ball Valve Shuttle Ball Seat
Control Pressure Shuttle Valve
Remove the pilot piston pin seat and pin from the
control housing (or pilot piston).
50 - 15 65
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Minor Repair and Replacement - Variable Motor (Continued)
The plugs on the control housing may be removed
with a 7/16" hex wrench or a 1/4" internal hex wrench.
When reinstalling, torque the 5/16" plugs to 9 Nm (7
ft•lbsf), and the 9/16" plugs to 20 Nm (15 ft•lbsf).
51000111
Fig. 50-83 - HC Control Components
Install the valve housing onto the end cap, and install
the screws (with flat washers on 060, 080, and 110
units).
51000110 51000114
Fig. 50-86 - Install Fig. 50-87 - Torque
HC Control Housing HC Control Housing
Screws
66 50 - 16
Install the pilot piston pin. The end of the pin must
engage the recess in the end of the control valve
spool.
51000115 51000116
Fig. 50-88 - Install Fig. 50-89 - Install
HC Control Start Pilot Piston Pin
Spring
Install the pilot piston pin seat.
Install the pilot piston into the housing and over the
spring and spring seat. The end of the piston with the
deeper bore and the cross drilled hole should engage
the start spring and pin seat.
51000117 51000118
Fig. 50-90 - Install Fig. 50-91 - Install
Pilot Piston Pin Seat HC Control Pilot
Piston
Install the adjustor spring in the outer end of the pilot
piston.
51000119 51000120
Fig. 50-92 - Install Fig. 50-93 - Install
HC Control Start HC Control Start
Adjuster Spring Adjuster Spring Seat
Install the control cover and gasket (with adjusting
screw and seal lock nut).
51000106 51000121
Fig. 50-94 - Install Fig. 50-95 - Torque
HC Control Cover Control Cover
and Gasket Screws
50 - 17 67
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Minor Repair and Replacement - Variable Motor (Continued)
Electrohydraulic Proportional Control
(Types EP and EQ)
Thoroughly clean external surfaces prior to removal
of control.
51000126 51000086
Fig. 50-98 - Remove Fig. 50-99 - Remove
EP•EQ Control Pilot Piston Pin
Housing
Install new O-rings on the valve housing and retain
with petroleum jelly.
51000027
Fig. 50-100 - EQ Control Components (EP
Similar)
68 50 - 18
51000097 51000127
Fig. 50-101 - Pilot Fig. 50-102 - Install
Piston Pin Installed Control Housing
Install the pilot piston into the housing and over the
pin. The end of the piston with the cross drilled hole
should engage the pin.
51000128 51000129
Fig. 50-103 - Install Fig. 50-104 - Install
Pilot Piston Spring
51000130 51000131
Fig. 50-105 - Torque Fig. 50-106 - Install
Cover, Gasket, and PCP Valve
Screws
50 - 19 69
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Minor Repair and Replacement - Variable Motor (Continued)
Pressure Control Pilot (PCP) Valve for
Electrohydraulic Proportional Control
(Types EP and EQ)
Thoroughly clean external surfaces of control.
51000124 51000131
Fig. 50-109 - Install Fig. 50-110 - Torque
PCP onto Control PCP Valve Screws
70 50 - 20
function block or end cap. Fig. 50-113 - Remove Fig. 50-114 - Multi-
Multi-function Block function Block
Units with external servo pressure supply have a plug
Screens
installed in the end cap passage leading to the valve
spool sleeve. This plug may be removed with a 2.5
mm internal hex wrench. When installing this plug,
torque to 2 Nm (18 in•lbsf).
Install a new O-ring onto the valve spool sleeve in the
end cap.
Install new O-rings onto the end cap.
Install the multi-function block onto the end cap, and
install the screws. 51000083 51000135
Torque the screws to 78 Nm (58 ft•lbsf) for 060, 080, Fig. 50-115 - End Fig. 50-116 - Install
or 110 units, or to 110 Nm (81 ft•lbsf) for 160 or 250 Cap O-Rings Multi-function Block
units. Installed
Reinstall the external control assembly as described
in the instructions for the specific control.
51000137 51000088
Fig. 50-117 - Torque Fig. 50-118 - Install
Multi-function Block External Control (HS
Screws Shown)
50 - 21 71
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Minor Repair and Replacement - Variable Motor (Continued)
Servo Pressure Supply Shuttle Spool
51000030
Fig. 50-121 - Multi-function Block with
Servo Pressure Supply Shuttle Spool
51000139 51000140
Fig. 50-122 - Install Fig. 50-123 - Torque
Servo Pressure Servo Pressure
Supply Shuttle Spool Supply Spool Plug
72 50 - 22
51000144 51000145
Fig. 50-128 - Remove Fig. 50-129 - Remove
PCOR•PC Plug PCOR•PC Valve
Block
Install new O-rings on the pressure compensator
valve block and retain with petroleum jelly. Install a
new O-ring on the adjusting screw.
51000146
Fig. 50-130 - Pressure Compensator Valve
Block Components
50 - 23 73
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Minor Repair and Replacement - Variable Motor (Continued)
Install the valve block on the multi-function block and
install the screws. Torque the screws to 11 Nm (8
ft•lbsf).
51000147 51000148
Fig. 50-131 - Install Fig. 50-132 - Install
PCOR•PC Valve PCOR•PC Valve Plug
Block
Install the pressure compensator spool assembly
and the valve spring.
51000143 51000142
Fig. 50-133 - Install Fig. 50-134 - Install
PCOR•PC Spring PCOR•PC Adjusting
and Spool Valve Screw
PCOR and PC Regulator Orifices
51000172
Fig. 50-136 - PCOR and PC Regulator
Orifices
74 50 - 24
51000032
Fig. 50-139 - Multi-function Block With
PCOR Defeat Spool Components
Install the PCOR defeat spool into its bore in the multi-
function block.
51000152 51000153
Fig. 50-140 - Install Fig. 50-141 - Install
PCOR Defeat Spool PCOR Defeat Spool
Stop Plug
50 - 25 75
saue
Bent Axis Variable Displacement Motors Series 51
Minor Repair and Replacement - Variable Motor (Continued)
Pressure Compensator Regulator (Type
PC)
The PC regulator utilizes the multi-function block and
pressure compensator valve to control the motor
displacement.
Service procedures for these components are in-
cluded in the “Multi-function Block” section of this
manual.
51000035
Fig. 50-142 - PC Regulator Components
76 50 - 26
51000156 51000157
Fig. 50-147 - Servo Fig. 50-148 - Servo
Orifice for Minimum Drain Orifices (T7
Displacement (T3) and T8)
Plug / Fitting Torques
If any plugs or fittings are removed from the unit
during servicing, they should be torqued as indicated
in the accompanying table.
Item Torque
Pressure Gauge Ports 37 Nm
(9/16—18 O-Ring Hex) (27 ft•lbsf)
Construction Plugs 20 Nm
(9/16—18 O-Ring Int. Hex) (15 ft•lbsf)
Construction Plugs 9 Nm
(5/16—24 O-Ring) (7 ft•lbsf)
Screw Plugs 4 Nm
(M6 Int. Hex) (35 in•lbsf)
50 - 27 77
808
DO NOT REMOVE UNTIL CONTROL VALVE AND
17.5
S10
S20
J30
J10
S10 S70
BOMAG
J30
J10
T1 S70
T3
Remove Item T1 BEFORE removing Item F32! T7
Install Item T1 AFTER installing Item F32! F32
J30
Install O-ring J10 F33
a
Genuine
13 mm hex wrench
Torque to 20 Nm Items T7 and T8:
(15 lbsf•ft) For 2-Position Controls 2.5 mm int. hex wrench
4-Way Valve and Feedback Springs
Install O-rings
DO NOT DISTURB ADJUSTMENT! on valve sleeve
Series 51 MV
008 911 63
Axle drive motor
DO NOT REMOVE UNTIL CONTROL VALVE AND
008 911 63
SPRINGS ARE REMOVED!
Remove as an assembly to preserve adjustment (060 — 110).
INSTALL BEFORE INSTALLING SPRINGS AND
CONTROL VALVE!
Axle drive motor
S50
S30
For 060 — 110 Frame Sizes
S60
Items T1, T2, and T3: For 160 — 250 Frame Sizes
S40 3 mm internal hex wrench;
Torque to 5 Nm (44 lbsf•in)
4 mm internal
hex wrench T2 S20
saue
S11T
S10
S20 S10T
BOMAG
S70
S11T
T1 S10
T3 S10T
S70
Remove Item T1 BEFORE removing Item F32!
T7
Install Item T1 AFTER installing Item F32!
F32
Install O-ring
a
Genuine
T8
13 mm hex wrench
Torque to 20 Nm Items T7 and T8:
(15 lbsf•ft) 2.5 mm int. hex wrench
Torque to 2 Nm (18 lbsf•in)
10 mm hex wrench
Torque to 9 Nm (6.6 lbsf•ft) 5 mm threaded holes
Sheet 2
on valve sleeve
Series 51 MV
79
17.5
809
17.5 Axle drive motor
saue
Hydraulic Power Systems
Heavy Duty Axial Piston Heavy Duty Bent Axis Cartridge Motors/
Pumps and Motors Variable Motors Compact Wheel Drives
F000 685 F000 688 F000 690 F000 684
Open Circuit Axial Piston Pumps Gear Pumps and Motors Genuine Service Parts
Bild 35
008 911 63
table of contents: BW 177..219 D−4/D−40
Blatt Nr.: Zeichnungsnummer
Funktionsgruppe function unit
sheet no.: drawing − no.
001 582 702 09 Stromlaufplan Circuit Diagram
002 582 702 09 Versorgung, Starten, Motordrehzahl supply, starting unit, engine−speed
003 582 702 09 Motor−Heizflansch, Signalhorn, Geschwindigkeit−Anz. engine heating−flange cont., warning horn, speedometer
004 582 702 09 Bremse, Rückfahrwarneinr., Anzeige brake, back up alarm, indicator
005 582 702 09 Fahrstufen, Sitzkontaktsch., Vibration speed−ranges, seat−switch, vibr.
Wiring diagram 582 702 09
BOMAG
16.11.2005
001 001
Vogt Stromlaufplan 582 702 09
16.11.2005
18.3
945
circuit diagram 001
Seis
946
30 6:1
K30
9:2
15:54
18.3
2:10 K11 30
X1
X1:15E 2:10
17E
87 87a
1
X1:9
F13 1
X1:10
F105
30A
2 20A
X1:15A 2 K11/87 3:1
X1
X37:A
17A X1
S00 30 X1:30E
X36:B
X36:A
30 27E
B+
2:11 K35 1
2:16 F14 1 F39
15A 15A
4qmm
Startschalter 87a 87 2 2
starting switch 15 54 58 19 17 50a
X1 X1 X1:30A
15:54 27A
2:13 80 K32:86
X1 9:2
79 S120 11 23
30 F14:2
5:9
K114
X37:B 2:14 S01:21
X1:3 X1:4 5:9
nur ohne Sitzkontaktschalter
without switch seat−contact
V01
3:2 87a 87
Schalter Motordrehzl
2 1 K11:86 K05 X1:151
4:5
6:5
30(3)
main fuse
125mA
4:3
Hauptsicherung
K14 21 11 31 ?
heating−flange
K61 87 87a
Sicherung Heizflansch
3:5 86 1 K61 30 S01
87(4) 86
F48 2 F00 2 R10 2:5 22 12 32 ?
82 OHM K35
87 87a NOT−AUS
85 2 K05/87
125A
125A
1 1 3:2 85 Emerg.−Stop
X1:53
BOMAG
4:13 X1:152
K61/85
6:2 B+ X1 X1 X1 X1 30
X1:60 K22
X1 D+ MESX 2:5 7 8 58 59
1 4:9
G03 + G01 + X1 2x2.5qmm 87 87a
65 X38:A 2
125mA
50A / 10A
30 50 1 AW 54
86
AUX
86 86 86 Y01 2 + HW 1
167A
K09 Y13
B− W M01 K114 Y120
1 1 K36 K11 M
S30 W 1 70A/1A − 2
31−1
R19 85
X1:66 85 85 85 −
2 X1
X1 X1 55
62 63
Option
option
X1:168
31 31 3:1
2:8 4:4 10:7 2:18 2:16 2:13
Trennschalter Batterie
break switch battery
Heizflansch Batterie Batterie Generator Starter Startmehrmenge Hubmagnet Drehzahl Kraftstoffabschaltug
heating−flange battery battery generator starter start boost fuel sol. engine speed fuel shut off
16.05.2005
1 1
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 09
F24:2
4:10
4:19
GLÜH
2:10 K11:86 X1
008 911 63
52
2:13 K05/87 X1
78 X1
X1 28E
75
F23 1
10A
2 X1
X1 92
28A
X1:155 +
15/54
Lern
Test
OUT+
Wiring diagram 582 702 09
5 2 7 1 S03 −
−
in
Geschwindigkeitsanz.
X1
OUT−
14 24
A13
93
X1 X1
3 4 6 97 98
Anbau im Motorbereich
X1 X1 ZA Geschwindigkeitsanzeige
assembled in engine−area
101 102 option speedometer
Modul Heizflanschsteuerung
modul heating−flange−control
1
Taster Signalhorn
push but. warning horn
BOMAG
X1:171
K14
2
2
+
V21
V22
dir. X1:173
4.2A
4.2A
1
1
B60 DIR MESX 6:2
Relais Heizflansch
Nur bei BW 219 D−4 und D−40 USA Version, sonst Option
only at BW 219 D−4 and D−40 USA version, otherwise option
speed
relais heating−flange
B11 1 B11 1 SPEED MESX 6:2
Anbau im Motorbereich
assembled in engine−area
− X1:172
2 SPEED TAC
9:6
1 2 2
nicht bei D−40/BW211D−4 ohne SN1
not at D−40/BW211D−4 ohne SN1
B113
2
X1 X1 X1 X1
57 64 99 100 X1:174
2:20 31 31 4:1
16.11.2005
1 1 582 702 09
Vogt Motor−Heizflansch, Signalhorn, Geschwindigkeit−Anz.
18.3
16.11.2005
947
Seis engine heating−flange cont., warning horn, speedometer 003
948
3:20 K11/87 K11/87 5:1
Zentralstecker Sammelanzeige (Ansicht von hinten)
X1 X1:31E mainplug monitoring module (view from backside)
29E
18.3
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 1
F25 F24
10A 10A
2 2 X5:1−20
Sammelanzeige 201918 1716151413 121110
X1
X1:31A monitoring module
29A 6 Vorglühen
A15 GLÜH
F24:2 3:5
3:15 Warnbl.
7 BL−W
8:16
X1 15/54 Blinker rechts
20 FUEL 19 BL−R
HOURS 8:17
X1:156 86 OUT2 Blinker links
9 18 BL−L
F25:2 8:17
5:2 OUT1 Sitz
1 12 A68/6
5:9
Bel.
8 4
X12 X13 8:5
1 1 BEL 10 3
geöffnet in 0
Position (Bremse ein)
BR/BN 30 BR/BN
30 2 14 11 13 15 17 16 5
D+
K48 K26
GND
B13 B14
4:2 4:6
Bremse
5:9
5:9
Luftfilter
87a 87 87a 87
Tankanzeige
BL/BU SW/BK BL/BU SW/BK
Motoröldruck
Öltemperatur
Hydraulikölfilter
D+
Wasserabscheider
30 X1 X1 X1
B06:1
Kühlmittelfüllstand
K36 69 87 76
Initiator Farhebel"0
2:7
BOMAG
X1:147 K26/87A
S01 X1
K61/85
2:18 109 2:6
X1:61
12 SITZWARN.
K48/86 5:9 5:9 X1
X1:150 X1 X1
105
X1:148 X1:153 114 90 K48:87A X8 1 X8 2
6:2 4:3
X10
300mA
X1:113 BRAKE MESX 2 X21:1
Sensor
2.5A
125mA
X9 89 +
86 86 Y04 86 1 86 R03
K48 K05 1 K26 K22 P P _t P Q
H14+ + bl 4 4 B30 2 −
− P
H07
85 85 2 85 X9 85 X10 X21:2
2 3 X1:117 X1:57
125mA
125mA
X1:149 X1 X1:82 X1:117
X1:117 129 X1:117
3:20 31 31 5:1
Magnetventil Bremse Rückfahrwarnsummer Warnsummer Störung Tankgeber Luftfilter Motoröldruck Sensor Wasserabschei
solenoid valve brake buzzer back up alarm buzzer failure sender fuel
air cleaner engine oil pressure sens. water separator
Hydraulikölfilter Öltemperatur Kühlmittelstand
Resist. buzzer hydraulik oil cleaner oil temperature coolant stock level
16.11.2005
1 1
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 09
X1:32E
D+ F03 1
4:13
15A 2
008 911 63
B06:1
4:17 X1:32A
4:3 K48/86
Fahren
Öldruck
D+
F25:2 1 12 13 14 30 56
4:8
K04
31
A68 Modul Sitzschalter/Vibration
module seatswitch/vibration
Wiring diagram 582 702 09
S 56b
modul vibration
Modul Vibration
13 4 6 9 11 15 5
S42 1234 2
S42
1 5 7 3 S01:21
14 2:20 X1:158 X1:157
Fahrstufensch.
switch speed ranges K26/87A
Schalter Fahrstufen
2
1
B 1 X1:159
V09 X1 14
S13
88
23 13
A68/6 3 S35
S58
4:19 13
BOMAG
2
1
V05 X1:161 X1:160
V02 V03
2 1 1 2
GA MESX
6:2
Taster Vibration
pushbutton vibration
KA MESX 6:2
X1:141 X1:137 X1:142 X1:141
X1:116 X1:115
switch seat−contact
Sitzkontaktschalter
1.23A
1.23A
1.23A
X6 X7
Y31 Y30 Y31 X14 X11 1 1
1 1 1 1 Y07 Y08
3.33A
3.33A
A 2
9:7 KA
9:6 GA
a b
2 2 2 2
X6 X7
2 2
X1:124 X1:138 X1:124 X1:124
X1:149
X1:154
X1:149
X1:149
31
X1:118
4:20 31 6:1
16.11.2005
1 1 582 702 09
Vogt Fahrstufen, Sitzkontaktsch., Vibration
18.3
16.11.2005
949
Vogt speed−ranges, seat−switch, vibr. 005
950
Beschleunigungssensoren Beschleunigungssensoren Drucker Anzeige BMFSA Display Messtechnik BOP
acc. sensor front acc. sensor rear printer Display BMFSA display measurem. BOP
GND
30
18.3
2:20 30 8:1
Pot 30
K11/87
8:20 Pot 15
X4:C
X4:E
X4:D
P16
B62 B62 F1 F2
+/sw
+/sw
nur bei BEM
only at BEM
X74:3
X74:5
X74:4
2 X42:4 X42:5
X2:57 X1:34A P11
20g/br
20g/br
nur bei BTM prof
X48:3 X48:4 X49:3 X49:4
Pot. 15
Leistung
Elektronik
AGND MESX
RxD TxD
BOMAG
X44:1
X44:7
X44:5
X44:4
X44:31
X44:56
X44:57
X44:59
X44:60
X44:30
X44:58
X44:29
X44:27
X44:26
X44:28
X44:54
A83
Messtechnik−Rechner
X44:38
X44:15
X44:35
X44:14
X44:32
X44:36
X44:37
X44:38
X44:41
X44:53
X44:33
X44:55
X44:65
X44:66
X44:67
X44:68
GND
5:17
EVIB
KA MESX
GND
EVIB−Meter
EVIB−meter
nur bei BEM
only at BEM
16.11.2005
1 1
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 09
008 911 63
CAN3−
6:18
6:18 CAN3+
CAN3+ CAN3−
1 R242
120 OHM
X2:61 X2:62
R25
Wiring diagram 582 702 09
1 2
120 OHM
X4:N X4:M
X75:7 X75:2
A87
USB−CAN Schnittst.
USB−CAN Interface BCM
X2:70
BOMAG
X76:1 X4:G
X76:2
P15
X4:F
X2:63
BCM 05
nur bei BCM
only at BCM
6:20 31 31 8:1
16.11.2005
1 1 582 702 09
Vogt BOMAG Compaction Management BCM
18.3
16.11.2005
951
Seis BOMAG Compaction Management BCM 007
952
5:20 K11/87 K11/87 6:2
6:19 30 30
X1:18E X1:26E X1:19E X1:25E
X1:2
18.3
X1:301
Schalter StvZO 87 87a
switch, StvZO
13 23
012 31 11 23 Anschluß Arbeitsschein− L0R
werfer ohne StvZO L0R Schalter Blinker
S37
connection working head X1:21E X1:22E switch indicator
lights without StvZO 5 4 14 24
S15 F22 F19
32 12 24 15A 15A
Anschluß Arbeitsscheinwerfer
X1:21A E X1:22A D bei Kabine
Connection head lights
X1:306
X1:307
X1:302
9:17 A02
STV2
9:17
X1:23E X1:24E
K16 30 31 82 L R
8:9 F09 F10
15A 15A
87 87a X1:23A X1:24A
BOMAG
switch, working head lights
Schalter Arbeitsbeleuchtung
X1:308
X1:304
X1:303
13 23
01
01
S14
X1:311
X1:310
X1:319
X1:312
Anschluß Arbeitsschein−
werfer ohne StvZO
connection working head
X1:314
X1:84
Warnblinkschalter 14 24
6:2 switch, hazard light
X61:3 X1:320
X59:5
X60:3
X59:3
X58:5 X1:309
X58:3
X61:1 X1:322
X60:1 X1:321
X59:2
X58:2
0,125A
0,125A
E16 1 E17 1 E13 1 E12 1 E14 1 E15 1 E27 1 E28 1 E23 1 E25 1 4:19 E08 1 E09 1 E10 1 E11 1
+
2 2 86 2 2 2 2 86 2 2 2 2 H06 2 2 2 2
K06 K16
4,6A
4,6A
4,6A
4,6A
−
X61:2
X59:6
X58:6
X60:2
85 85
X3:1
X1:315 X58:6
X1:316 X59:6
X1:315 X58:6
X1:316 X59:6
4,6A
4,6A
0,42A
0,42A
0,42A
0,42A
1,75A
1,75A
1,75A
1,75A
X1:323 X60:4
X1:324 X61:4
X1:315
X1:316
X1:323
X1:324
7:20 9:1
31
8:10 Schlußleuchte links 8:2 Bel. Warnbinkschalter 31
Scheinwerfer links tail light, LH illumination, switch hazard light
head light LH Parkleuchte links Blinkleuchte VL Blinkleuchte HR
Anschluß Arbeitsscheinwerfer
Scheinwerfer rechts parking light, LH bei ROPS/SD Aufbau indicator front, LH indicator rear, RH
head light RH Parkleuchte rechts Blinkleuchte HL
parking light, RH Connection head lights indicator rear, LH
acc.to ROPS/SD
Schlußleuchte rechts Blinkleuchte VR
tail light, RH indicator front, RH
16.11.2005
1 1
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 09
008 911 63
8:13
87 87a E F
G H A B C
X3:3
F143 F42 F43 F44 F130 F41 F144
15A 10A 15A 15A 10A 10A 15A
7 8 1 2 3
5 6
F42 10:8
F130 9:9 F130 F130 10:7
9:14
A12
15
1,75A
0,83A
K141 30 1 B51 + + 30 01W 7 2 01W 7 2 1 S163 5 1 S38 5
+ + B51
01 01 E72
9:16 E29 E70
− − − − 1
Wiring diagram 582 702 09
87 87a 2 2 2 1
31 S21 5 4 S20 5 4
Radio
radio
Steckdose Fahrerst.
3,8A
3,8A
1 Tachographenmodul
2 4 6 A1 XS
Nachtleuchte
− 3:16 P09 +
indicator
X55:1
X56:1
X55:3
X56:3
12V 2 1
X55:4
X56:4
night illumination
SPEED TAC A16 1 B3 E27 1 E28 1 E23 1 E25
Kontrolleuchte
Innenleuchte
inside light, cabin
socket cabin
−
12V
Steckdose Kabine
+ 7,8,9 2 B4 2 2 2 2
A01 5 3 C3
A5+A6
S45 TK −
Heizung Heckscheibe
4 1
BOMAG
A51
Schalter Innenleuche
switches interior lights
3
5A
86 S86 + 3 2 5 + + S158 I 15 +
K32 E32
M05 M M04 M K141
M M
31
X3:16
X3:15
− −
3 min
85 − M07 − M06 4
KA
GA
2,9A
ZA
only at hand−rail/Rops/sun−roof
5:17
5:16
10:18
Relais Kabine Türkontaktschalter Frequenzmodul Tachograph KABINE 31
relais cabin door switch module, frequency tachograph Schalter Nachtleuchte
switch, night illumination
X3:1
X3:2
Schalterbel.
switch illum.
8:20 31 31 10:1
16.11.2005
1 1 582 702 09
Vogt ZA Kabine, Beleuchtung, Radio, Tachograph
18.3
16.11.2005
953
Seis opt. cabin, headlights, radio, tachograph 009
954
9:20 K32:87 9:19 F41:5
Potential 15 aus Kabine
9:17 F130 F42:H
9:4
F42 Potential 15 aus Kabine
9:9
18.3
2.5qmm
Bedienteil Kabinenheizung/Klimaanlage
1 2 3 12 11 13 14 16
X53:B X53:C control−unit cab−heater /air conditioning X54:4 X54:3 X54:2
0123 4 3 2 5 7 11 3 10 1
S44 A72
Steuergerät
control unit
6 11 12 1 Regel aus = 0,4A
S28
Schalter Kabinenlüfter
E30 Kleine Stufe = 0,67A
switch blower cabin X54:6 X54:11 X54:12 X54:1 Zusatzheizung mittleter Stufe = 1,0A
add. heater große Stufe = 1.9A
heater timer
X53:L
X53:H
X53:M
2:8
87 87a X1:167 5 9 10 6 8 7 4 15
2.5qmm
X1:169 X18:1
X3:9
X3:11
X3:10
X3:12
X19:1
B131
B103 1 1
_t
BOMAG
_t 2 2
Thermofühler Klimaanlage
X19:2
X20:1 X18:2
X17:1 X1:163
temperature sensor air conditioning
X17:3 X1:166
X17:2 X1:165
Thermofühler Heizung
temperature sensor heating unit
B104 4
P
HP X77:1
1A
LP 3
ge rt or ge rt or
Y138 1 1
X1:170 9:19
X20:4
X20:3
V06 Y14 KABINE 31
Überwachung Kühlmitteldruck
monitoring coolant pressure
M09 M M09 M
Kabinenlüfter 2 2
br br
X20:2
X77:2
Y15 1 2
X17:4 V04 X1:168
2 1
3,5A
X1:164
9:20 31 31
Vogt
1 1
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 09
E08 008 17 Blinkleuchte vorne links Indicator, front, lh. MAX. 1,75A
E09 008 18 Blinkleuchte hinten links Indicator, rear, lh. MAX. 1,75A
E10 008 19 Blinkleuchte vorne rechts Indicator, front, rh. MAX. 1,75A
E11 008 19 Blinkleuchte hinten rechts Indicator, rear, rh. MAX. 1,75A
E12 008 7 Parkleuchte links Parking light, lh. MAX. 0,42A
E13 008 6 Schlussleuchte links Tail light, lh. MAX. 0,42A
E14 008 7 Parkleuchte rechts Parking light, rh. MAX. 0,42A
E15 008 8 Schlussleuchte rechts Tail light, rh. MAX. 0,42A
component listing
E23 008 11 Arbeitsscheinwerfer vorne links Working head light, front, lh. MAX. 4,6A
E23 009 18 Arbeitsscheinwerfer vorne links Working head light, front, lh. 4,6A
E25 008 12 Arbeitsscheinwerfer vorne rechts Working head light, front, rh. MAX. 4,6A
E25 009 19 Arbeitsscheinwerfer vorne rechts Working head light, front, rh. 4,6A
E27 008 10 Arbeitsscheinwerfer hinten links Working head light, rear, lh. MAX. 4,6A
E27 009 17 Arbeitsscheinwerfer hinten links Working head light, rear, lh. 4,6A
E28 008 11 Arbeitsscheinwerfer hinten rechts Working head light, rear, rh. MAX. 4,6A
E28 009 17 Arbeitsscheinwerfer hinten rechts Working head light, rear, rh. 4,6A
E29 009 4 Innenleuchte Kabine Inside light, cabin 1,75A
E30 010 13 Heizgeraet Heating unit
E32 009 19 Kennleuchte Warning light 5A
E70 009 15 Nachtleuchte Night lamp 0,83A
E71 009 3 Kontrolleuchte Schalter Heckscheibenheizung indicator light switch rear screen 1,75A
E72 009 16 Beleuchtung Bedienschalter illum. Switches
F148 006 2 Sicherung Steuerung MESX (Potential 15) Fuse Controller (Pot. 15)
K48 004 2 Relais Fahrhebel 0−Stellung Relay, travel lever 0−position BOSCHW
K61 002 5 Relais Ladekontrolle Relay, charge control BOSCHW
K114 002 14 Relais Motordrehzahl Relay, engine rpm BOSCHW
K141 009 16 Relais Heckscheibenheizung relay, heating rear screen BOSCHW
Y01 002 12 Magnetventil Startmehrmenge Solenoid valve, start boost fuel MAX. 3.9A
Y04 004 5 Magnetventil Bremse Solenoid valve, brake MAX. 1,8A
Y07 005 14 Magnetventil Vibration vorne gross Solenoid valve, vibration, front, high MAX. 2,5A
6
Y08 005 16 Magnetventil Vibration vorne klein Solenoid valve, vibration, front, low MAX. 2,5A
Y13 002 18 Hubmagnet Motor Shut off solenoid, engine MAX. 3.8A
Y14 010 13 Kraftstoffpumpe Heizgeraet Fuel pump, heating unit
Y15 010 7 Magnetkupplung Klimakompressor Magnetic clutch, air conditioning compr. 3,5A
582 702 09
Y30 005 6 Magnetventil Stufenumschaltung vorn Solenoid valve, speed range sel., front MAX. 1,67A
Y31 005 3 Magnetventil Stufenumschaltung hinten Solenoid valve, speed range sel., rear MAX. 1,23A
Y31 005 8 Magnetventil Stufenumschaltung hinten Solenoid valve, speed range sel., rear MAX. 1,23A
Y120 002 16 Magnetventil Motordrehzahl hoch Solenoid valve, rpm engine high
Y138 010 10 Magnetveentil Heizung Solenoid valve, heating unit 3,5A
106
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 09
BOMAG
A02 R10 K05
K36 K22
K48
K61
A68 K114
K26
961
Gepr.: 19.10.2005 Ers. f.: Blatt Nr.: 201
Name: Seis
overview e-box BW 177...219 D-4/D-40 Replaces: Sheet No.: 201
Nur bei VM8
only acc. To VM8
962
F1 F2
CAN 1
18.3
BOMAG
CAN 1 OPUS 21
A83
Messtechnik Steuerung
CAN 3 BCM
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 09
1 05756417
2 05756421
3 2 x 05756425 "L" + 793-501
7 05756422
8 4 x 05756423 "L" + 05756419 + 793-501
32 05756435
33 05756417
1 05756417
9 05756537
10 4 x 05756538 "R" + 793-501
14 05756537
15 3 x 05756538 "R" + 793-501
18 05756537
19 3 x 05756540 "R" + 793-501
23 05756537
24 5 x 05756540 "R" + 793-501
29 05756537
30 2 x 05756538 "R" + 793-501
34 05756537
35 4 x 05756538 "R" + 793-501
39 05756537
40 4 x 05756540 "R" + 793-501
46 05756537
47 05756540 "R" + 793-501
48 05756535 "R" + 793-501
49 05756537
50 2 x 05756538 "R" + 793-501
52 05756537
53 4 x 05756540 "R" + 793-501
58 05756537
59 4 x 05756540 "R" + 793-501
63 05756537
64 05756540 "R" + 793-501
65 05756535 "R" + 793-501
66 05756537
67 05756540 "R" + 793-501
68 05756535 "R" + 793-501
69 05756537
70 05756538 "R" + 793-501
71 2 x 05756540 "R" + 793-501
74 05756537
75 05756417
1 05756417
5 05756537
6 05756538 "R" + 793-501
7 2 x 05756540 "R" + 793-501
10 05756537
11 2 x 05756540 "R" + 793-501
14 05756537
15 05756540 "R" + 793-501
16 05756538 "R" + 793-501
18 05756537
19 05756417
008 911 63
X5
X21
X11 X12
X59 X13
X58 X42
X20
X46 X14
X18 X77
X17 X6 X7
X22 X19 X4 X3
X8
Wiring diagram 582 702 09
BOMAG
X61
X77 X9
X21
X74 X75
X59
X76
X42 X11 X12 X8
X10
X46 X13
X56
X53
X20
X18
X5 X17 X14
X19 X55 X6 X7
X54
X58
X4 X3
X36 X1
X37 X44 X2
X38 X60
X48 X49
X22
977
Gepr.: 19.10.2005 Ers. f.: Blatt Nr.: 301
Name: Seis Connector overview BW 177...219 D-4/D-40 Replaces: Sheet No.: 301
18.3 Wiring diagram 582 702 09
008 911 63
table of contents: BW 177..219 D−4/D−40
Blatt Nr.: Zeichnungsnummer
Funktionsgruppe function unit
sheet no.: drawing − no.
001 582 702 29 Stromlaufplan Circuit Diagram
002 582 702 29 Versorgung, Starten, Motordrehzahl supply, starting unit, engine−speed
003 582 702 29 Motor−Heizflansch, Signalhorn, Kraftstoffvorwärmung engine heating−flange cont., warning horn, fuel pre−heater
004 582 702 29 Bremse, Rückfahrwarneinr., Überwachung brake, back up alarm, monitoring
005 582 702 29 Anzeigen indicators
Wiring diagram 582 702 29
BOMAG
03.01.2007
001 001
Vogt Stromlaufplan 582 702 29
03.01.2007
18.4
981
circuit diagram 001
Seis
982
30 7:1
K30
10:2
15:54
18.4
2:10 K11 30
X1
X1:15E 2:10
17E
87 87a
1
X1:9
F13 1
X1:10
F105
30A
2 20A
X1:15A 2 K11/87 3:1
X1
X37:A
17A X1
X36:B
S00 30 X1:30E
X36:A
30 27E
B+
2:11 K35 1
2:16 F14 1 F39
15A 15A
4qmm
Startschalter 87a 87 2 2
starting switch 15 54 58 19 17 50a
X1 X1 X1:30A
15:54 27A
2:13 80 K32:86
X1 10:2
79 S120 11 23
30 F14:2
6:9
K114
nur ohne Sitzkontaktschalter
without switch seat−contact
Schalter Motordrehzl
2 1 K11:86 K05 X1:151
4:5
7:5
30(3)
main fuse
125mA
4:3
Hauptsicherung
K14 21 11 31 ?
heating−flange
K61 87 87a
Sicherung Heizflansch
3:5 86 1 K61 30 S01
87(4) 86
F48 2 F00 2 R10 2:5 22 12 32 ?
82 OHM K35
87 87a NOT−AUS
85 2 K05/87
125A
125A
1 1 3:2 85 Emerg.−Stop
X1:53
BOMAG
4:13 X1:152
K61/85
7:2 2:5 B+ X1 X1 X1 X1 30
X1:60 K22
X1 D+ MESX 7 8 58 59
1 4:9
G03 + G01 + X1 2x2.5qmm 87 87a
65 X38:A 2
81 54
125mA
50A / 10A
30 50 1
3.8A
86 AW
AUX
86 86 86 Y01 2 + HW 1
167A
K09 Y13
B− W M01 K114 Y120
1 1 K36 K11 M
S30 1 70A/1A − 2
31−1
R19 85
85 85 85 −
2 X1 X1 X1
Option
option
X1:66 X1:168
31 31 3:1
2:8 4:4 11:7 2:18 2:16 2:13
Trennschalter Batterie
break switch battery
Heizflansch Batterie Batterie Generator Starter Startmehrmenge Hubmagnet Drehzahl Kraftstoffabschaltug
heating−flange battery battery generator starter start boost fuel sol. engine speed fuel shut off
03.01.2007
1 1
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 29
4:19 X1 X1
GLÜH 28E 37E
2:10 K11:86 X1 1 1
008 911 63
F23 F124
52
10A 25A
2:13 K05/87 X1 2 2
X1 X1
78
28A 37A
X1
75
X1:155
Wiring diagram 582 702 29
13 23
5 2 7 1 S03
14 24
A13
X1 X1
3 4 6 97 98
Anbau im Motorbereich
X1 X1
assembled in engine−area
101 102
Modul Heizflanschsteuerung
modul heating−flange−control
1
Taster Signalhorn
X1:217
BOMAG
K14
2
2
V21
V22
4.2A
4.2A
1
1
Relais Heizflansch
Nur bei BW 219 D−4 und D−40 USA Version, sonst Option
only at BW 219 D−4 and D−40 USA version, otherwise option
relais heating−flange
B11 1 B11 1 1
Anbau im Motorbereich
R79
assembled in engine−area
2
1 2 2 2
nicht bei D−40/BW211D−4 ohne SN1
not at D−40/BW211D−4 ohne SN1
Option Winterpaket
option winter package
B113
2
X1 X1 X1 X1
57 64 99 100 X1:218
2:20 31 31 4:1
2:2
Kühlmitteltemperatur Signalhorn Signalhorn Kraftstoffvorwärmung
collant temperature warning horn warning horn fuel pre−heater
03.01.2007
1 1 582 702 29
Vogt Motor−Heizflansch, Signalhorn, Kraftstoffvorwärmung
18.4
03.01.2007
983
Seis engine heating−flange cont., warning horn, fuel pre−heater 003
984
3:20 K11/87 K11/87 6:1
Zentralstecker Sammelanzeige (Ansicht von hinten)
X1 X1:31E mainplug monitoring module (view from backside)
29E
18.4
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 1
F25 F24
10A 10A
2 2 X5:1−20
Sammelanzeige 201918 1716151413 121110
X1
X1:31A monitoring module
29A 6 Vorglühen
F24:2 GLÜH
F24:2 5:1 A15 3:5
Warnbl.
7 BL−W
9:16
X1 15/54 Blinker rechts
20 FUEL 19 BL−R
HOURS 9:17
X1:156 86 OUT2 Blinker links
9 18 BL−L
F25:2 9:17
6:2 OUT1 Sitz
1 12 A68/6
6:9
Bel.
8 4
X12 X13 9:5
1 1 BEL 10 3
geöffnet in 0
Position (Bremse ein)
BR/BN 30 BR/BN
30 2 14 11 13 15 17 16 5
D+
K48 K26
GND
B13 B14
4:2 4:6
Bremse
6:9
6:9
Luftfilter
87a 87 87a 87
Tankanzeige
BL/BU SW/BK BL/BU SW/BK
Motoröldruck
Öltemperatur
30
Hydraulikölfilter
D+
Wasserabscheider
K36 X1 X1 X1
B06:1
2:7
Kühlmittelfüllstand
69 87 76
Initiator Farhebel"0
87a 87
BOMAG
K48:87A 4:13 X1:147 K26/87A
K61/85
2:18 2:6
12 SITZWARN. 109
6:9
X1:61 B30:2
X1:150 X1 X1 X1
114 90 105 X8
X1:153 K48:87A 1 X8 2
7:2 4:3
X10
300mA
X1:113 BRAKE MESX 2 X21:1
Sensor
2.5A
125mA
X9 89 +
86 86 Y04 86 1 86 R03
K48 K05 1 K26 K22 P P _t P Q
H14+ + bl 4 4 B30 2 −
− P
H07
85 85 2 85 X9 85 X10 X21:2
2 3 X1:117 X1:57
125mA
125mA
X1:149 X1 X1:82 X1:117
X1:117 129 X1:117
3:20 31 31 5:1
Magnetventil Bremse Rückfahrwarnsummer Warnsummer Störung Tankgeber Luftfilter Motoröldruck Sensor Wasserabschei
solenoid valve brake buzzer back up alarm buzzer failure sender fuel
air cleaner engine oil pressure sens. water separator
Hydraulikölfilter Öltemperatur Kühlmittelstand
hydraulik oil cleaner oil temperature coolant stock level
03.01.2007
1 1
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 29
X1:225
008 911 63
X1:187
br
X1
92
X22:1
X1:191
Voltmeter
volt meter
Drehzahlmesser
RPM meter
Hydrauliköltemperatur
hydraulic oil temperature
Kühlmitteltemperatur
collant temperature
gg
X1:189
+
+
15/54
Lern
Test
OUT+
+ + + + br
+ ws X22:4
Wiring diagram 582 702 29
P05 P04
P12 V P03 n P02 P14 B16 Modul Geschw. A05
modul speedometer
speedometer
−
− G − G − G − bei BW177 sw − X22:3 − −
Frequenzanzeige
frequency meter
in
bei BW213 bl
sw
Geschwindigkeitsanz.
X1:192 X1
OUT−
bei BW177 bl
bei BW213 sw
Aufnehmer Vibration
transducer vibration
93
X22:2
in X1:188
15/54
OUT+
OUT−
ZA Geschwindigkeitsanzeige
bl option speedometer
X1:70 X1:227 X1:226 A06 Elektronik
transducer
W
2:6 − 1 3 4
X1:223
BOMAG
X1:171
+
X1:173
1 BW 177−179 D−4/40 −−−− B60 dir. DIR MESX 7:2
B30:2
BW 177−179 DHC−4/DH−40 −−−−
R04 speed SPEED MESX 7:2
2 BW 211−216 D−4/40 PIN 1: −
X1:172
BW 213−214 DHC−4/DH−40 PIN 1: − − SPEED TAC 10:6
4:15
BW 216 DHC−4 PIN 3: +
BW 219 D−4 PIN 3: +
4:20 31 31 6:1
03.01.2007
1 1 582 702 29
Vogt Anzeigen
18.4
03.01.2007
985
Seis indicators 005
986
4:20 K11/87 K11/87 9:1
D+
4:13
B06:1 X1:32E
4:17
18.4
F14:2
2:20
Nur mit Sitzkontaktschalter
only with switch seat−contact
nur D−40/BW177D−4 Standard D−Maschinen/D−40 USA
only D−40/BW177D−4 Standard D−maschines/D−40 USA
Fahren
Öldruck
D+
F25:2 1 12 13 14 30 56
4:8
K04
31
A68 Modul Sitzschalter/Vibration
module seatswitch/vibration
S 56b
modul vibration
Modul Vibration
13 4 6 9 11 15 5
S42 1234 2
S42
1 5 7 3 S01:21
14 2:20 X1:158 X1:157
Fahrstufensch.
switch speed ranges K26/87A
Schalter Fahrstufen
2
1
B 1 X1:159
V09 X1 14
S13
88
23 13
A68/6 3 S35
S58
4:19 13
BOMAG
X1:143 X1:144 X1:162 X1:143 SITZWARN. 4
4:10 24 14
2
1
V05 X1:161 X1:160
V02 V03
2 1 1 2
GA MESX
7:2
KA MESX
Taster Vibration
pushbutton vibration
1.23A
1.23A
1.23A
X6 X7
Y31 Y30 Y30 Y31 X14 X11 1 1
1 1 1 1 Y07 Y08
3.33A
3.33A
A 2
10:7 KA
10:6 GA
a b
2 2 2 2
X6 X7
2 2
X1:124 X1:138 X1:124 X1:124
X1:149
X1:154
X1:149
X1:149
31
X1:118
5:20 31 7:1
03.01.2007
1 1
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 29
008 911 63
X2:66 X2:70 X2:47 X2:48 X2:49
X1:145 X42:1 X42:2 X42:3
X2:71
X46:B X46:A X46:E
X1:33E X1:35E 31
+ −
1 1 S01
F148 F146 2:18 X2:56 X2:53 X2:60 X2:57
10A 15A
2 2 32
X48:2 X48:1 X49:2 X49:1 P33
X1:33A X1:35A X1:146
X4:C
X4:E
X4:D
P16
B62 B62 F1 F2
+/sw
+/sw
nur bei BEM
only at BEM
CAN+ CAN−
nur bei BTM+/BTM prof
only at BTM+/BTM prof
X74:3
X74:5
X74:4
2 X42:4 X42:5
X2:57 X1:34A P11
20g/br
20g/br
nur bei BTM prof
X48:3 X48:4 X49:3 X49:4
Pot. 15
Leistung
Elektronik
AGND MESX
RxD TxD
BOMAG
X44:1
X44:7
X44:5
X44:4
X44:31
X44:56
X44:57
X44:59
X44:60
X44:30
X44:58
X44:29
X44:27
X44:26
X44:28
X44:54
A83
Messtechnik−Rechner
X44:38
X44:15
X44:35
X44:14
X44:36
X44:37
X44:41
X44:25
X44:53
X44:33
X44:55
X44:65
X44:66
X44:67
X44:68
GPS
GND
GND
EVIB
31 31 8:1
6:20
EVIB−Meter
EVIB−meter
nur bei BEM
only at BEM
03.01.2007
1 1 582 702 29
Vogt ZA Messtechnik
18.4
03.01.2007
987
Seis option measurement equipm. 007
988
18.4
F148:2
7:2
CAN3−
7:18
7:18 CAN3+
CAN3+ CAN3−
1 R242
60 OHM
X2:61 X2:62
X4:N X4:M
X75:7 X75:2
A87
USB−CAN Schnittst.
USB−CAN Interface BCM
BOMAG
X2:70
X76:1 X4:G
X76:2
P15
X4:F
X2:63
BCM 05
nur bei BCM
only at BCM
7:20 31 31 9:1
03.01.2007
1 1
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 29
008 911 63
30
X1:18A K06 X1:19A X1:25A
X1:26A
9:4 X1:305
X1:83
X1:301
Schalter StvZO 87 87a
switch, StvZO
13 23
012 31 11 23 Anschluß Arbeitsschein− L0R
werfer ohne StvZO L0R Schalter Blinker
S37
connection working head X1:21E X1:22E switch indicator
lights without StvZO 5 4 14 24
S15 F22 F19
32 12 24 15A 15A
Anschluß Arbeitsscheinwerfer
X1:21A E X1:22A D bei Kabine
Connection head lights
X1:306
X1:307
STV1
X1:302
10:17 A02
STV2
10:17
X1:23E X1:24E
K16 30 31 82 L R
9:9 F09 F10
15A 15A
87 87a X1:23A X1:24A
BOMAG
X1:308
X1:304
X1:303
13 23
01
01
X1:84 S14
X1:311
Anschluß Arbeitsschein−
werfer ohne StvZO
connection working head
BEL MESX Warnblinkschalter 14 24
7:8 switch, hazard light
X61:3 X1:320
X59:5 X1:310
X60:3 X1:319
X59:3 X1:312
X58:5 X1:309
X58:3
X61:1 X1:322
X60:1 X1:321
X59:2 X1:314
X58:2
BL−W
0,125A
E16 1 E17 1 E13 1 E12 1 E14 1 E15 1 E27 1 E28 1 E23 1 E25 1 4:19 E08 1 E09 1 E10 1 E11 1
0,125A
+
2 2 86 2 2 2 2 86 2 2 2 2 H06 2 2 2 2
K06 K16
4,6A
4,6A
4,6A
4,6A
−
X61:2
X59:6
X58:6
X60:2
85 85
X3:1
X1:315 X58:6
X1:316 X59:6
X1:315 X58:6
X1:316 X59:6
4,6A
4,6A
0,42A
0,42A
0,42A
0,42A
1,75A
1,75A
1,75A
1,75A
X1:323 X60:4
X1:324 X61:4
X1:315
X1:316
X1:323
X1:324
8:20 10:1
31
9:10 Schlußleuchte links 9:2 Bel. Warnbinkschalter 31
Scheinwerfer links tail light, LH illumination, switch hazard light
head light LH Parkleuchte links Blinkleuchte VL Blinkleuchte HR
Anschluß Arbeitsscheinwerfer
Scheinwerfer rechts parking light, LH bei ROPS/SD Aufbau indicator front, LH indicator rear, RH
head light RH Parkleuchte rechts Blinkleuchte HL
parking light, RH Connection head lights indicator rear, LH
acc.to ROPS/SD
Schlußleuchte rechts Blinkleuchte VR
tail light, RH indicator front, RH
03.01.2007
1 1 582 702 29
Vogt ZA Beleuchtung und StvZO
18.4
03.01.2007
989
Seis opt. illumination and StvZO 009
990
F42:H 11:14 F41:5 11:14
X3:6
2:11 K30 2:11 K32:87 11:2
X3:7
18.4
X3:3
F143 F42 F43 F44 F130 F41 F144
15A 10A 15A 15A 10A 10A 15A
7 8 1 2 3
5 6
F42 11:8
F130 10:9 F130 F130 11:7
10:14
A12
15
1,75A
0,83A
K141 30 1 B51 + 30 01W 7 2 01W 7 2 1 S163 5 1 S38 5
+ + + B51
01 01 E72
10:16 E29 E70
− − − − 1
87 87a 2 2 2 1
31 S21 5 4 S20 5 4
Radio
radio
Steckdose Fahrerst.
3,8A
3,8A
1 Tachographenmodul
2 4 6 A1 XS
Nachtleuchte
− 5:17 P09 +
indicator
X55:1
X56:1
X55:3
X56:3
12V 2 1
X55:4
X56:4
night illumination
SPEED TAC A16 1 B3 E27 1 E28 1 E23 1 E25
Kontrolleuchte
Innenleuchte
inside light, cabin
socket cabin
−
12V
Steckdose Kabine
+ 7,8,9 2 B4 2 2 2 2
A01 5 3 C3
A5+A6
BOMAG
S45 TK −
Heizung Heckscheibe
4 1
Schalter Innenleuche
switches interior lights
3
5A
86 S86 + 3 2 5 + + S158 I 15 +
K32 E32
M05 M M04 M K141
M M
31
X3:16
X3:15
− −
3 min
− M07 − M06 4
KA
85
GA
2,9A
ZA
only at hand−rail/Rops/sun−roof
6:17
6:16
11:11
Relais Kabine Türkontaktschalter Frequenzmodul Tachograph KABINE 31
relais cabin door switch module, frequency tachograph Schalter Nachtleuchte
switch, night illumination
X3:1
X3:2
Schalterbel.
switch illum.
9:20 31 31 11:1
03.01.2007
1 1
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 29
008 911 63
Potential 15 aus Kabine
F42
10:9 Potential 30 aus Kabine
2.5qmm
Bedienteil Kabinenheizung/Klimaanlage
1 2 3 12 11 13 14 16
X53:B X53:C control−unit cab−heater /air conditioning X54:4 X54:3 X54:2
0123 4 3 2 5 7 11 3 10 1
S44 A72
Steuergerät
control unit
6 11 12 1 Regel aus = 0,4A
S28
Schalter Kabinenlüfter
Wiring diagram 582 702 29
X53:L
X53:H
X53:M
2:8
87 87a X1:167 5 9 10 6 8 7 4 15
2.5qmm
X1:169 X18:1
X3:9
X3:11
X3:10
X3:12
X19:1
B131
B103 1 1 F97 1
_t 3A
_t 2 2
2
Thermofühler Klimaanlage
inline fuse
BOMAG
X19:2 Inline Sicherung
X20:1 X18:2
X17:1 X1:163
temperature sensor air conditioning
X17:3 X1:166
X17:2 X1:165
Thermofühler Heizung
temperature sensor heating unit
B104 4
P
HP X69:1 X77:1
1A
LP 3
ge rt or ge rt or +
Y138 1 1
X1:170 M17
X20:4
X20:3
V06 Y14
Überwachung Kühlmitteldruck
monitoring coolant pressure
M09 M M09 M
Kabinenlüfter 2 2
br br −
X20:2
X69:2 X77:2
Option
option
Y15 1 2
X17:4 V04 X1:168
2 1 10:19
3,5A
X1:164 KABINE 31
10:20 31 31 12:1
Frischluft Lüfter
blower fresch air
03.01.2007
1 1 582 702 29
Seis ZA Kabinenheizung, Klimaanlage, Zusatzheizung
18.4
03.01.2007
991
Seis opt. cabin−heater, air conditioning, add. heater 011
992
18.4
A67 1 2 3
Keyboard
keyboard
4 5 6
7 8 9
ANN 0 VAL
A66
Steuereinheit
control unit
BOMAG
+
H80
−
ZA
option
03.01.2007
1 1
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 29
A06
009
Wiring diagram 582 702 29
A05 005
005
17
17
10
Blinkgeber
Elektronik Geschwindigkeitsanzeige
Elektronik Frequenzanzeige vorne
flasher
Electronic system, speedometer
electronic frequency−meter, front
MODUL
MODUL
18.4
A12 010 5 Radio Radio
A13 003 3 Steuergeraet Heizung Control unit, heating
A15 004 16 Ueberwachungsmodul monitoring module
A16 010 7 Elektronik Tachograph Electronic system, tachograph
A51 010 6 Platine Frequenzanzeige Circuit board,frequenzy meter
A66 012 9 Elektronik Steuereinheit Electronic control unit
A67 012 15 Eingabeeinheit Keyboard
A68 006 10 Modul Sitzkontakt Modul seat contact MAX. 0,12A
A72 011 11 Steuergeraet Klimaanlage, Heizung Control unit,air conditioning,heating
A83 007 6 Elektronik Messtechnik electronic measurement−equipment
A87 008 15 USB−CAN Schnittstelle BCM USB−CAN Interface BCM
Seis
03.01.2007
Vogt
03.01.2007
E08 009 17 Blinkleuchte vorne links Indicator, front, lh. MAX. 1,75A
E09 009 18 Blinkleuchte hinten links Indicator, rear, lh. MAX. 1,75A
E10 009 19 Blinkleuchte vorne rechts Indicator, front, rh. MAX. 1,75A
E11 009 19 Blinkleuchte hinten rechts Indicator, rear, rh. MAX. 1,75A
E12 009 7 Parkleuchte links Parking light, lh. MAX. 0,42A
E13 009 6 Schlussleuchte links Tail light, lh. MAX. 0,42A
component listing
F84 007 5 Sicherung Steuerung (Klemme 54) Fuse, controller (Pin 54) 10A
F97 011 13 Sicherung Frischluftluefter fuse, blower fresh air 3A
FM4 007 11 Platinensicherung Multifuse
F105 002 16 Sicherung Motordrehzahl Fuse, motor speed 20A
582 702 29
F148 007 2 Sicherung Steuerung MESX (Potential 15) Fuse Controller (Pot. 15)
008 911
G01 63 002 4 Batterie BOMAG
Battery 103A 993
Name Bl. Pf. Benennung title TYP
18.4 G02
G03
002 5
002 3
Generator
Batterie
Generator
Battery Wiring diagram103A582 702 29
H06 009 15 Meldeleuchte Warnblinker Indicator light, hazard light
H07 004 10 Warnsummer Betriebsstoerung Warning buzzer, breakdown MAX. 0,12A
H14 004 8 Warnsummer Rueckwaertsfahrt Back−up alarm buzzer MAX. 0,12A
H80 012 15 Meldeleuchte Wegfahrsperre Indicator light, anti−theft device LED
K16 009 9 Relais Scheinwerfer vorne Relay, head lights, front BOSCHW
K22 004 9 Relais Hubmagnet Motor Relay, shut off solenoid, engine BOSCHW
K26 004 6 Relais Rueckfahrwarneinrichtung Relay, back up alarm BOSCHW
K32 010 2 Relais Kabine Relay, cabin BOSCHW
K35 002 16 Relais Selbsthaltung Relay, holding contact BOSCHW
K36 002 7 Relais Bremskontrolle Relay, brake control BOSCHW
K48 004 2 Relais Fahrhebel 0−Stellung Relay, travel lever 0−position BOSCHW
K61 002 5 Relais Ladekontrolle Relay, charge control BOSCHW
K114 002 14 Relais Motordrehzahl Relay, engine rpm BOSCHW
K141 010 16 Relais Heckscheibenheizung relay, heating rear screen BOSCHW
X1:54
003
Wiring diagram 582 702 29
X1:53 002
002
2
12
18
WAGO,E−Kasten
WAGO,E−Kasten
WAGO,E−Kasten
WAGO,E−BOX
WAGO,E−BOX
WAGO,E−BOX
18.4
X1:55 002 10 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:55 002 18 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:56 002 15 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:57 003 3 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:57 004 15 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:58 002 16 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:59 002 16 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:60 002 16 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:61 004 15 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:62 002 16 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:63 002 16 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
Seis
03.01.2007
Vogt
03.01.2007
18.4 X1:158
X1:159
X1:15A
006
006
002
13
16
10
WAGO,E−Kasten
WAGO,E−Kasten
WAGO,E−Kasten
WAGO,E−BOX
WAGO,E−BOX
WAGO,E−BOX
Wiring diagram 582 702 29
X1:15E 002 10 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:160 006 16 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:161 006 14 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:162 006 7 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:163 011 3 WAGO ZENTRALELEKTRIK WAGO E−BOX
X1:164 011 5 WAGO ZENTRALELEKTRIK WAGO E−BOX
X1:165 011 3 WAGO ZENTRALELEKTRIK WAGO E−BOX
X1:166 011 4 WAGO ZENTRALELEKTRIK WAGO E−BOX
X1:167 011 10 WAGO ZENTRALELEKTRIK WAGO E−BOX
X1:168 002 8 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:168 011 10 WAGO ZENTRALELEKTRIK WAGO E−BOX
Seis
03.01.2007
Vogt
03.01.2007
X2:47
003
Wiring diagram 582 702 29
X1:37E 003
007
14
14
18
WAGO,E−Kasten
WAGO,E−Kasten
WAGO−MESSTECHNIK
WAGO,E−BOX
WAGO,E−BOX
Wago−measurement equip.
18.4
X2:48 007 19 WAGO−MESSTECHNIK Wago−measurement equip.
X2:49 007 12 WAGO−MESSTECHNIK Wago−measurement equip.
X2:49 007 19 WAGO−MESSTECHNIK Wago−measurement equip.
X2:50 007 17 WAGO−MESSTECHNIK Wago−measurement equip.
X2:51 007 18 WAGO−MESSTECHNIK Wago−measurement equip.
X2:52 007 13 WAGO−MESSTECHNIK Wago−measurement equip.
X2:53 007 8 WAGO−MESSTECHNIK Wago−measurement equip.
X2:54 007 7 WAGO−MESSTECHNIK Wago−measurement equip.
X2:55 007 8 WAGO−MESSTECHNIK Wago−measurement equip.
X2:56 007 7 WAGO−MESSTECHNIK Wago−measurement equip.
X2:57 007 2 WAGO−MESSTECHNIK Wago−measurement equip.
Seis
03.01.2007
Vogt
03.01.2007
18.4 X22:2
X22:3
X22:4
005
005
005
9
10
10
ST. VIBRATIONSAUFNEHM
ST. VIBRATIONSAUFNEHM
ST. VIBRATIONSAUFNEHM
connector vibration sensor
connector vibration sensor
connector vibration sensor
Wiring diagram 582 702 29
X36:A 002 4 EINSPEISUNG SCHALTKAS supply e−box
X36:B 002 4 EINSPEISUNG SCHALTKAS supply e−box
X37:A 002 10 ST. ZÜNDSCHLOß E−KAST connector ignition switch
X37:B 002 11 ST. ZÜNDSCHLOSS E−KAS connector ignition switch, e−box
X38:A 002 11 ST.STARTER E−KASTEN connector starter e−box
X42:1 007 18 STECKER ADAPTER BOP conector adapter BOP
X42:2 007 19 STECKER ADAPTER BOP conector adapter BOP
X42:3 007 19 STECKER ADAPTER BOP conector adapter BOP
X42:4 007 18 STECKER ADAPTER BOP conector adapter BOP
X42:5 007 18 STECKER ADAPTER BOP conector adapter BOP
X44:1 007 13 MESX STECKER MESX Stecker
Seis
03.01.2007
Vogt
03.01.2007
X61:2
009
Wiring diagram 582 702 29
X61:1 009
009
6
19
19
STECKER STVZO HL
STECKER STVZO HR
STECKER STVZO HR
Con. STVZO BL
Con. STVZO BR
Con. STVZO BR
18.4
X61:3 009 8 STECKER STVZO HR Con. STVZO BR
X61:4 009 8 STECKER STVZO HR Con. STVZO BR
X65:1 012 5 KEYBOARD Keyboard
X65:2 012 5 KEYBOARD Keyboard
X65:3 012 5 KEYBOARD Keyboard
X65:4 012 5 KEYBOARD Keyboard
X65:5 012 5 KEYBOARD Keyboard
X65:7 012 5 KEYBOARD Keyboard
X65:8 012 12 KEYBOARD Keyboard
X65:9 012 5 KEYBOARD Keyboard
X65:10 012 5 KEYBOARD Keyboard
Seis
03.01.2007
Vogt
03.01.2007
Y01 002 13 Magnetventil Startmehrmenge Solenoid valve, start boost fuel MAX. 3.9A
Y04 004 5 Magnetventil Bremse Solenoid valve, brake MAX. 1,8A
Y07 006 14 D*Prop. Ventil Vibration groß E*prop. Valve vibration high MAX. 2,5A
Y08 006 16 D*Prop. Ventil Vibration groß E*prop. Valve vibration high MAX. 2,5A
Y13 002 18 Hubmagnet Motor Shut off solenoid, engine MAX. 3.8A
Y14 011 15 Kraftstoffpumpe Heizgeraet Fuel pump, heating unit
Y15 011 7 Magnetkupplung Klimakompressor Magnetic clutch, air conditioning compr. 3,5A
Y30 006 4 Magnetventil Stufenumschaltung vorn Solenoid valve, speed range sel., front MAX. 1,67A
Y30 006 6 Magnetventil Stufenumschaltung vorn Solenoid valve, speed range sel., front MAX. 1,67A
Y31 006 3 Magnetventil Stufenumschaltung hinten Solenoid valve, speed range sel., rear MAX. 1,23A
Y31 006 8 Magnetventil Stufenumschaltung hinten Solenoid valve, speed range sel., rear MAX. 1,23A
component listing
Y120 002 16 Magnetventil Motordrehzahl hoch Solenoid valve, rpm engine high
Y138 011 10 Magnetveentil Heizung Solenoid valve, heating unit 3,5A
Bauteilliste
77
582 702 29
107
X38
X37
X36
BOMAG
Nur bei StvzO
only acc. To StvZO illumination
K36 K22
K48
K61
A68 K114
K26
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 29
F1 F2
CAN 1
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 29
BOMAG
CAN 1 OPUS 21
A83
Messtechnik Steuerung
CAN 3 BCM
1001
Gepr.: 03.01.2007 Ers. f.: Blatt Nr.: 201
Name: Seis
overview e-box door BW 177...219 D-4/D-40 Replaces: Sheet No.: 201
18.4 Wiring diagram 582 702 29
WAGO smart DESIGNER 4.1
1 057 564 17
2 057 564 21
3 2 x 057 564 25 "L" + 793-501
7 057 564 22
8 4 x 057 564 23 "L" + 057 564 19 + 793-501
32 057 564 35
33 057 564 17
1 057 564 17
9 057 565 37
10 4 x 057 565 38 "R" + 793-501
14 057 565 37
15 3 x 057 565 38 "R" + 793-501
18 057 565 37
19 3 x 057 565 40 "R" + 793-501
23 057 565 37
24 5 x 057 565 40 "R" + 793-501
29 057 565 37
30 2 x 057 565 38 "R" + 793-501
34 057 565 37
35 4 x 057 565 38 "R" + 793-501
39 057 565 37
40 4 x 057 565 40 "R" + 793-501
46 057 565 37
47 2 x 057 565 40 "R" + 793-501
49 057 565 37
50 057 565 40 "R" + 793-501
51 057 565 38 "R" + 793-501
52 057 565 37
53 4 x 057 565 40 "R" + 793-501
58 057 565 37
59 4 x 057 565 40 "R" + 793-501
63 057 565 37
64 057 565 40 "R" + 793-501
65 057 565 35 "R" + 793-501
66 057 565 37
67 057 565 40 "R" + 793-501
68 057 565 35 "R" + 793-501
69 057 565 37
70 057 565 38 "R" + 793-501
71 2 x 057 565 40 "R" + 793-501
74 057 565 37
75 4 x 057 565 40 "R" + 793-501
79 057 565 37
80 057 565 40 "R" + 793-501
81 057 565 39 "R" + 793-501
82 057 565 37
83 057 565 40 "R" + 793-501
84 2 x 057 565 38 "R" + 793-501
87 057 565 37
88 057 564 17
1 057 564 17
5 057 565 37
6 057 565 38 "R" + 793-501
7 2 x 057 565 40 "R" + 793-501
10 057 565 37
11 2 x 057 565 40 "R" + 793-501
14 057 565 37
15 057 565 40 "R" + 793-501
16 057 565 38 "R" + 793-501
18 057 565 37
19 057 564 21
20 057 564 25 "L" + 793-501
21 057 564 17
1 057 564 17
6 057 565 37
7 2 x 057 565 40 "R" + 793-501
15 057 565 37
16 057 564 17
X5
X21
X11 X12
X59 X13
X58 X42
X20
X69 X46 X14
X18 X77
X6 X7
X17
X22 X19 X4 X3
X67 X8
X48 X49 X10
X36 X60
X37 X1 X61
X38 X2
X9
X44
BOMAG
X61
X77 X9
X21
X74 X75
X59
X76
X67 X8
X42 X11 X12
X10
X46 X13
X56
X53
X20
X18
X5 X17 X14
X19 X55 X6 X7
X54
X69
X58
X4 X3
X36 X1
X37 X44 X2
X38 X60
X48 X49
X22
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 29
008 911 63
table of contents: BW 177..219 D−4/D−40
Blatt Nr.: Zeichnungsnummer
Funktionsgruppe function unit
sheet no.: drawing − no.
001 582 702 41 Stromlaufplan Circuit Diagram
002 582 702 41 Versorgung, Starten, Motordrehzahl supply, starting unit, engine−speed
003 582 702 41 Motor−Heizflansch, Signalhorn, Kraftstoffvorwärmung engine heating−flange cont., warning horn, fuel pre−heater
004 582 702 41 Bremse, Rückfahrwarneinr., brake, back up alarm,
005 582 702 41 Überwachung monitoring
Wiring diagram 582 702 41
BOMAG
06.12.2007
001 001
Vogt Stromlaufplan 582 702 41
06.12.2007
18.5
1015
circuit diagram 001
Seis
30
1016
8:1
F48:2 K30
3:2 11:2
15:54
18.5
2:10 K11 30
X1
X1:15E 2:10
X1:9
17E
X1:10
87 87a
F13 1 1
F105
30A
2 20A
X1:15A 2 K11/87 3:1
X1
X36:B
X36:A
X37:A
17A X1
S00 30 27E X1:30E
30
F158:2 3:2 K35 1
2:16 F14 1 F39
F159:2 15A 15A
4qmm
3:2 Startschalter 87a 87 2 2
starting switch 15 54 58 19 17 50a
X1 X1 X1:30A
15:54 27A
2:13 80 K32:86
X1 11:2
79 S120 11 23
30 F14:2
B+ 7:9
2:10 K114
nur ohne Sitzkontaktschalter
without switch seat−contact
Schalter Motordrehzl
125mA
2 1 K11:86 X1:151
4:5
8:5
main fuse
K61 86 1 21 11 31 ?
Hauptsicherung
R10 K61 30 K05 S01
86
Sicherung Heizflansch
fuse heating−flange
82 OHM 4:3
Sicherung Glühwendelkerze 1
Sicherung Glühwendelkerzw 2
85 2 2:6 22 12 32 ?
87 87a K35
F48 2 2 2 F00 2 87 87a K05/87A NOT−AUS
F158 F159 3:2 Emerg.−Stop
85
125A 50A 50A 125A X1:53
BOMAG
1 1 1 1 5:6 X1:152
K61/85
8:2 X1 X1 1 X1 X1 30
Y01 X1:60 K22
X1 D+ MESX 7 8 58 59
1 211...219D−4/40 5:2
2
177...213 D−40 USA
X1 2x2.5qmm 87 87a
2:6
G03 + G01 +
65 X38:A 2
B+
− − D+ 81 V47 54
125mA
1
3.8A
30 50 45 AW
86 86 86 + HW 1
K09 Y13
B− W K114 Y120
1 K36 K11 M
S30 M01 70A/1A − 2
85
85 85 85
−
Y139 1 Y01 1 X1 X1 X1
X1:55 X1:56
2 W 6:2 62 63 55
option
Option
X1:66 X1:168 2 2
31 31 3:1
06.12.2007
1 1
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 41
2:3 F159:2
2:3 F158:2 X1 X1
37E 28E
2:14 K05/87A 1 1
008 911 63
F124 F23
K11:86 X1 25A 10A
2:10 2 2
52 X1 X1
2:2 F48:2 37A 28A
1
R26
2
220K−OHM
X1:155
Wiring diagram 582 702 41
13 23
2 7 5 1 15 TK 50 30 S03
14 24
A13
L A13
30(3) R 31 H X1 X1
K14 3 4 6 X1 97 98
30
Anbau im Motorbereich
assembled in engine−area
3:5 75 X1 X1
87(4) K14.1
101 102
Glühzeit Steuergerät
Modul Heizflanschsteuerung
modul heating−flange−control
3:9 87
X1
Taster Signalhorn
78
modul−glowing−control
X1:217
push but. warning horn
BOMAG
1 86
K14 K14.1
GLÜH
2
2
V21
V22
X67:1
4.2A
4.2A
1
1
85
5:12
2
Anbau im Motorbereich
assembled in engine−area
1 B11 1 B11 1
R79
Relais Heizflansch
relais heating−flange
1
Nur bei BW 219 D−4 und D−40 USA Version, sonst Option
only at BW 219 D−4 and D−40 USA version, otherwise option
167A
2 2 2
1 1 1 X67:2
B113
R19 2 R02 R78
2 50A 2 50A 2
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
57 64 57 X1:218 99 100
2:20 31 31 4:1
3:2 3:12
Sensor Kühlmitteltemperatur Glühwendelkerze 1 Kraftstoffvorwärmung Signalhorn Signalhorn
sensor collant temperature glow plug 1 fuel pre−heater warning horn warning horn
Heizflansch Glühwendelkerze 2
heating−flange glow plug 2
06.12.2007
1 1
Vogt Motor−Heizflansch, Signalhorn, Kraftstoffvorwärmung
18.5
06.12.2007
1017
Seis engine heating−flange cont., warning horn, fuel pre−heater 003
K11/87
1018
3:20 K11/87 5:1
X1
29E
18.5
1
F25
10A
2
X1
29A
X1:156
F25:2
7:2
X12 X13
1 1
geöffnet in 0
Position (Bremse ein)
BR/BN 30 BR/BN
30
B13 K48 B14 K26
4:2 4:6
87a 87 87a 87
BL/BU SW/BK BL/BU SW/BK
30
K36
2:7
Initiator Farhebel"0
87a 87
BOMAG
K48:87A 5:6 X1:147 K26/87A 7:9
300mA
X1:113 BRAKE MESX
2.5A
125mA
86 86 Y04 86 X9 1
K48 K05 1 K26
H14+
2 −
85 85 85 X9
2
125mA
125mA
X1:149 X1
X1:117 129 X1:117
3:20 31 31 5:1
06.12.2007
1 1
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 41
X1:31E
1
F24
10A
008 911 63
2
Sammelanzeige
X1:31A monitoring module
3 Vorglühen
A15 GLÜH
F24:2 6:1 3:7
Warnbl.
14 BL−W
10:16
X1 15/54 Blinker rechts
26 FUEL 12 BL−R
HOURS 10:16
86 OUT2 Blinker links
24 13 BL−L Zentralstecker Sammelanzeige (Ansicht von hinten)
10:16
OUT1 Sitz mainplug monitoring module (view from backside)
23 9 A68/6
7:9
Bel.
5 22
10:5
BEL 25 21
Wiring diagram 582 702 41
3 5
1 10 4 17 16 8 11 15
D+
1 7
GND
Bremse
7:9
7:9
8 13
Luftfilter
Tankanzeige
Motoröldruck
Öltemperatur
14 19
X5:1−26
Hydraulikölfilter
Wasserabscheider
D+
X1 X1 X1
B06:1
69 87 76 20 26
Kühlmittelfüllstand
21 25
X1 X1 X1 X1
6:6
110 71 X1:77 X1:72 111 112
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
106 67 X1:74 73 X1:68 107 108
K61/85
B30:2
BOMAG
X1
109 2:7
SITZ
7:9
X1:61
X1 X1
105
90 K48:87A X8 1 X8 2
4:3
X10
2 X21:1
Sensor
X1 or B21 3 B03 3 2 1 B06 1 B55 B124
89 +
86 R03
K22 P P _t P Q
+ bl 4 4 B30 2 −
P
H07
85 X10 X21:2
3 X1:117 X1:57
X1:82 X1:117
4:20 31 31 6:1
06.12.2007
1 1 582 702 41
Vogt Überwachung
18.5
06.12.2007
1019
Seis monitoring 005
1020
5:4 F24:2
18.5
X1:225
X1
X1:187 92
br
15/54
Lern
Test
OUT+
P04
Modul Geschw. A05
X22:1
X1:191 modul speedometer
speedometer
Voltmeter
volt meter
Drehzahlmesser
RPM meter
Hydrauliköltemperatur
hydraulic oil temperature
Kühlmitteltemperatur
collant temperature
gg −
X1:189
in
+
Geschwindigkeitsanz.
+ + + + br X1
OUT−
+ ws X22:4
93
P05
P12 V P03 n P02 P14 B16
− G − G − G − bei BW177 sw − X22:3 −
Frequenzanzeige
frequency meter
bei BW213 bl
sw ZA Geschwindigkeitsanzeige
X1:192 option speedometer
bei BW177 bl
bei BW213 sw
Aufnehmer Vibration
transducer vibration
X1:171
X22:2
+
in X1:188
15/54
OUT+
OUT−
bl B60 dir. X1:173 DIR MESX 8:2
X1:70 X1:227 X1:226 A06 Elektronik
transducer speed SPEED MESX 8:2
W
2:6 − 1 3 4 − X1:172
SPEED TAC
11:6
BOMAG
X1:223
B30:2
BW 177−179 DHC−4/DH−40 −−−−
R04 X1:174
2 BW 211−216 D−4/40 PIN 1: −
BW 213−214 DHC−4/DH−40 PIN 1: − BEL ANZ
5:8
10:5
BW 216 DHC−4 PIN 3: +
1 1 1 1
BW 219 D−4 PIN 3: +
E03 E04 E73 E22
P03:E1 2 P04:E1 2 P07:E1 2 PXX:E1 2
5:20 31 31 7:1
ZA Frequenzanzeige
Option option frequency meter nur bei ZA Messtechnik, Geschw.−Anzeige und Tachograph
option only at opt. measurement−equ., speedometer and tachograph
06.12.2007
1 1
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 41
D+ X1:32E
5:6
5:10 B06:1 F03 1
15A 2
008 911 63
K48/86
4:3 X1:32A
Fahren
Öldruck
D+
F25:2 1 12 13 14 30 56
4:8
K04
31
A68 Modul Sitzschalter/Vibration
module seatswitch/vibration
Wiring diagram 582 702 41
S 56b
modul vibration
Modul Vibration
13 4 6 9 11 15 5
S42 1234 2
S42
1 5 7 3 S01:21
14 2:20 X1:158 X1:157
Fahrstufensch.
switch speed ranges K26/87A
Schalter Fahrstufen
2
1
B 1 X1:159
V09 X1 14
S13
88
23 13
3 S35
A68/6 S58
5:12 13
BOMAG
2
1
V05 X1:161 X1:160
V02 V03
2 1 1 2
GA MESX
8:2
KA MESX
Taster Vibration
pushbutton vibration
1.23A
1.23A
1.23A
X6 X7
Y31 Y30 Y30 Y31 X14 X11 1 1
1 1 1 1 Y07 Y08
3.33A
3.33A
A 2
11:7 KA
11:6 GA
a b
2 2 2 2
X6 X7
2 2
X1:124 X1:138 X1:124 X1:124
X1:149
X1:154
X1:149
X1:149
31
X1:118
6:20 31 8:1
06.12.2007
1 1 582 702 41
Vogt Fahrstufen, Sitzkontaktsch., Vibration
18.5
06.12.2007
1021
Seis speed−ranges, seat−switch, vibr. 007
Beschleunigungssensoren Beschleunigungssensoren Drucker Anzeige BMFSA Display Messtechnik BOP
1022
acc. sensor front acc. sensor rear printer Display BMFSA display measurem. BOP
GND
30
18.5
2:20 30 10:1
Pot 30
K11/87
10:20 Pot 15
X4:C
X4:E
X4:D
P16
B62 B62 F1 F2
+/sw
+/sw
nur bei BEM
only at BEM
X74:3
X74:5
X74:4
2 X42:4 X42:5
X2:57 X1:34A P11
20g/br
20g/br
nur bei BTM prof
X48:3 X48:4 X49:3 X49:4
Pot. 15
Leistung
Elektronik
AGND MESX
RxD TxD
BOMAG
X44:1
X44:7
X44:5
X44:4
X44:31
X44:56
X44:57
X44:59
X44:60
X44:30
X44:58
X44:29
X44:27
X44:26
X44:28
X44:54
A83
Messtechnik−Rechner
X44:38
X44:15
X44:35
X44:14
X44:36
X44:37
X44:41
X44:25
X44:53
X44:33
X44:55
X44:65
X44:66
X44:67
X44:68
GPS
GND
GND
EVIB
31 31 9:1
7:20
EVIB−Meter
EVIB−meter
nur bei BEM
only at BEM
06.12.2007
1 1
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 41
8:2 F148:2
X44:25
008 911 63
8:10
8:4 F146:1
X2 80E
1 CAN3+ R92 CAN3−
F150 1 2
5A
2 60 OHM
X2 80A
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
43 44 70 61 62
Wiring diagram 582 702 41
X4 X4 X4 X4 X4
H J G N M
X75:7 X75:2
X78:1
X78:2
X78:3
X78:4
X71:12 X72:A X73:A
A93 30 A87
X71:6 X72:B X73:B USB−CAN Schnittst.
15 USB−CAN Interface BCM
X71:5
TxD2 X76:1
X71:8
BOMAG
RxD2
X71:10 X72:E X70:3
TxD1
X71:3 X72:D X70:2
RxD1
X71:7 X72:C X70:5
GND
8:20 31 31 10:1
06.12.2007
1 1 582 702 41
Vogt BOMAG Compaction Management BCM, GPS
18.5
06.12.2007
1023
Seis BOMAG Compaction Management BCM, GPS 009
K11/87
1024
7:20 K11/87 8:2
8:19 30 30
X1:18E X1:26E X1:19E X1:25E
X1:2
18.5
X1:301
Schalter StvZO 87 87a
switch, StvZO
13 23
012 31 11 23 Anschluß Arbeitsschein− L0R
werfer ohne StvZO L0R Schalter Blinker
S37
connection working head X1:21E X1:22E switch indicator
lights without StvZO 5 4 14 24
S15 F22 F19
32 12 24 15A 15A
Anschluß Arbeitsscheinwerfer
X1:21A E X1:22A D bei Kabine
Connection head lights
X1:306
X1:307
X1:302
11:17 A02
STV2
11:17
X1:23E X1:24E
K16 30 31 82 L R
10:9 F09 F10
15A 15A
87 87a X1:23A X1:24A
BL−L X1:91
BEL ANZ 5:12
6:19 BEL MESX STVZO BL−R
5:12
8:8
X1:96
5:4
13 BEL
BOMAG
S53 14
X1:308
X1:304
X1:303
13 23
X1:311
X1:313
X61:3 X1:320
X59:5 X1:310
X60:3 X1:319
X59:3 X1:312
X58:5 X1:309
X58:3
X61:1 X1:322
X58:2
BL−W
Anschluß Arbeitsschein−
werfer ohne StvZO
connection working head
5:12
0,125A
E16 1 E17 1 E13 1 E12 1 E14 1 E15 1 E27 1 E28 1 E23 1 E25 1 E08 1 E09 1 E10 1 E11 1
0,125A
+
2 2 86 2 2 2 2 86 2 2 2 2 H06 2 2 2 2
K06 K16
4,6A
4,6A
4,6A
4,6A
−
X61:2
X59:6
X58:6
X60:2
85 85
X3:1
X1:315 X58:6
X1:316 X59:6
X1:315 X58:6
X1:316 X59:6
4,6A
4,6A
0,42A
0,42A
0,42A
0,42A
1,75A
1,75A
1,75A
1,75A
X1:323 X60:4
X1:324 X61:4
X1:315
X1:316
X1:323
X1:324
9:20 11:1
31
10:10 Schlußleuchte links 10:2 Bel. Warnbinkschalter 31
Scheinwerfer links tail light, LH illumination, switch hazard light
head light LH Parkleuchte links Blinkleuchte VL Blinkleuchte HR
Anschluß Arbeitsscheinwerfer
Scheinwerfer rechts parking light, LH bei ROPS/SD Aufbau indicator front, LH indicator rear, RH
head light RH Parkleuchte rechts Blinkleuchte HL
parking light, RH Connection head lights indicator rear, LH
acc.to ROPS/SD
Schlußleuchte rechts Blinkleuchte VR
tail light, RH indicator front, RH
06.12.2007
1 1
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 41
008 911 63
10:13
87 87a E F
G H A B C
X3:3
F143 F42 F43 F44 F130 F41 F144
15A 10A 15A 15A 10A 10A 15A
7 8 1 2 3
5 6
F42 12:8
F130 11:9 F130 F130 12:7
11:14
A12
15
1,75A
0,83A
K141 30 1 B51 + 30 01W 7 2 01W 7 2 1 S163 5 1 S38 5
+ + + B51
01 01 E72
11:16 E29 E70
− − − − 1
Wiring diagram 582 702 41
87 87a 2 2 2 1
31 S21 5 4 S20 5 4
Radio
radio
Steckdose Fahrerst.
3,8A
3,8A
1 Tachographenmodul
2 4 6 A1 XS
Nachtleuchte
− 6:17 P09 +
indicator
X55:1
X56:1
X55:3
X56:3
12V 2 1
X55:4
X56:4
night illumination
SPEED TAC A16 1 B3 E27 1 E28 1 E23 1 E25
Kontrolleuchte
Innenleuchte
inside light, cabin
socket cabin
−
12V
Steckdose Kabine
+ 7,8,9 2 B4 2 2 2 2
A01 5 3 C3
A5+A6
S45 TK −
Heizung Heckscheibe
4 1
BOMAG
A51
Schalter Innenleuche
switches interior lights
3
5A
86 S86 + 3 2 5 + + S158 I 15 +
K32 E32
M05 M M04 M K141
M M
31
X3:16
X3:15
− −
3 min
− M07 − M06 4
KA
85
GA
2,9A
ZA
only at hand−rail/Rops/sun−roof
7:17
7:16
12:11
Relais Kabine Türkontaktschalter Frequenzmodul Tachograph KABINE 31
relais cabin door switch module, frequency tachograph Schalter Nachtleuchte
switch, night illumination
X3:1
X3:2
Schalterbel.
switch illum.
10:20 31 31 12:1
06.12.2007
1 1 582 702 41
Vogt ZA Kabine, Beleuchtung, Radio, Tachograph
18.5
06.12.2007
1025
Seis opt. cabin, headlights, radio, tachograph 011
1026
11:20 K32:87
Potential 15 aus Kabine
11:19 F41:5
F42:H
11:4
18.5
2.5qmm
Bedienteil Kabinenheizung/Klimaanlage
1 2 3 12 11 13 14 16
X53:B X53:C control−unit cab−heater /air conditioning X54:4 X54:3 X54:2
0123 4 3 2 5 7 11 3 10 1
S44 A72
Steuergerät
control unit
6 11 12 1 Regel aus = 0,4A
S28
Schalter Kabinenlüfter
E30 Kleine Stufe = 0,67A
switch blower cabin X54:6 X54:11 X54:12 X54:1 Zusatzheizung mittleter Stufe = 1,0A
add. heater große Stufe = 1.9A
heater timer
X53:L
X53:H
X53:M
2:8
87 87a X1:167 5 9 10 6 8 7 4 15
2.5qmm
X1:169 X18:1
X3:9
X3:11
X3:10
X3:12
X19:1
B131
B103 1 1 F97 1
_t 3A
BOMAG
_t 2 2
2
Thermofühler Klimaanlage
inline fuse
X19:2 Inline Sicherung
X20:1 X18:2
X17:1 X1:163
temperature sensor air conditioning
X17:3 X1:166
X17:2 X1:165
Thermofühler Heizung
temperature sensor heating unit
B104 4
P
HP X69:1 X77:1
1A
LP 3
ge rt or ge rt or +
Y138 1 1
X1:170 M17
X20:4
X20:3
V06 Y14
Überwachung Kühlmitteldruck
monitoring coolant pressure
M09 M M09 M M
Kabinenlüfter 2 2 2
br br −
X20:2 V04
X69:2 X77:2
1
Option
option
Y15 1
X17:4 X1:168
2 11:19
3,5A
X1:164 KABINE 31
X1:154
11:20 31 31 13:1
Frischluft Lüfter
blower fresch air
06.12.2007
1 1
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 41
008 911 63
keyboard
4 5 6
7 8 9
ANN 0 VAL
Wiring diagram 582 702 41
A66
Steuereinheit
control unit
BOMAG
ZA
option
06.12.2007
1 1 582 702 41
Vogt Diebstahlschutzsystem D−4, D−40, DHC−4, DH−40
18.5
06.12.2007
1027
Seis MV014 anti − theft system 013
Name Bl. Pf. Benennung title TYP
18.5 A02
A05
A06
010
006
006
17
17
10
Blinkgeber
Elektronik Geschwindigkeitsanzeige
Elektronik Frequenzanzeige vorne
flasher
Electronic system, speedometer Wiring diagramMODUL
electronic frequency−meter, front
582 702 41
MODUL
A12 011 5 Radio Radio
A13 003 4 Steuergeraet Heizung Control unit, heating
A13 003 9 Steuergeraet Heizung Control unit, heating
A15 005 9 Ueberwachungsmodul monitoring module
A16 011 7 Elektronik Tachograph Electronic system, tachograph
A51 011 6 Platine Frequenzanzeige Circuit board,frequenzy meter
A66 013 9 Elektronik Steuereinheit Electronic control unit
A67 013 15 Eingabeeinheit Keyboard
A68 007 10 Modul Sitzkontakt Modul seat contact MAX. 0,12A
A72 012 11 Steuergeraet Klimaanlage, Heizung Control unit,air conditioning,heating
A83 008 6 Elektronik Messtechnik electronic measurement−equipment
Seis
07.12.2007
Vogt
07.12.2007
E10 010 19 Blinkleuchte vorne rechts Indicator, front, rh. MAX. 1,75A
E11 010 19 Blinkleuchte hinten rechts Indicator, rear, rh. MAX. 1,75A
Bauteilliste
F146
011
Wiring diagram 582 702 41
F144 011
008
2
20
4
Sicherung Heckscheibenheizung
Sicherung Kabinensteckdose
Sicherung Steuerung MESX (Potential 30)
fuse rear screen heating unit
Fuse cabin−socket
Fuse Controller (Pot. 30)
18.5
F148 008 2 Sicherung Steuerung MESX (Potential 15) Fuse Controller (Pot. 15)
F150 009 14 Sicherung GPS Receiver Fuse, GPS receiver 5A
F158 002 3 Sicherung Gluehkerze 1 fuse glow plug 1 50A
F159 002 3 Sicherung Glühkerze 2 fuse glow plug 2 50A
18.5 V21
V22
V47
003 17 Diode
003 19 Diode
002 15 Diode (A7)
Diode
Diode
Diode (A7)
Wiring diagram 582 702 41
FE5B
X1:149
004
Wiring diagram 582 702 41
X1:149 004
007
2
1
12
WAGO,E−Kasten
WAGO,E−Kasten
WAGO,E−Kasten
WAGO,E−BOX
WAGO,E−BOX
WAGO,E−BOX
18.5
X1:149 007 13 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:149 007 19 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:150 004 5 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:151 002 18 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:152 002 18 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:153 004 6 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:154 007 13 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:154 012 8 WAGO ZENTRALELEKTRIK WAGO E−BOX
X1:155 003 16 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:156 004 2 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:157 007 13 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
Seis
07.12.2007
Vogt
07.12.2007
18.5 X1:321
X1:322
X1:323
010
010
010
18
19
6
WAGO ZENTRALELEKTRIK
WAGO ZENTRALELEKTRIK
WAGO ZENTRALELEKTRIK
WAGO E−BOX
WAGO E−BOX
WAGO E−BOX
Wiring diagram 582 702 41
X1:323 010 18 WAGO ZENTRALELEKTRIK WAGO E−BOX
X1:324 010 8 WAGO ZENTRALELEKTRIK WAGO E−BOX
X1:324 010 19 WAGO ZENTRALELEKTRIK WAGO E−BOX
X1:32A 007 18 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:32E 007 18 WAGO,E−Kasten WAGO,E−BOX
X1:33A 008 2 WAGO ZENTRALELEKTRIK WAGO E−BOX
X1:33E 008 2 WAGO ZENTRALELEKTRIK WAGO E−BOX
X1:34A 008 5 WAGO ZENTRALELEKTRIK WAGO E−BOX
X1:34E 008 5 WAGO ZENTRALELEKTRIK WAGO E−BOX
X1:35A 008 4 WAGO ZENTRALELEKTRIK WAGO E−BOX
X1:35E 008 4 WAGO ZENTRALELEKTRIK WAGO E−BOX
Seis
07.12.2007
Vogt
07.12.2007
X13:3
004
Wiring diagram 582 702 41
X13:2 004
004
6
6
6
DEUTSCH
DEUTSCH
DEUTSCH
DEUTSCH connector
DEUTSCH connector
DEUTSCH connector
18.5
X14:A 007 13 DEUTSCH DEUTSCH connector
X14:B 007 13 DEUTSCH DEUTSCH connector
X17:1 012 3 STECKER LÜFTER HKL conn. blower
X17:2 012 3 STECKER LÜFTER HKL conn. blower
X17:3 012 4 STECKER LÜFTER HKL conn. blower
X17:4 012 5 STECKER LÜFTER HKL conn. blower
X18:1 012 10 STECKER THERMOFÜHLER conn. sender temp.
X18:2 012 10 STECKER THERMOFÜHLER conn. sender temp.
X19:1 012 7 STECKER EISSCHUTZ HKL conn. anti−ice air−cond.
X19:2 012 7 STECKER EISSCHUTZ HKL conn. anti−ice air−cond.
X20:1 012 7 STECKER DRUCKSCH. KLI conn. pressuresitch air−cond.
Seis
07.12.2007
Vogt
07.12.2007
18.5 X55:4
X56:1
X56:2
011
011
011
10
14
13
STECKER WISCHER HINTE
STECKER WISCHER VORNE
STECKER WISCHER VORNE
connector wiper rear
conn. wiper front
conn. wiper front
Wiring diagram 582 702 41
X56:3 011 13 STECKER WISCHER VORNE conn. wiper front
X56:4 011 13 STECKER WISCHER VORNE conn. wiper front
X58:2 010 17 STECKER STVZO VL Con. STVZO FL
X58:3 010 7 STECKER STVZO VL Con. STVZO FL
X58:5 010 2 STECKER STVZO VL Con. STVZO FL
X58:6 010 2 STECKER STVZO VL Con. STVZO FL
X58:6 010 7 STECKER STVZO VL Con. STVZO FL
X58:6 010 17 STECKER STVZO VL Con. STVZO FL
X59:2 010 19 STECKER STVZO VR Con. STVZO FR
X59:3 010 7 STECKER STVZO VR Con. STVZO FR
X59:5 010 2 STECKER STVZO VR Con. STVZO FR
Seis
07.12.2007
Vogt
07.12.2007
Y30 007 4 Magnetventil Stufenumschaltung vorn Solenoid valve, speed range sel., front MAX. 1,67A
Y30 007 6 Magnetventil Stufenumschaltung vorn Solenoid valve, speed range sel., front MAX. 1,67A
Y31 007 3 Magnetventil Stufenumschaltung hinten Solenoid valve, speed range sel., rear MAX. 1,23A
Y31 007 8 Magnetventil Stufenumschaltung hinten Solenoid valve, speed range sel., rear MAX. 1,23A
Y120 002 16 Magnetventil Motordrehzahl hoch Solenoid valve, rpm engine high
7
008 911 63
X38
X37
X36
X1
Wiring diagram 582 702 41
X1
BOMAG
Nur bei StvzO
only acc. To StvZO illumination
K36 K22
K48
K61
A68 K114
K26
1035
K04
Gepr.: 06.12.2007 Ers. f.: Blatt Nr.: 201
Name: Seis overview e-box BW 177...219 D-4/D-40 Replaces: Sheet No.: 201
Nur bei VM8
only acc. To VM8
1036
F1 F2 CAN 1
18.5
X2
BOMAG
CAN 1 OPUS 21
A83
Messtechnik Steuerung
CAN 3 BCM
008 911 63
Wiring diagram 582 702 41
008 911 63
X5
X21
X39 X11 X12
X59 X40 X13
X58 X42
X20
X69 X46 X14
X18 X77
X6 X7
X17
X22 X19 X4 X3
X67 X8
Wiring diagram 582 702 41
BOMAG
X71
X61
X72
X77 X9
X21
X73 X74 X70
X59
X75 X76
X67 X8
X42 X11 X12
X10
X46 X13
X56
X53
X20
X18
X5 X17 X14
X19 X55 X6 X7
X54
X69 X39
X40
X58 X77
X4 X3
X36 X1
X37 X44 X2
X38 X60
X48 X49
X22
1047
Gepr.: 06.12.2007 Ers. f.: Blatt Nr.: 301
Name: Seis Connector overview BW 177...219 D-4/D-40 Replaces: Sheet No.: 301
18.5 Wiring diagram 582 702 41